巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Kulisa: {'def': '【中】雷电，钉头锤，狼牙棒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】雷电，钉头锤，狼牙棒。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuliṅka: {'def': 'a bird J.III,541 (=sakuṇika 542). Cp. kuluṅka. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kulla: {'def': '² (adj.) [fr. kula, Sk. kaula & kaulya, *kulya] belonging to the family J.IV,34 (°vatta family custom). (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】筏。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】筏。《蛇喻经》(Alagaddūpamasuttaṁ)：Evameva kho, bhikkhave, kullūpamo mayā dhammo desito nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāya. Kullūpamaṁ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṁ desitaṁ, ājānantehi dhammāpi vo pahātabbā pageva adhammā.(诸比丘！同样地，已被我说的筏喻，为渡越的利益，不为握持的利益。诸比丘！你们已知筏喻，诸法也应被你们彻底舍断，何况诸非法。」)(M.22./I,135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ a raft (of basket-work) (orig. meaning “hollow shaft,” cp. Sk. kulya, bone; Lat. caulis stalk, Gr. kaulόs, Ohg. hol, E. hollow) Vin.I,230; D.II,89 (kullaṁ bandhati); M.I,134 (kullūpama dhamma). (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kullaka: {'def': 'crate, basket work, a kind of raft, a little basket J.VI,64.

--vihāra (adj.) the state of being like one who has found a raft (?) Vin.II,304 (cp. Bdhgh uttānavihāra ibid. p. 330, and Vin. Texts III,404: an easy life). More correct is Kern’s explⁿ (Toev. s. v.) which puts kullaka in this combⁿ=kulla² (Sk. kauyla), thus meaning well-bred, of good family, gentlemanly. --saṇṭhāna consisting of stalks bound together, like a raft J.II,406--408 (not correct Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 78). Cp. Kern, Toev. I.154. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuluṅka: {'def': 'a cert. small bird J.III,478. Cp. kuliṅka. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kulāla: {'def': '【阳】陶工，制陶坯的工人。kulālacakka,【中】陶车，辘轳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a potter; only in --cakka a potter’s wheel J.I,63; --bhājana a potter’s vessel DhA.I,316; PvA.274. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】陶工，制陶坯的工人。~cakka,【中】陶车，辘轳。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kulāva: {'def': '1. waste (?) Vin.II,292: na kulāvaṁ gamenti “don’t let anything go to waste.” Reading doubtful. -- 2. a cert. bird J.VI,538. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kulāvaka: {'def': '【中】鸟巢，窝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】巢，窝。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) a nest D.I,91 (=DA.I,257 nivāsaṭṭhanaṁ); S.I,8; S.I,224=J.I,203 (a brood of birds=supaṇṇapotakā); J.III,74 (v. l. BB), 431; VI,344; DhA.II,22. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kulīna: {'def': '【形】有公认的氏族。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有公认的氏族。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=prec. in abhijāta-kula-kulīna descendant of a recognized clan Miln.359 (of a king); uccā° of noble birth, in uccākulīnatā descent from a high family S.I,87; M.III,37; VvA.32; nīca° of mean birth Sn.462. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kulīra: {'def': '【阳】螃蟹。~pāda,【形】（床）腿的形状有如螃蟹。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】螃蟹(crab)。kulīrapāda,【形】(床)腿的形状有如螃蟹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a crab, in kulīra-pādaka “a crab-footer,” i. e. a (sort of) bedstead Vin.II,149; IV,40 (kulira), cp. Bdhgh on latter passage at Vin.IV,357 (kuḷira° and kuḷiya°): a bedstead with curved or carved legs; esp. when carved to represent animal’s feet (Vin. Texts III,164). (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kulīraka: {'def': 'a crab J.VI,539 (=kakkaṭaka 540). (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kulūpaga: {'def': '﹐Kulūpaka﹐【形】常往来一个家庭的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】时常来访一个家庭的人。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kumati: {'def': '【阴】邪见。【形】邪见者。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】邪见。【形】邪见者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'wrong thought, wrong view (cp. kudiṭṭhi) Bdhd 137. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kumbha: {'def': '[for etym. s. kūpa and cp. Low Ger. kump or kumme, a round pot] 1. a round jar, waterpot (=kulālabhājana earthenware DhA.I,317), frequent in similes, either as illustrating fragility or emptiness and fullness: A.I,130, 131=Pug.32; A.V,337; S.II,83; Miln.414. As uda° waterpot Dh.121; J.I,20; Pv.I,12⁹. -- 2. one of the frontal globes of an elephant Vin.II,195 (hatthissa); VvA.182 (°ālaṅkārā ornaments for these).

--ûpama resembling a jar, of kāya Dh.40 (=DhA.I,317); of var. kinds of puggalā A.II,104=Pug.45. --kāra 1. a potter; enumerated with other occupations and trades at D.I,51=Miln.331. Vin.IV,7. In similes, generally referring to his skill D.I,78=M.II,18; Vism.142, 376; Sn.577; DhA.I,39 (°sālā). rāja° the king’s potter J.I,121. -- 2. a bird (Phasianus gallus? Hardy) VvA.163. -- Cpds.: °antevāsin the potter’s apprentice D.I,78=M.II,18; --°nivesana the dwelling of a potter Vin.I,342, 344; S.III,119; °pāka the potter’s oven S.II,83; A.IV,102; °-putta son of a potter (cp. Dial. I.100), a potter Vin.III,41 sq.; --kārikā a large earthen vessel (used as a hut to live in, Bdhgh) Vin.II,143, cp. Vin. Texts III,156; --ṭṭhānakathā gossip at the well D.I,8=D.III,36=A.V,128= S.V,419, expl^d. at DA.I,90 by udaka-ṭṭhānakathā, with variant udakatittha-kathā ti pi vuccati kumbha-dāsikathā vā; --thūṇa a sort of drum D.I,6 (expl. at DA.I,84: caturassara-ammaṇakatāḷaṁ kumbhasaddan ti pi eke); D.III,183; J.V,506 (pāṇissaraṁ+). --°ika one who plays that kind of drum Vin.IV,285=302; --tthenaka of cora, a thief, “who steals by means of a pot” (i. e. lights his candle under a pot (?) Bdhgh on Vin.II,256, cp. Vin. Texts III,325 “robber burglars”) only in simile Vin.II,256=S.II,264=A.IV,278; --dāsī a slave girl who brings the water from the well D.I,168; Miln.331; DhA.I,401 (udakatitthato k° viya ānītā). --dūhana milking into the pitchers, giving a pail of milk (of gāvo, cows) Sn.309. Cp. kuṇḍi. --bhāramatta as much as a pot can hold J.V,46; --matta of the size of a pot, in kumbhamattarahassaṅgā mahodarā yakkhā, explⁿ. of kumbhaṇḍā J.III,147. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】水壶。~kāra,【阳】陶工。~kārasālā,【阴】陶器场。~dāsī,【阴】挑水的女奴。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】水壶，古译：军持(澡瓶)。kumbhakāra,【阳】陶工。kumbhakārasālā,【阴】陶器场。kumbhadāsī,【阴】挑水的女奴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kumbhaka: {'def': '【中】(船的)桅杆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】（船的）桅杆。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kumbhaṇḍa: {'def': '【阳】南瓜(pumpkin)，鸠盘荼、瓮形鬼、变形夜叉、瓢箪、瓶腹，噉人之精气的鬼类，为增长天之部属。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1. m. a class of fairies or genii grouped with Yakkhas, Rakkhasas and Asuras S.II,258 (k° puriso vehāsaṁ gacchanto); J.I,204; III,147 (with def.); Miln.267; DhA.I,280; Pgdp 60. -- 2. nt. a kind of gourd J.I,411 (lābu°); V,37; (elāḷuka-lābuka°); DA.I,73= DhA.I,309 (placed on the back of a horse, as symbol of instability); the same as f. kumbhaṇḍī Vism.183 (lābu+). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】南瓜，鸠槃荼、瓮形鬼、变形夜叉、瓢箪。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kumbhī: {'def': '【阴】壶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】壶。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) a large round pot (often comb^d with kaḷopī,) Vin.I,49, 52, 286; II,142, 210; Th.2, 283. loha° a copper (also as lohamaya k° Sn.670), in °pakkhepana, one of the ordeals in Niraya PvA.221. Also a name for one of the Nirayas (see lohakumbhī). Cp. nidhi°.

--mukha the rim of a pot (always with kaḷopi-mukha) D.I,166 and≈(see kaḷopī); Vism.328. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kumbhīla: {'def': '【阳】鳄鱼(crocodile)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】鳄鱼。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(kuṁ+bhīra?) a crocodile (of the Gaṅges) J.I,216, 278; DhA.I,201; III,362.

--bhaya the fear of the crocodile, in enumeration of several objects causing fear, at M.I,459 sq.=A.II,123 sq.; Miln.196=Nd² on bhaya. -- Th.2, 502; --rājā the king of the crocodiles J.II,159. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kumbhīlaka: {'def': '[fr. kumbhīla] a kind of bird (“little crocodile”) J.IV,347. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kumina: {'def': '【中】捕鱼笼(fish-trap)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】捕鱼笼。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) a fish net Vin.III,63; Th.1, 297; J.II,238; ThA.243. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kumma: {'def': '【阳】龟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic kūrma] a tortoise S.IV,177 (+kacchapa); M.I,143; J.V,489; Miln.363, 408 (here as land-tortoise: cittaka-dhara°). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】龟。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kummagga: {'def': '【阳】错误的路径。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(and kumagga) [kuṁ+magga] a wrong path (lit. and fig.) Miln.390 (+kupatha); fig. (=micchāpatha) Dhs.381, 1003; Pug.22. Kummaggaṁ paṭipajjati to lose one’s way, to go astray. lit. Pv IV.3⁵; PvA.44 (v. l. SS.); fig. Sn.736; It.117; Th.2, 245. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】错误的路径。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kummiga: {'def': '(kuṁ+miga] a small or insignificant animal Miln.346. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kummāsa: {'def': '【阳】凝乳食品。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】凝乳食品(junket)，粥。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic kulmāṣa] junket, usually with odana, boiled rice. In formula of kāya (cātummahābhūtika etc., see kāya) D.I,76=M.II,17 and ≈; in enum. of material food (kabaḷiṅkārâhāra) Dhs.646, 740, 875. ‹-› Vin.III,15; J.I,228; Vv 14⁶ (=VvA.62 yava°); VvA.98 (odana°). In combⁿ with pūva (cake) DhA.I,367; PvA.244. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kumuda: {'def': '【中】白睡莲。~ṇāla,【中】白睡莲茎。~vaṇṇa, 【形】白睡莲的颜色的。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) 1. the white lotus Dh.285; Vv 35⁴ (=VvA.161); J.V,37 (seta°); Vism.174; DA.I,139. -- 2. a high numeral, in vīsati kumudā nirayā A.V,173=Sn.p. 126.

--naḷa a lotus-stalk J.I,223; --patta (-vaṇṇa) (having the colour of) white lotus petals J.I,58 (Ep. of sindhavā, steeds); --bhaṇḍikā a kind of corn Miln.292; --vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of white lotus (sindhavā) PvA.74, --vana a mass of white lotuses J.V,37. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】白睡莲。kumudaṇāla,【中】白睡莲茎。kumudavaṇṇa,【形】白睡莲的顔色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kumuda niraya: {'def': '睡莲地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Kumāra: {'def': 'kumāraka,【阳】男孩，年青人。kumārakīḷā,【阴】男孩的娱乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic kumāra] a young boy, son Sn.685 sq. (kuhiṁ kumāro aham api daṭthukāmo: w. ref. to the child Gotama); Pv III,5²; PvA.39, 41 (=māṇava); daharo kumāro M.II,24, 44. -- a son of (-°) rāja° PvA.163; khattiya°, brāhmaṇa° Bdhd 84; deva° J.III,392 yakkha° Bdhd 84.

--kīḷā the amusement of a boy J.I,137; --pañhā questions suitable for a boy Kh III,; --lakkhaṇa divination by means of a young male child (+kumāri°) D.I,9. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'kumāraka,【阳】男孩，年青人。~kīḷā,【阴】男孩的娱乐。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kumāraka: {'def': '1. m. a young boy, a youngster, kumārakā vā kumāriyo boys and girls S.III,190. 2. nt. °ṁ a childish thing A.III,114. -- f. °ikā a young girl, a virgin J.I,290, 411; II,180; IV,219 (thulla°); VI,64; DhA.III,171.

--vāda speech like a young boy’s; S.II,219. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kumārikā: {'def': 'kumārī,【阴】(未婚)少女，处女。brāhmaṇakumārikā,【阴】婆罗门少女(a brahmin young girl)。kumāribhūta, 少女。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'kumārī,【阴】女孩，处女。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kumārī: {'def': '(f.) a young girl Vin.II,10; V,129 (thulla°); A.III,76; J.III,395 (daharī k°); Pug.66 (itthī vā k° vā).

--pañha obtaining oracular answers from a girl supposed to be possessed by a spirit D.I,11 (cp. DA.I,97). (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kunda: {'def': '(nt.) the jasmine Dāvs.V,28. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中、形】茉莉属植物(jasmine)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中、形】茉莉属植物。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kunnadī: {'def': '【阴】小河。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】小河。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) (kuṁ-nadī) a small river, a rivulet S.I,109; II,32, 118; A.IV,100; J.III,221; Vism.231, 416; DA.I,58. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kunta: {'def': '[cp. Sk. kunta lance?] a kind of bird, otherwise called adāsa J.IV, 466. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 节杖。2. 一种鸟。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.节杖(sceptre lance)。2.一种鸟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuntala: {'def': '【阳】头发。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】头发。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuntanī: {'def': '(f.) a curlew (koñca), used as homing bird J.III,134. Kuntha, only in combⁿ kuntha-kipillaka (or °ikā) a sort of ant J.I,439; IV,142; Sn.602 (°ika); Vism.408; KhA 189. Cp. kimi. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】麻鹬(curlew)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】麻鹬。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuntha: {'def': '【阳】一种蚂蚁。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵 kunta),【阳】一种蚂蚁，音译：捃多。kunthakipillika﹐蝼蚁(kipillika【中】, kipillikā,【阴】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kupatha: {'def': '【阳】错误的路径。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kuṁ+patha) wrong path (cp. kummagga) Miln.390. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】错误的路径。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kupita: {'def': '(kuppati 的【过分】), 已生气，已冒犯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of kuppati]--1. shaken, disturbed Th.2, 504 (by fire=ThA.292); J.III,344 (°indriya). ‹-› 2. offended, angry D.III,238=M.I,101=A.IV,460= V.18; M. I.27; A.III,196 sq.; Pv.I,6⁷. Often comb^d with anattamana “angry and displeased” Vin.II,189; D.I,3, 90 (=DA.I,255 kuddha). -- As nt. kupitaṁ disturbance, in paccanta° a disturbance on the borderland J.III,497; Miln.314; PvA.20. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kuppati 的【过分】), 已生气，已冒犯。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuppa: {'def': '【形】不稳定，活动的，变动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不稳定，活动的，变动的。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [ger. of kuppati] shaking, unsteady, movable; A.III,128 (°dhammo, unsteady, of a pāpabhikkhu); Sn.784; of a kamma: a proceeding that can be quashed Vin.II,71 (also a°). nt. kuppaṁ anger Vin.II,133 (karis‹-› sāmi I shall pretend to be angry). -- akuppa (adj.) and akuppaṁ (nt.) steadfast, not to be shaken, an Ep. of arahant and nibbāna (cp. asaṅkuppa); akuppa-dhammo Pug.11 (see akuppa). Akuppaṁ as freedom from anger at Vin.II,251. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuppana: {'def': '【中】激动，忿怒，扰乱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】激动，忿怒，扰乱。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuppati: {'def': '(kup使激动+ya)﹐生气，激动，改变。kuppi,【过】。kuppamāna,【现分】。kuppeyya,【未被】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. kupyate, *qup to be agitated, to shake= Lat. cupio, cupidus, “to crave with agitation,” cp. semantically Lat. tremere›Fr. craindre] to shake, to quiver, to be agitated, to be disturbed, to be angry. ‹-› aor. kuppi, pp. kupita, ger. kuppa, caus. kopeti A.III,101; Sn. 826, 854; Pug.11, 12, 30. Of the wind Miln.135; of childbirth udaravāto kuppi (or kupita) J.II,393, 433; paccanto kuppi the border land was disturbed J.IV,446 (cp. kupita). (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kup + ya), 生气，激动，改变。kuppi, 【过】。kuppamāna, 【现分】。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuppila: {'def': '[?] a kind of flower J.VI,218 (C: mantālakamakula). (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kupurisa: {'def': '【阳】坏人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】坏人。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kura: {'def': '【中】饭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】饭。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kurara: {'def': '【阳】鹗鸟，背部褐色，头、颈和腹部白色；性凶猛；在树上或岩石上筑巢，常在水面上飞翔，吃鱼类；通称鱼鹰。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】鹗鸟(osprey)，背部褐色，头、颈和腹部白色；性凶猛；在树上或岩石上筑巢，常在水面上飞翔，吃鱼类；通称鱼鹰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'an osprey J.IV,295, 397 (=ukkusa); V,416; VI,539 (=seta°). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuravaka: {'def': '[=Sk. kuraṇṭaka Halāyudha, cp. kuraṇḍaka] N. of a tree, in ratta° J.I,39 (=bimbijāla the red Amaranth tree). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuraṇḍaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. kuraṇṭaka blossom of a species of Amaranth] a shrub and its flower Vism.183 (see also kuravaka & koraṇḍaka). °leṇa Npl. Vism.38. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】苋属植物（几种生长强壮的杂草植物中的任何一种；例：几种苋属 (Amaranthus) 植物中的任何一种〔如：反枝苋 A.retroflexus 和绿穗苋 A. hybridus〕，有时作调味植物，其种子可食，已在局部地区栽培，能产生一种重要的引起过敏症花粉热的花粉）。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】苋属植物(几种生长强壮的杂草植物中的任何一种；例：几种苋属 (Amaranthus) 植物中的任何一种〔如：反枝苋 A.retroflexus 和绿穗苋 A.hybridus〕，有时作调味植物，其种子可食，已在局部地区栽培，能产生一种重要的引起过敏症花粉热的花粉)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuru: {'def': 'm. [〃] クル, 倶盧 [十六大国の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. [〃] 倶盧(Kuru的音譯) [十六大國之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '（古国名）古卢，（古音译：）俱卢，居楼，拘楼', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Kuru-dīpa: {'def': 'm.［北］俱盧洲，クル.=Uttarakuru', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kurumba: {'def': 'クルンバ［ダミラ=タミール人］ kurumāna karotiのppr.正在做', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kurumāna: {'def': '(karoti 的【现分】), 正在做。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(karoti 的【现分】), 正在做。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kurundī: {'def': 'f.南インドのクルンダ精舎のパーリ註釈書.=Kurunda-aṭṭhakathā', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': 'N. of one of the lost SS commentaries on the Vinaya, used by Buddhaghosa (cp. Vin. Texts I.258; II,14). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kururaṭṭha: {'def': '【中】俱卢 (Kuru) 国（在北印度）。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】俱卢 (Kuru) 国(在北印度)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuruvinda: {'def': '植物の一種', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kuruvindaka: {'def': 'vermillion in cuṇṇa, a bath-powder made from k. J.III,282; and °suttī a string of beads covered with this powder Vin.II,106 (cp. Bdhgh Vin.II,315; Vin. Texts III,67). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuruṅga: {'def': '【阳】一种羚羊。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[deriv. unknown. The corresponding Sk. forms are kulunga and kulaṅga] a kind of antelope, in --miga the antelope deer J.I,173 (k°-jatāka); II,153 (do.). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】一种羚羊(antelope)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuruṭṭharū: {'def': '(v. l. kururū) a badly festering sore D.II,242. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kurūra: {'def': '【形】残酷的，凶猛的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】残酷的，凶猛的。(p106)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. krūra, cp. Lat. cruor thick blood, Gr. krέas (raw) flesh, Sk. kravih; Ohg. hrō, E. raw] bloody, raw, cruel, in °kammanta following a cruel (bloody) occupation (as hunting, fishing, bird killing, etc.) A.III,383=Pug.56 (expld. Pug.A 233 by dāruṇa°, also at PvA.181). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kurūrin: {'def': '=kurūra Pv III,2³. (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kusa: {'def': '【阳】很多，亚香茅（亚洲热带的一种草 (Cymbopogon nardus) 〔香茅属〕，长有蓝绿色、柠檬香味的叶子和香精油）。~agga,【中】香茅（锋利如刀锋）的叶缘。~cīra,【中】以香茅草制成的衣服。~pāta,【阳】香茅签的铸造。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1. the kusa grass (Poa cynosuroides) DhA.III,484: tikhiṇadhāraṁ tiṇaṁ antamaso tālapaṇṇam pi; Dh.311; J.I,190 (=tiṇa); IV,140. -- 2. a blade of grass used as a mark or a lot: pātite kuse “when the lot has been cast” Vin.I,299; kusaṁ saṅkāmetvā “having passed the lot on” Vin.III,58.

--agga the point of a blade of grass PvA.254=DA.I,164; Sdhp.349; kusaggena bhuñjati or pivati to eat or drink only (as little as) with a blade of grass Dh.70; VvA.73 (cp. Udānavarga p. 105); --kaṇṭhaka=prec. Pv III,2²⁸; --cīra a garment of grass Vin.I,305=D.I,167 =A.I,240, 295=II.206=Pug.55; --pāta the casting of a kusa lot Vin.I,285; --muṭṭhi a handful of grass A.V,234= 249. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】很多，亚香茅(亚洲热带的一种草 (Cymbopogon nardus) 〔香茅属〕，长有蓝绿色、柠檬香味的叶子和香精油)、香茅草、吉祥草。台语：茅草菰hm5chau2koo1。kusagga,【中】香茅(锋利如刀锋)的叶缘。kusacīra,【中】以香茅草制成的衣服。kusapāta,【阳】香茅签的铸造。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kusaka: {'def': '=prec. Vv 35⁵ (=VvA.162). (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kusala: {'def': '【中】善，好行动，功绩，德行。【形】聪明的。~kamma,【中】善业，正确的行为。~cetanā,【阴】善意，好的念头，正确的意志。~dhamma,【阳】善法。~vipāka,【阳】善异熟，善报，好行动的结果。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. kuśala] 1. (adj.) clever, skilful, expert; good, right, meritorious M.I,226; Dh.44; J.I,222. Esp. appl. in moral sense (=puñña), whereas akusala is practically equivalent to pāpa. ekam pi ce pāṇaṁ aduṭṭhacitto mettāyati kusalo tena hoti It.21; sappañño paṇḍito kusalo naro Sn.591, cp. 523; Pv.I,3³ (=nipuṇa). With kamma=a meritorious action, in kammaṁ katvā kusalaṁ D.III,157; Vv III,2⁷; Pv.I,10¹¹ see cpds. -- ācāra-k° good in conduct Dh.376; parappavāda° skilled in disputation Dpvs.IV,19; magga° (and opp. amagga°) one who is an expert as regards the Path (lit. & fig.) S.III,108; samāpatti°, etc. A.V,156 sq.; sālittaka-payoge k° skilled in the art of throwing pot‹-› sherds PvA.282. -- In derivation k. is expl^d by Dhpāla & Bdhgh by kucchita and salana, viz. kucchita-salanādi atthena kusalaṁ VvA.169; kucchite pāpadhamme salayanti calayanti kappenti viddhaṁsenti ti kusalā DhsA.39; where four alternative derivations are given (cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. lxxxii). -- 2. (nt.) a good thing, good deeds, virtue, merit, good consciousness (citta omitted; cp. DhsA.162, 200, etc.): yassa pāpaṁ kataṁ kammaṁ kusalena pithīyati, so imaṁ lokaṁ pabhāseti “he makes this world shine, who covers an evil deed with a good one” M.II,104=Dh.173=Th.1, 872; sukhañ ca k. pucchi (fitness) Sn.981; Vv 30¹ (=ārogyaṁ); D.I,24; J.VI,367; Pv.I,1³ (=puñña); PvA.75; Miln.25. -- In special sense as ten kusalāni equivalent to the dasasīlaṁ (cp. sīla) M.I,47; A.V,241, 274. All good qualities (dhammā) which constitute right and meritorious conduct are comprised in the phrase --kusala-dhammā Sn.1039, 1078, expld. in extenso Nd² s. v. See also cpd. °dhamma. -- Kusalaṁ karoti to do what is good and righteous, i. e. kāyena, vācāya, manasā It.78; cp. Dh.53; sabba-pāpassa akaraṇaṁ kusalassa upasampadā sacittapariyodapanaṁ etaṁ Buddhānusāsanaṁ D.II,49=Dh.183; cp. Nett 43, 81, 171, 186. Kusalaṁ bhāveti to pursue righteousness (together with akusalaṁ pajahati to give up wrong habits) A.I,58; IV,109 sq.; It.9. -- akusala adj.: improper, wrong, bad; nt.: demerit, evil deed D.I,37, 163; bālo+akusalo Sn.879, 887;=pāpa PvA.60, cp. pāpapasuto akatakusalo ib. 6. kusalaṁ & akusalaṁ are discussed in detail (with ref. to rūpâvacara° fivefold, to arūpâvacara° & lokuttara° fourfold, to kāmâvacara° eight & twelvefold) at Vism.452--454. -- kusalâkusala good and bad M.I,489; S.V,91; Miln.25; Nett 161, 192; Dhs.1124 sq. -- sukusala (dhammānaṁ) highly skilled D.I,180 (cp. M. II.31).

--anuesin striving after righteousness Sn.965; cp. kiṅkusalānuesin D.II,151 and kiṅkusalagavesin M.I,163 sq.; --abhisanda overflow of merit (+puñña°) A.II,54 sq.; III,51; 337; --kamma meritorious action, right conduct A.I,104; 292 sq.; Ps.I,85; II,72 sq.; PvA.9, 26; --cittā (pl.) good thoughts Vbh.169--173, 184, 285 sq., 294 sq.; --cetanā right volition Vbh.135; --dhammā (pl.) (all) points of righteousness, good qualities of character S.II,206; M.I,98; A.IV,11 sq.; V,90 sq.; 123 sq.; Pug.68, 71; Vbh.105; Ps.I,101, 132; II,15, 230; VvA.74, 127; --pakkha “the side of virtue,” all that belongs to good character M.III,77 (and a°) with adj. °pakkhika S.V,91; --macchariya Dhs.1122 is to be corrected to kula° instead of kusala° (meanness as regards family) cp. Nd² on veviccha; --mūla the basis or root of goodness or merit; there are three: alobha, adosa, amoha M.I,47, 489=A.I,203=Nett 183; D.III,214; Dhs.32, 313, 981; Vbh.169 sq., 210; Nett 126. Cp. °paccaya Vbh.169; °ropanā Nett 50; --vitakka good reasoning, of which there are three: nekkhamma°, avyāpāda°, avihiṁsā° D.III,215; It.82; Nett 126; --vipāka being a fruit of good kamma Dhs.454; Vism.454 (twofold, viz. ahetuka & sahetuka). --vedanā good, pure feeling Vbh.3 sq.; cp. °saññā and °saṅkhārā Vbh.6 sq.; Nett 126 (three °saññā, same as under °vitakkā); --sīla good, proper conduct of life M.II,25 sq.; adj. °sīlin D.I,115 (=DA.I,286). (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】善，好行动，功绩，德行。【形】聪明的。kusalakamma,【中】善业，正确的行为。kusalacetanā,【阴】善意，好的念头，正确的意志。kusaladhamma,【阳】善法。kusalavipāka,【阳】善异熟，善报，好行动的结果。dasa kusalāni﹐十善，又作十善业道(dasa kusala-kammapathā)，即身口意之十种善行。SA.46.2./III,141.︰kusalāti kosallasambhūtā anavajjasukhavipākā. Akusalāti akosallasambhūtā sāvajjadukkhavipākā. Sāvajjāti akusalā. Anavajjāti kusalā.(善︰善生的，无罪乐果报。不善︰不善生的。有罪︰不善。无罪︰善。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '善', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Kusalatā: {'def': '[fem. abstr. fr. kusala] (only --°) skill, cleverness, accomplishment; good quality. -- lakkhaṇa° skill in interpreting special signs VvA.138; aparicita° neglect in acquiring good qualities PvA.67. For foll. cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs. trsl. pp. 345--348; āpatti° skill as to what is an offence; samāpatti° in the Attainments; dhātu° in the Elements; manasikāra° proficiency in attention; āyatana° skill in the spheres; paṭiccasamuppāda° skill in conditioned Genesis; ṭhāna° and aṭṭhāna° skill in affirming (negating) causal conjuncture: all at D.III,212 and Dhs.1329--1338; cp. A.I,84, 94. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】聪明，灵巧，成就。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】聪明，灵巧，成就。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kusanāḷi: {'def': 'f.吉祥草', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kusi: {'def': '(nt.) one of the four cross seams of the robe of a bhikkhu Vin.I,287; II,177; and aḍḍha° intermediate cross seam ibid. See Bdhgh’s note in Vin. Texts II.208. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kusināra: {'def': 'f.，Kusinagara n.［BSK.kusinagara］クシナガラ［マツラ国の城市で釈尊入滅地］', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '（城市名）古西那拉，（古音译：）拘尸那揭罗，拘尸那', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Kusinārā: {'def': '【阴】拘尸那罗(马拉 (Malla) 的主要城市)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】拘尸那罗（马拉 (Malla) 的主要城市）。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'f., Kusinagara n. [BSk. Kuśinagara] 拘尸那竭羅 [Mallā國(摩羅國)的城市,釋尊入滅地].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f., Kusinagara n. [BSk. Kuśinagara] 拘尸那竭羅 [Mallā国の城市で釈尊入滅地].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Kussubbha: {'def': 'and kussobbha (nt.) [Sk. kuśvabhra] a small pond, usually comb^d with kunnadī and appl^d in similes: S.II,32=A.I,243=V.114; S.II,118; V,47, 63, 395; A.II,140; IV,100; Sn.720; PvA.29; DA.I,58. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kusubbha: {'def': '【阳】小坑。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】小坑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kusuma: {'def': '(nt.) any flower J.III,394 (°dāma); V,37; PvA.157 (=puppha); VvA.42; Dpvs.I,4; Sdhp.246, 595; Dāvs.V,51 (°agghika), fig. vimutti° the flower of emancipation Th.1, 100; Miln.399. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】(任何一种的)花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】（任何一种的）花。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kusumbha: {'def': '(nt.) the safflower, Carthamus tinctorius, used for dying red J.V,211 (°rattavattha); VI,264 (do); Khus IV.2. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】红花(saf-flower，旧大陆的一种草本 (Carthamus tinctorius) 像一种蓟，为其油广泛栽培，有大的鲜红色或桔黄色头状花〔用於制造染料，现今主要在东方用於染丝和棉，成浅红色〕)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】红花（旧大陆的一种草本 (Carthamus tinctorius) 象一种蓟，为其油广泛栽培，有大的鲜红色或桔黄色头状花〔用于制造染料，现今主要在东方用于染丝和棉，成浅红色〕）。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kusumita: {'def': '(adj.) in flower, blooming VvA.160, 162. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】在花中，（花）盛开的。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】在花中，(花)盛开的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kusīta: {'def': '【形】懒惰的。kusītā,【阴】kusītta,【中】怠惰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】懒惰的。~tā,【阴】 ~tta,【中】怠惰。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. kusīda; cp. kosajja] indolent, inert, inactive. Expl. by kāma-vitakkādīhi vitakkehi vītināmanakapuggalo DhA.II,260; by nibbiriyo DhA.III,410; by alaso PvA.175, Often comb^d with hīnaviriya, devoid of zeal; It.27, 116; Dh.7, 112, 280; Miln.300, 396. Also equivalent to alasa Dh.112; comb^d with dussīla Miln.300, 396; with duppañña D.III,252=282; A.II,227, 230; III,7, 183, 433. -- In other connections: M.I,43, 471; A.III,7 sq., 127; V,95, 146, 153, 329 sq.; S.II,29, 159, 206; It.71, 102; J.IV,131 (nibbiriya+); Vism.132; DhA.I,69. The eight kusītavatthūni, occasions of indolence, are enumerated at A.IV,332; D.III,255; Vbh.385. -- akusīta alert, mindful, careful Sn.68 (+alīnacitto); Nd² s. v.; Sdhp.391. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kusītatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. kusīta] in a° alertness, brightness, keenness VvA.138. (Page 224)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kusūla: {'def': '【阳】谷仓。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】谷仓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kutettha: {'def': '( kuto从何处+attha 义), 从哪里考虑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kutha: {'def': 'see under ku°. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuthana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. kvath=kuth] digestion Vism.345. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuthati: {'def': '[Sk. kvathati cp. kaṭhati, kaṭhita, kuṭṭhita, ukkaṭṭhita & upakūḷita²] to cook, to boil: kuthanto (ppr) boiling (putrid, foul? So Kern, Toev, s. v.) J.VI,105 (of Vetaraṇī, cp. kuṭṭhita).-pp. kuthita. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuthita: {'def': '[pp. of kuthati] 1. boiled, cooked Th.2, 504; KhA 62; Vism.259=KhA 58. Cp. vikkuthita. ‹-› 2. digested Vism.345. -- 3. fig. tormented, distressed (perhaps: rotten, foul, cp. kilijjati=pūti hoti) Miln.250 (+kiliṭṭha). -- Cp. Vin. Texts II.57 on Bdhgh’s note to MV VI,14, 5. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已沸腾，已很热。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已沸腾，已很热。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuto: {'def': '【副】从哪里（来）？从何处（来）？(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see under ku°. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ku的离格),【副】从哪里(来)?从何处(来)?', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kutta: {'def': '【中】行为，(女子)玩弄男人，卖弄风骚，撒娇，献媚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Der. fr. kattā=Sk. kṛtṛ as kṛttra=P. kutta, cp. Sk. kṛtrima artificial=P. kuttima, in caus. -- pass. sense=kappita of kḷp)] “being made up.” 1. Work. The beginning of things was the work of Brahmā. The use of kutta implies that the work was so easy as to be nearer play than work, and to have been carried out in a mood of graceful sport. D.III,28. -- 2. behaviour, i. e. charming behaviour, coquetry J.II,329, comb^d with līḷā (graceful carriage) J.I,296, 433; and with vilāsa (charming behaviour) J.II,127; IV,219, 472; itthi° and purisa° A.IV,57=Dhs.633 (expl. at DhsA.321 by kiriyā). -- As adj. in kuttavāla, well arranged, plaited tails D.I,105 (expl^d at DA.I,274 as kappita-vāla; cp. kappita). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】行为，（女子）玩弄男人，卖弄风骚，撒娇，献媚。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuttaka: {'def': '【中】（够 12 个女人跳舞的）大地毯。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[der. fr. kutta, that which is made up or “woven,” with orig. meaning of karoti to weave?] 1. nt. a woollen carpet (DA.I,87=as used for dancing-women), together with kaṭṭhissa and koseyya in list of forbidden articles of bedding D.I,7=A.I,181=Vin.I,192=II.163. -- 2. adj. “made up,” pretending, in samaṇa-k° a sham ascetic Vin.III,68--71. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】(够 12 个女人跳舞的)大地毯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuttama: {'def': 'in kāsi-kuttama J.VI,49 should be read as kāsik’uttama. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuttha: {'def': 'kutra,【副】哪里？(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'kutra,【副】哪里? 在何处?', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kutthaka: {'def': 'S.I,66 should be replaced by v. l. koṭṭhuka. (Page 221)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kutti: {'def': '(f.) [cp. kutta] arrangement, fitting, trapping, harnessing Vin.II,108 (sara°: accuracy in sound, harmony); J.III,314 (massu° beard-dressing, expl^d by massu-kiriyā. Here corresponding to Sk *kḷpti!); IV,352 (hattha°, elephant trappings, cp. kappanā); V,215 (=karaṇa, cp. Sk. kalpa). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kutuka: {'def': '(adj.) eager, in sakutuka eagerness Dāvs.IV,41. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kutumbaka: {'def': '(-puppha) N. of a flower J.I,60. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kutūhala: {'def': '(m. nt.) tumult, excitement; Dāvs.V,22; DhA.III,194 (v. l. kot°). a° (adj.) unperturbed, not shamming J.I,387 (expl. by avikiṇṇa-vaco of straight speech). See also kotūhala.

--maṅgala a festivity, ceremony, Nd² in expl. of anekarūpena Sn.1079, 1082; --sālā a hall for recreation, a common room D.I,179=S.IV,398=M.II,2, cp. Divy 143. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】刺激(tumult, excitement;)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】刺激，好奇。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuva: {'def': '(ṁ) see ku-. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuvalaya: {'def': '【中】睡莲。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】睡莲(water lily)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'the (blue) water-lily, lotus, usually comb^d with kamala, q. v. Vv 35⁴; DA.I,50; VvA.161, 181; PvA.23, 77. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuvera: {'def': '= Kubera.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】俱吠罗、鸠鞞罗，统治北方的神名，夜叉王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '= Kubera 俱吠羅 [= 多聞天, 毘沙門天].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【阳】俱吠罗、鸠鞞罗，统治北方的神的名字，夜叉王。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'm.毘沙門天.= Kubera', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kuvilāra: {'def': '=koviḷāra J.V,69 (v. l. B. ko°). (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuyyaka: {'def': 'a kind of flower J.I,60 (°puppha). (Page 222)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuñca: {'def': '(nt.) [kruñc, cp. Sk. krośati, Pali koñca, Lat. crocio, cornix, corvus; Gr. krw/cw, kraugή; all of crowing noise; from sound-root kṛ, see note on gala] a crowing or trumpeting noise (in compounds only). --kāra cackling (of a hen) ThA.255; --nāda trumpeting (of an elephant) J.III,114. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuñcanāda: {'def': '【阳】（象所发出的）尖锐的叫声。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】(象所发出的)尖锐的叫声。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuñcikā: {'def': '【阴】钥匙。 ~vivara,【中】锁眼，钥匙孔。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】钥匙。kuñcikavivara,【中】钥匙孔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) a key, Bdhgh on C. V. V.29, 2 (Vin.II,319) cp. tāla Vin.II,148; Vism.251 (°kosaka a case for a key); DA.I,200, 207, 252; DhA.II,143. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuñcita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of kuñc or kruñc; cp. Sk. kruñcati, to be crooked, Lat. crux, Ohg. hrukki, also Sk. kuñcita bent] bent, crooked J.I,89 (°kesa with wavy hair); V,202 (°agga: kaṇṇesu lambanti ca kuñcitaggā: expl^d on p. 204 by sīhakuṇḍale sandhāya vadati, evidently taking kuñcita as a sort of earring); of Petas, Sdhp.102. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kuñcati 的【过分】), 已弯曲，已弄卷。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(kuñcati 的【过分】), 已弯曲，已弄卷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuñja: {'def': '【中】峡谷，（两边有树的）小谷。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m.) a hollow, a glen, dell, used by Dhpāla in explⁿ of kuñjara at VvA.35 (kuñjaro ti kuñje giritale ramati) and PvA.57 (kuṁ pathaviṁ jīrayati kuñjo suvāraṁ aticarati kuñjaro ti). --nadī° a river glen DA.I,209. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】峡谷，(两边有树的)小谷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuñjara: {'def': '(m.) [Deriv. unknown. The sound is not unlike an elephant’s trumpeting & need not be Aryan, which has hasti. The Sk. of the epics & fables uses both h° and k°] an elephant Vin.II,195; M.I,229, 375; S.I,157; Dh.322, 324, 327; J.V,336; Vv 5¹; Pv.I,11³; DhA.IV,4; ThA.252; Miln.245. --deva° chief of the gods, Ep. of Sakka Vv 47⁷; J.V,158.

--vara a state elephant VvA.181. --sālā an elephant’s stable DhA.IV,203. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】象。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuḍumala: {'def': '【阳】蓓蕾(an opening bud)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蓓蕾。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuḍumalaka: {'def': '[for kusuma°] an opening bud A.IV,117, 119. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuḍuva: {'def': '谷嘟哇（谷粒或液体的衡量，4 谷嘟哇 = 1 粑铊。参考 Pattha）。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '谷嘟哇(谷粒或液体的衡量，4 谷嘟哇 = 1 粑铊。参考Pattha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuḍḍa: {'def': '[to kṣud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa] a wall built of wattle and daub, in °nagaraka “a little wattle and daub town.” D.II,146, 169 (cp. Rh.D. on this in Buddh. Suttas p. 99). Three such kinds of simply-built walls are mentioned at Vin.IV,266, viz. iṭṭhakā° of tiles, silā° of stone, dāru° of wood. The explⁿ of kuḍḍa at Vism.394 is “geha-bhittiyā etam adhivacanaṁ.” Kuḍḍa-rājā see under kuṭṭa). Also in tirokuḍḍaṁ outside the wall M.I,34=II.18; A.IV,55; Vism.394, and tirokuḍḍesu Kh VIII¹=Pv.I,5¹. -- parakuḍḍaṁ nissāya J.II,431 (near another man’s wall) is doubtful; vv. ll. S. kuḍḍhaṁ. B. kuṭaṁ and kuṭṭaṁ. (kuḍḍa-) pāda the lower part of a lath and plaster wall Vin.II,152. Note. Kuḍḍa at Vin.II,151 is to be read kuṭṭa. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(to ksud to grind, cp. cuṇṇa),【中】墙壁(a wall built of wattle and daub)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】墙壁。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuḍḍa-mūla: {'def': 'a sort of root Vin.III,15. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuḍḍaka: {'def': 'in eka° and dvi° having single or double walls J.I,92. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuḷika: {'def': '(?) in kata°-kalāpaka a bundle of beads? Bdhgh Vin.II,315 (C.V, V.1, 3) in explⁿ of kuruvindaka-sutti. (Page 223)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṅkuma: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. kuṅkuma] saffron Miln.382; Vism.241. (Page 218)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1. 藏红花（番红花），干藏红花粉（用于食品上色和调味的）金黄色，桔黄色。2. 郁金香《清净道论》〔叶均〕（多年生草本植物，叶阔披针形，有白粉，花通常鲜红色，花心黑紫色，花瓣倒卵形，结蒴果；供观赏，根和花可做镇静剂）。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】1.藏红花(saffron番红花)，乾藏红花粉(用於食品上色和调味的)金黄色，桔黄色。2.郁金香《清净道论》〔叶均〕(多年生草本植物，叶阔披针形，有白粉，花通常鲜红色，花心黑紫色，花瓣倒卵形，结蒴果；供观赏，根和花可做镇静剂)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuṅkumin: {'def': '(adj.) fidgety J.V,435. (Page 218)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṅkumiya: {'def': '(nt.) noise, tumult J.V,437 (=kolāhala). (Page 218)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇa: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. kuṇi lame from *qer, to bend=Gr. kullόs crooked and lame, Lat. curvus & coluber snake] distorted, bent, crooked, lame Pv.II,9²⁶ (v. l. kuṇḍa; cp. PvA.123. kuṇita paṭikuṇita an-ujubhūta); DhA.III,71 (kāṇa° blind and lame). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇalin: {'def': 'in kuṇalīkata and kuṇalīmukha contracted, contorted Pv.II,9 ^26.28. (Hardy, but Minayeff and Hardy’s S.S. Kuṇḍalī°), expl^d PvA.123 by mukhavikārena vikuṇitaṁ (or vikucitaṁ SS.) sakuṇitaṁ (better: saṅkucitaṁ) (cp. Sk. kuc or kuñc to shrink). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇapa: {'def': '[der. fr. kuṇa? cp. Sk. kuṇapa] a corpse, carcase, Vin.III,68=M.I,73=A.IV,377 (ahi°, kukkura°, manussa° pūti°); A.IV,198 sq.; Sn.205; J.I,61, 146; PvA.15. Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck M.I,120; J.I,5; also Vin.III,68≈. -- The abovementioned list of corpses (ahi°, etc.) is amplified at Vism.343 as follows: hatthi°, assa°, go°, mahiṁsa°, manussa°, ahi°, kukkura°. Cp. kaḷebara.

--gandha smell of a rotting corpse SnA 286; PvA.32. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】尸体，一件讨厌的事物。 ~gandha,【阳】腐尸的味道。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】屍体，一件可厌的东西(a corpse, carcase)。kuṇapagandha,【阳】腐屍的味道。Vin.III,68=M.I,73=A.IV,377 (ahikuṇapa, kukkurakuṇapa, manussakuṇapa, pūtikuṇapa); A.IV,198 sq.; Sn.205; J.I.61, 146; PvA.15. Kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one’s neck M.I,120; J.I.5; also Vin.III,68≈. -- The abovementioned list of corpses (ahikuṇapa, etc.) is amplified at Vism.343 as follows: hatthikuṇapa, assakuṇapa, gokuṇapa, mahiṁsakuṇapa, manussakuṇapa, ahikuṇapa, kukkurakuṇapa. Cp. kaḷebara.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuṇi: {'def': '(adj.) deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm, Acc. to Pug.A.IV,19 either of one or both arms (hands) J.I,353 (expl. kuṇṭhahattha)= DhA.I,376; Pug.51 (kāṇa, kuṇi, khañja); see khañja. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇita: {'def': '(or kuṇika)=kuṇa PvA.123, 125 (or should it be kucita?). Cp. paṭi°. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇjara: {'def': '【阳】象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuṇāla: {'def': '【阳】印度的杜鹃鸟(布谷鸟cuckoo)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】印度的杜鹃鸟。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'N. of a bird (the Indian cuckoo) J.V,214 sq. (kuṇāla-jātaka). Kuṇāla-daha “cuckoo-lake,” N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant Vism.416. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇālaka: {'def': '[fr. kuṇāla] the cuckoo J.V,406 (=kokila). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇī: {'def': '【阳】跛子(deformed, paralysed (orig. bent, crooked, cp. kuṇa) only of the arm)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】跛子。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuṇḍa: {'def': '【形】卷曲的(bent, crooked)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(a) bent, crooked DA.I,296 (°daṇḍaka); PvA.181. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇḍaka: {'def': '【中】粉，谷粒壳内的粉。 ~pūva,【阳、中】粉糕，以这种粉所制成的糕。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】粉，谷粒壳内的粉。kuṇḍakapūva,【阳】【中】粉糕，以这种粉所制成的糕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'the red powder of rice husks (cp. kukkusa) Vin.II,151; 280; J.II,289 (text has kuṇḍadaka)=DhA.III,325 (ibid. as ācāma°). Also used as toilet powder: DhA.II,261 (kuṇḍakena sarīraṁ makkhetvā). --sakuṇḍaka (-bhatta) (a meal) with husk powder-cake J.V,383.

--aṅgārapūva pancake of rice powder DhA.III,324; --kucchi in °sindhavapotaka “the rice- (cake-) belly colt” J.II,288; --khādaka (a) eating rice-powder J.II,288; (cp. DhA.III,325); --dhūma, lit. smoke of red rice powder, Ep. of the blood J.III,542; --pūva cake of husk-powder J.I,422 sq.; --muṭṭhi a handful of rice-powder VvA.5; DhA.I,425; --yāgu husk-powder gruel J.II,288. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇḍala: {'def': '[cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i. e. winding] a ring esp. earring A.I,254=III,16; J.IV,358 (su° with beautiful earrings); DhA.I,25. Frequent as maṇi°, a jewelled earring Vin.II,156; S.I,77; M.I,366; Pv.II,9⁵⁰; sīha° or sīhamukha° an earring with a jewel called “lion’s mouth” J.V,205 (=kuñcita), 438. In sāgara° it means the ocean belt Miln.220=J.III,32 (where expl. as sāgaramajjhe dīpavasena ṭhitattā tassa kuṇḍalabhūtaṁ). Cp. also rajju° a rope as belt VvA.212. --kuṇḍalavatta turning, twisting round D.II,18 (of the hair of a Mahāpurisa). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. kuṇḍa, orig. bending, i. e. winding),【中】耳环，卷曲物(a ring esp. earring)。kuṇḍalakesa,【形】卷发。kuṇḍalāvatta,【形】卷曲的(如发条)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】耳环，卷曲物。 ~kesa,【形】卷发。 ~āvatta,【形】卷曲的（如发条）。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuṇḍalin: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [fr. kuṇḍala] wearing earrings S.IV,343; J.V,136; VI,478. su° Vv 73¹. Cp. Maṭṭha° Np. DhA.I,25; Pv.II,5. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² in kuṇḍalī-kata contorted Pv.II,9²⁷. See kuṇalin and cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 14. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇḍalī: {'def': '【形】有耳环的，有卷曲物的。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Kuṇḍalin)(‹kuṇḍala),【形】有耳环的，有卷曲物的(wearing earrings )。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuṇḍi: {'def': '(f.) [=kuṇḍikā] a pail or pot, in phrase kuṇḍipaddhana giving a pailful of milk J.VI,504 (Kern, Toev. s. v. compares phrase Sk. kāṁsy’ôpadohana & proposes reading kuṇḍ’opadohana. See also kaṁsupadhāraṇa). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇḍika: {'def': '[cp. kuṇḍa] bending, in ahi-kuṇḍika (?) a snake charmer (lit. bender) J.IV,308 (v. l. S. guṇṭhika) see ahi; and catu-kuṇḍika bent as regards his four limbs, i. e. walking on all fours M.I,79; Pv III,2⁴ (expl. at PvA.181). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṇḍikā: {'def': 'kuṇḍī,【阴】（带柄和倾口的）大水罐，水壶。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) a water-pot J.I,8, 9, II.73 (=kamaṇḍalu), 317; V,390; DhA.I,92 (cp. kuṭa). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'kuṇḍī,【阴】(带柄和倾口的)大水罐，水壶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuṇṭha: {'def': '【形】钝的。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. kuṇa and kuṇḍa] 1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) DhA.I,311 (°kuddāla); Pug.A.I,34 (of asi, opp. tikkhina); °tiṇa a kind of grass Vism.353. -- 2. a cripple J.II,117. (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kuṇa and kuṇḍa),【形】钝的。1. bent, lame; blunt (of a sword) (kuṇṭhakuddāla); (of asi, opp. tikkhina); kuṇṭhatiṇa a kind of grass Vism 353。2. a cripple.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuṇṭheti: {'def': '(kuṇṭh +e), 使钝化，使弯曲，使跛足。kuṇṭhesi,【过】。kuṇṭhita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kuṇṭh + e), 使钝化，使弯曲，使跛足。kuṇṭhesi, 【过】。kuṇṭhita,【过分】。(p105)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuṇṭhita: {'def': '[a variant of guṇṭhita, as also found in cpd. palikuṇṭhita] Pv.II,3⁸ and kuṇḍita S.I,197, both in phrase paṁsu°, according to Hardy, PvA.p. 302 to be corrected to guṇṭhita covered with dust (see guṇṭheti). The v. l. at both places is °kuṭṭhita. Also found as paṁsukuṇṭhita at J.VI,559 (=°makkhita C; v. l. B B. kuṇḍita). (Page 220)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭa: {'def': '【阳、中】水壶。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'a pitcher Vv 50⁹; J.I,120; DhA.II,19, 261; III,18. Kuṭa is to be read at J.I,145 for kūṭa (antokuṭe padīpo viya; cp. ghaṭa). Note. Kuṭa at DhsA.263 stands for kūṭa³ sledge-hammer. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】水壶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kuṭaja: {'def': '【阳】一种药草—特利切里树皮（(tellicherry bark) 东印度群岛的几种夹竹桃科乔木〔如：抗痢木 Wrightia zeylandica 和止泻木 Holarrhenaantidysenterica〕的苦树皮，特用于民间医学作为治痢剂）。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】一种药草—特利切里树皮(tellicherry bark，东印度群岛的几种夹竹桃科乔木〔如：抗痢木 Wrightia zeylandica 和止泻木 Holarrhena antidysenterica〕的苦树皮，特用於民间医学作为治痢剂)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a kind of root (Wrightia antidysenterica or Nericum antidysentericum), used as a medicine Vin.I,201 (cp. Vin. Texts II.45). (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭaka: {'def': 'a cheat Pgdp 12; read kūtaka. So also in gāma kuṭaka S.II,258. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭati: {'def': 'see paṭi° and cp. kūṭa¹, koṭṭeti & in diff. sense kuṭṭa¹. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭava: {'def': '(v. l. S. kū°; B. kulāvaka) a nest J.III,74; v. l. at DhA.II,23 (for kuṭikā). (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭhārī: {'def': '【阴】斧头。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe),【阴】斧头(an axe, a hatchet)。S.6.9./I,149.(=S.6.10./I,152., Sn.657, A.V,174.)︰“Purisassa hi jātassa, kuṭhārī jāyate mukhe; Yāya chindati attānaṁ, bālo dubbhāsitaṁ bhaṇaṁ.(当人出生时，斧在口中生，愚人说恶语，以斧斩自己。)(「斧」指舌头。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. kuṭhāra, axe=Lat. culter, knife from *(s)qer, to cut, in Lat. caro, etc]. An axe, a hatchet Vin.III,144; S.IV,160, 167; M.I,233=S.III,141; A. I.141; II,201; IV,171; J.I,431; DhA.III,59; PvA.277. Purisassa hi jātassa kuṭhārī jāyate mukhe “when man is born, together with him is born an axe in his mouth (to cut evil speech)” S.I,149=Sn.657=A.V,174. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭi: {'def': 'kuṭikā,【阴】小屋。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuṭikā: {'def': '(f.) from kuṭī [B. Sk. kuṭikā Av.Ś. II.156] a little hut, usually made of sticks, grass and clay, poetical of an abode of a bhikkhu Vin.III,35, 41, 42=VvA.10; PvA.42, 81; DhA.II,23. Cp. also tiṇa°, dāru°; arañña° a hut in the woods S.I,61; III,116; IV,380. Often fig. for body (see kāya). Th.1, 1. -- As adj. --°, e. g. aṭṭhakuṭiko gāmo a village of 8 huts Dh.I,313. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭila: {'def': '【形】弯曲，弯曲的(bent, crooked)。kuṭilatā,【阴】弯曲性，不正当。akuṭilatā,【阴】不弯曲性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) bent, crooked (cp. kuj and kuc, Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 15) J.III,112 (=jimha); Miln.297 (°saṅkuṭila), 418 (of an arrow); nt. a bend, a crook Miln.351. --a° straight Vv 16⁷ (-magga).

--bhāva crookedness of character Vism.466; PvA.51; VvA.84. --a° uprightness Bdhd 20. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】弯曲，弯曲的。 ~tā,【阴】不正当，不诚实。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuṭilatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. kuṭila] crookedness, falseness, in a°, uprightness of character Dhs.50, 51; DhA.I,173. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭimbika: {'def': '(also kuṭumbika) a man of property, a landlord, the head of a family, J.I,68, 126, 169, 225; II,423; PvA.31, 38, 73, 82. Kutumbiya-putta Np. Vism.48. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭukuñcaka: {'def': 'see kaṭukañcuka. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭumba: {'def': '(nt.) family property & estates J.I,122, 225; rāja° (and °kuṭumbaka) the king’s property J.I,369, 439. --kuṭumbaṁ saṇṭhapeti to set up an establishment J.I,225; II,423; III,376. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】家庭(family property & estates)。rājakuṭumba﹐国王的财产。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】家庭。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuṭumbika: {'def': 'kuṭimbika,【阳】一家之主，户主，家长。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'kuṭimbika,【阳】地主，一家之主，家长(a man of property, a landlord, the head of a family,)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see kuṭimbika. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭī: {'def': 'kuṭi, kuṭikā,【阴】小屋、寮房、僧寮、茅篷、孤邸(any single-roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed)。台语：chu3厝，也可作‘次’(康熙字典︰「凡舍皆曰‘次’」)。kuṭīkāra﹐造小屋者。kuṭīpurisa﹐农夫( a “hut man,” a peasant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kuṭi°) (f.) any single-roomed abode, a hut, cabin, cot, shed Vin.III,144 (on vehāsa-kuṭī see vehāsa & Vin.IV,46); Sn.18, 19; Pv.II,2⁸; VvA.188, 256 (cīvara°, a cloak as tent). See also kappiya°, gandha°, paṇṇa°, vacca°.

--kāra the making of a hut, in °sikkhāpada, a rule regarding the method of building a hut J.II,282; III,78. 351; --dūsaka (a) destroying a hut or nest DhA.II,23; --purisa a “hut man,” a peasant Miln.147. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭṭa: {'def': '¹ [cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ to crush, which is expl^d by Dhtp (90, 555) & Dhtm (115, 781) together with koṭṭ by chedana; it is there taken together with kuṭ of kūṭa¹, which is expl^d as koṭilla] powder. Sāsapa° mustard powder Vin.I,205; II,151 (at the latter passage to be read for °kuḍḍa, cp. Vin Texts III,171), 205. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa-rājā, koṭa° & koḍḍa°), (only found in cpds. kuṭṭadārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism.354, and in kuṭṭa-rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍakuṭṭa a wattle and daub prince S.III,156 =V.44 (v. l. kujjakuṭṭa). tirokuṭṭāti kuṭṭānaṁ parabhāgā vuccanti.(墙外︰墙的另一面)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(cp. koṭṭeti, kuṭ to crush), 粉末(powder)。sāsapakuṭṭa, 芥末粉(mustard powder Vin.I,205)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [of doubtful origin & form, cp. var. BSk. forms koṭṭa-rājā, koṭa° & koḍḍa°, e. g. MVastu I.231] only found in cpds. °dārūni sticks in a wattle & daub wall Vism.354, and in kuṭṭa-rājā subordinate prince, possibly kuḍḍa° a wattle and daub prince S.III,156 (v. l. kuḍḍa°); =V.44 (v. l. kujja°); cp. kuḍḍa° J.V,102 sq., where expl. pāpa-rājā, with vv. ll. kuṭa and kūṭa. See also khujja and khuddaka-rājā. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭṭha: {'def': '2, 闭鞘姜属植物(一种芬香的植物 (Costus speciosus, J.VI.537.) 一年生草本植物，本植物原产於克什米尔，所产的芳香油用於制造香料、香囊和用於保存毛皮)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (cp. kus; Sk. kusṭhā f.),【中】1.麻疯病(leprosy)，台语︰thai2 ko pinn7 (太膏病)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² a kind of fragrant plant (Costus speciosus) or spice J.VI,537. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) (cp. kus; Sk. kuṣṭhā f.) leprosy J.V,69, 72, 89; VI,196, 383; Vism.35 (+gaṇḍa); DA.I,260, 261, 272. The disease described at DhA 161 sq. is probably leprosy. Cp. kilāsa. On var. kinds of leprosy see J.V,69, IV.196. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. 麻疯病。2. 闭鞘姜属植物（一种芬香的植物 (Costus speciosus)一年生草本植物，本植物原产于克什米尔，所产的芳香油用于制造香料、香囊和用于保存毛皮）。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kuṭṭhilikā: {'def': 'the pericarp or envelope of a seed (phala°) VvA.344 (=sipāṭikā). (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭṭhin: {'def': 'a leper M.I,506 (in simile); Th.1, 1054; J.V,413; VI,196; Ud.49; DhA.III,255. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭṭhita: {'def': 'hot, sweltering (of uṇha) S.IV,289 (v. l. kikita); molten (of tamba, cp. uttatta) Pgdp 33. See also kathati kuthati, ukkaṭṭhita & pakkuṭṭhita. (Page 219)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kuṭṭhī: {'def': '(Kuṭṭhin),【阳】麻疯病患者(a leper, M.I,506 (in simile))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】麻疯病患者。(p104)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kva: {'def': '【无】哪里? ~ci, 【无】某处。(p110)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】哪里? kvaci,【无】某处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kvaṇ: {'def': '(indecl.) is together with kuṇ registered as a part. of sound (“sadde”) at Dhtp 118 & Dhtm 173. (Page 230)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kā: {'def': '(indecl.) interj. imitating the crow’s cry: kā kā J.IV,72. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāca: {'def': '【阳】玻璃，水晶。眼睛的白内障。kācatumba,【阳】玻璃瓶。kācamaṇi,【阳】水晶。kācamaya,【形】玻璃制的。nīlakācamaṇi,【阳】蓝宝石。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. kāca & kāja] a pingo, a yoke, a carryingpole, usually made of bamboo, at both ends of which baskets are hung (double pingo). Besides this there is a single pingo (ekato-kājo) with only one basket and “middle” p. (antarā°) with two bearers and the basket suspended in the middle Vin.II,137; J.I,154; V,13, 293, 295 sq., 320, 345; PvA.168.

--daṇḍaka the pole of a pingo DA.I,41. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Der. unknown. The word first occurs in the Śat Br. & may well be non-Aryan] a glass-like substance made of siliceous clay; crystal Vin.I,190; II,112 (cp. Divy 503, kācamaṇi rock-crystal). -- a° not of glass or quartz, i. e. pure, clear, flawless, appl. to precious stones D.II,244=J.II,418 (=akakkasa) Sn.476. In the same sense also MVastu I.164.

--ambha (nt.) red crystal J.VI,268 (=rattamaṇi); --maya made of crystal, crystalline Vin.I,190; II,112. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】玻璃，水晶。眼睛的白内障。 ~tumba,【阳】玻璃瓶。 ~maṇi,【阳】水晶。 ~maya,【形】玻璃制的。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kācanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. kāca²] balancing like carrying on a kāca, fig. deliberation, pondering Vbh.352=Vism.27. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kācin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kāca¹], only neg. a° free from quartz, free from grit, flawless Vv 60¹ (=niddosa VvA.253). (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kādamba: {'def': '[cp. Sk. kādamba] a kind of goose with grey wings J.V,420; VvA.163. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】一种灰翅膀的鹅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一种灰翅膀的鹅。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kādambaka: {'def': 'made of Kadamba wood; also °ya for °ka; both at J.V,320. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāja: {'def': '【阳】扁担。kājahāraka,【阳】挑担者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=kāca², i. e. carrying-pole M.III,148; J.I,9; III,325; V,200; Dpvs XII.3; Mhvs 5, 24; DhA.IV,232.

--koṭi the end of a carrying-pole J.I,9; V,200. --hāraka a pingo-bearer DhA.IV,128. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】扁担。 ~hāraka,【阳】挑担者。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāka: {'def': '【阳】乌鸦。 ~pāda, 乌鸦的脚，十字标志。 ~peyya,【形】满至河岸（乌鸦能轻易地饮到河水）。 ~vaṇṇa,【形】乌鸦的颜色即：黑色，锡兰的一位国王名字。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】乌鸦(“乌鸦反哺”是指‘寒鸦’(jackdaw)，不过牠也有偷窃的坏行为)。kākapāda, 乌鸦的脚，十字标志。kākapeyya,【形】满至河岸(乌鸦能轻易地饮到河水)。kākavaṇṇa,【形】乌鸦的顔色(即：黑色)，锡兰的一位国王名字。kākasadiso, 形同乌鸦(按︰乌鸦有偷盗行为)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[onomat., cp. Sk. kāka; for other onomat. relatives see note on gala] the crow; freq. in similes: S.I,124= Sn.448; J.I,164. Its thievish ways are described at DhA.III,352; said to have ten bad qualities A.V,149; J.I,342; III,126; kākā vā kulalā vā Vin.IV,40. -- As bird (of the dead) frequenting places of interment and cremation, often with other carcass-eating animals (sigāla, gijjha) Sn.201; PvA.198 (=dhaṅka); cp. kākoḷa. -- In cpds. often used derisively. -- f. kākī J.II,39, 150; III,431.

--āmasaka “touching as much as a crow,” attr. of a person not enjoying his meals DhA.IV,16; DhsA.404; --uṭṭepaka a crow-scarer, a boy under fifteen, employed as such in the monastery grounds Vin.I,79 cp. 371. --opamā the simile of the crow DhA.II,75. --orava “crow-cawing,” appl^d to angry and confused words Vin.I,239, cp. IV.82; --ôlūka crows and owls J.II,351; DhA.I,50; Mhbv 15; --guyha (tall) enough to hide a crow (of young corn, yava) J.II,174; cp. J. trsl. II.122; --nīḷa a crow’s nest J.II,365; --paññā “crow-wisdom,” i. e. foolishness which leads to ruin through greed J.V,255, 258; cp. VI,358; --paṭṭanaka a deserted village, inhabited only by crows J.VI,456; --pāda crow’s foot or footmark Vism.179 (as pattern); --peyya “(so full) that a crow can easily drink of it,” full to the brim, overflowing, of a pond: samatittika k° “with even banks and drinkable for crows” (i. e. with the water on a level with the land) D.I,244; S.II,134 (do.); D.II,89; M.I,435; A.III,27; J.II,174; Ud.90; cp. note to J. trsl. II.122; PvA.202. See also peyya. --bhatta “a crow’s meal,” i. e. remnants left from a meal thrown out for the crows J.II,149; --vaṇṇa “crow-coloured” N. of a king Mhvs 22¹¹; --vassa the cry of a crow Vin.II,17; --sīsa the head of a crow J.II,351; as adj.: having a crow’s head, appl^d to a fabulous flying horse D.II,174; cp. J.II,129; --sūra a “crow-hero,” appl. to a shameless, unconscientious fellow Dh.244; DhA.III,352; --ssaraka (having a voice) sounding like a crow Vin.I,115. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kākacchati: {'def': '(kas + cha, ka 重叠，而 s 被改成 c，首个 ka 的元音被长化), 打鼾。kākacchi, 【过】。kākacchamāna, 【现分】。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[derived by Fausböll fr. kās, to cough; by Trenckner fr. krath; by Childers & E. Müller fr. kath; should it not rather be a den. fr. kakaca a saw?] to snore Vin.IV,355; A.III,299; J.I,61, 160 (=ghurughurûpassāsa; cp. DA.I,42 ghurû--ghurûpassāsī); I,318; VI,57; Miln.85; Vism.311. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kas+cha, ka 重叠，而 s 被改成 c，首个 ka 的母音被长化 ), 打鼾。kākacchi,【过】。kākacchamāna,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kākassara: {'def': '【形】声如鸦音。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】声如鸦音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kākasūra: {'def': '【形】似乌鸦一般的聪明，不知羞耻的人。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】似乌鸦一般的聪明，不知羞耻的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kākaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [kā (for kad°) + kaṇa=less than a particle] a coin of very small value Sdhp.514. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kākaṇikā: {'def': '【阴】非常低值的硬币，¼便士。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】非常低值的硬币(如：farthing英国古便士)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.)=prec. J.I,120, 419; VI,346; DA.I,212; DhA.I,391; VvA.77=DhA.III,108. From the latter passages its monetary value in the opinion of the Commentator may be guessed at as being 1/8 of a kahāpaṇa; it occurs here in a descending line where each succeeding coin marks half the value of the preceding one, viz., kahāpaṇa, aḍḍha, pāda, māsaka, kākaṇikā, upon which follows mudhā “for nothing.”

--agghanaka “not even a farthing’s worth,” worth next to nothing J.VI,346. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kākola: {'def': 'and Kākoḷa [Onomat. The Lit. Sk. has the same form] a raven, esp. in his quality as bird of prey, feeding on carrion (cp. kāka) J.III,246 (=vanakāka); V,268, 270 (gijjha k° ā ca ayomukhā . . . khādanti naraṁ kibbisakārinaṁ); VI,566.

--gaṇā (pl.) flocks of ravens Sn.675; VV52¹⁵ (=VvA.227). (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】渡鸦(raven，一种大的亮黑色的鸟(Corvus corax)，体型比普通乌鸦大，是杂食性，它的行为显著聪明和有害，喉部有窄和变尖的羽毛。分布於北半球北部，但现在於美国东部大部分已灭绝)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】渡鸦（一种大的亮黑色的鸟 (Corvus corax)，广泛分布于北半球北部，但现在于美国东部大部分已灭绝，它分化为许多地理系，是杂食性，略为肉食，它的行为显著聪明和有害，与其关系密切的普通乌鸦不同在于身体较大，喉部有窄和变尖的羽毛）。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kākoḷa: {'def': 'm. 大烏, 黒烏', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kākī: {'def': '【阴】雌乌鸦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】雌乌鸦。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāla: {'def': '2,【阳】时间。kālass’eva, 早的。kālena, 在适当的时间，在正确的片刻。kālena kālaṁ, 在适当的时候(Kālena kālanti samaye samaye)。kālaṁ karoti, 作时(死)。kālakata,【过分】作古。kālakiriyā,【阴】死期到(直译：时间用完)。kālakaṇṇī,【阳】不幸的人，可怜的人。kālapavedana,【中】时间的公告。kālavādī,【形】在适当的时间说。pacchime kāle﹐最后时刻(临终)。各种时间：cittakkhaṇa﹐【阳】心识刹那(心识生uppāda、住ṭhiti、灭bhaṅga的时间)，accharākkhaṇa﹐accharāsaṇghāta,【阳】一弹指的时间(有数十亿个心识刹那(SA.12.61./II,99.︰Ekasmiñhi accharākkhaṇe anekāni cittakoṭisatasahassāni uppajjanti.)。ekaminitakāla﹐一分钟(现代巴利文)。ekaghaṭikādikāla﹐一小时(现代巴利文)。pubbaṅhasamaya，上午(6至10点)，majjhantikasamaya，中午(上午10点至下午2点)，sāyaṅhasamaya「黄昏」(下午2至 6点，汉译往往作「晡时」(下午3至5点，申时))。diva﹐一日。rattindiva﹐一日一夜(24 hrs.)。gandhohana﹐gandhohanamatta (gandha-ūhanamattaṁ)﹐一阵香通过的时间，或构牛乳顷(gandhohanamatta挤牛奶的时间，5~10分钟)。yadantaraṁ ekapiṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjāmi﹐吃一钵食之间(20~30分钟)。婆罗门须4a.m.(梵天须臾Brahma muhurta)起床，实施拜火(aupasana；worship of fire)、火祭(agnihotra；healing-fire藉著火来净化大气)、Brahmayajna等。他们作上供(pūja)和午供(madhyahnika；the midday vandana)在sangava time (forenoon, 8:24a.m.to 10:48a.m.)。《翻译名义集》〈时分篇第二十四〉：「西域记云：时极短者，谓刹那(ksana, ksaṇa)也。百二十刹那，为一呾刹那(tat-ksaṇa)。六十呾刹那，为一腊缚(lava)。三十腊缚，为一牟呼栗多(muhurta须臾)。五十牟呼栗多，为一时。六时合成一日一夜。」(T54.1092.2)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1,【阳】暗(dark)，黑(black)。kāḷasāma,【阳】黑褐色(dark blue [?])。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '① a. = kāḷa [Sk. kāla.] 黒き, 黒分, 黒月, 新月. -kaṇṇin 黒耳の, 不吉の, 不運の. -jallika (kāḷi) 黒点, 汚点. -pakkha 黒分. -valli 黒葛. -vāta 黒風, 台風.②m.[〃] 時，応時，正時. gen.Kālassa適時に，早朝に. loc.Kāle常に，常時に. Kālaṁ karoti死ぬ，命終する.K-ālaṁ kaṅkhati死時を待つ.Kālaṁ maññati時を考える，適時を知る.Kālena Kālaṁ時々に，引続き. Kālena bhāsitā応時の所说.-antaratā時無間性.-anusārin,-anusārika随時香［香料］の木［Kāḷa-とも書く］.-kata命終した，死んだ.-kiriyā臨終，命終.-cīvara時衣.-ñññ適時を知る，知時者.-dāna応時施.-paṭipakkhatā時相对性.-pariyantasīla時限戒.-maraṇa時死.-vādin時語者，時論者.-velā時限界', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【阳】时间。kālass’eva, 早的。kālena, 在适当的时间，在正确的片刻。kālena kālaŋ, 偶尔。kālaŋ karoti, 死。~kata, 【过分】已死。~kiriyā,【阴】死亡。~kaṇṇī,【阳】不幸的人，可怜的人。~pavedana,【中】时间的公告。~vādī,【形】在适当的时间说。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(and Kāḷa) -- Preliminary. 1. dark (syn. kaṇha, which cp. for meaning and applications), black, blueblack, misty, cloudy. Its proper sphere of application is the dark as opposed to light, and it is therefore characteristic of all phenomena or beings belonging to the realm of darkness, as the night, the new moon, death, ghosts, etc. -- There are two etymologies suggestible, both of which may have been blended since IndoAryan times: (a) kāla=Sk. kāla, blue-black, kālī black cloud from *qāl (with which conn. *qel in kalaṅka, spot, kalusa dirty, kammāsa speckled, Gr. kelainόs, Mhg. hilwe mist)=Lat. cālidus spot, Gr. khliζ spot, and khlaζ dark cloud; cp. Lat. cālīgo mist, fog, darkness. -- (b) see below, under note. -- Hence. 2. the morning mist, or darkness preceding light, daybreak, morning (cp. E. morning=Goth. maúrgins twilight, Sk. marka eclipse, darkness; and also gloaming= gleaming=twilight), then: time in general, esp. a fixed time, a point from or to which to reckon, i. e. term or terminus (a quo or ad quem). -- Note. The definition of colour-expressions is extremely difficult. To a primitive colour-sense the principal difference worthy of notation is that between dark and light, or dull and bright, which in their expressions, however, are represented as complements for which the same word may be used in either sense of the complementary part (dark for light and vice versa, cp. E. gleam › gloom). All we can say is that kāla belongs to the group of expressions for dark which may be represented simultaneously by black, blue, or brown. That on the other hand, black, when polished or smooth, supplies also the notion of “shining” is evidenced by kāḷa and kaṇha as well, as e. g. by *skei in Sk. chāyā=Gr. skiά shadow as against Ags. h&amacremacr;ven “blue” (E. heaven) and Ohg. skīnan, E. to shine and sky. The psychological value of a colour depends on its light-reflecting (or lightabsorbing) quality. A bright black appears lighter (reflects more light) than a dull grey, therefore a polished (añjana) black (=sukāḷa) may readily be called “brilliant.” In the same way kāla, combined with other colour-words of black connotation does not need to mean “black,” but may mean simply a kind of black, i. e. brown. This depends on the semasiological contrast or equation of the passage in question. Cp. Sk. śyāma (dark-grey) and śyāva (brown) under kāsāya. That the notion of the speckled or variegated colour belongs to the sphere of black, is psychologically simple (: dark specks against a light ground, cp. kammāsa), and is also shown by the second etymology of kāla=Sk. śāra, mottled, speckled=Lat. cærulus, black-blue and perhaps cælum “the blue” (cp. heaven)=Gr. khruλos the blue ice-bird. (On k › s cp. kaṇṇa › śṛṇga, kilamati › śramati, kilissati › ślis°, etc.) The usual spelling of kāla as kāḷa indicates a connection of the ḷ with the r of śāra. -- The definition of kāḷa as jhām’aṅgārasadisa is conventional and is used both by Bdhgh. and Dhpāla: DhsA.317 and PvA.90.

1. Kāḷa, dark, black, etc., in enumⁿ of colours Vv 22¹ (see VvA.111). na kāḷo samaṇo Gotamo, na pi sāmo: maṅgura-cchavi samano G. “The ascetic Gotamo is neither black nor brown: he is of a golden skin” M.I,246; similarly as kāḷī vā sāmā vā maṅguracchavī vā of a kalyāṇī, a beautiful woman at D.I,193= M. II.40; kāḷa-sāma at Vin.IV,120 is to be taken as dark-grey. -- Of the dark half of the month: see °pakkha, or as the new moon: āgame kāḷe “on the next new moon day” Vin.I,176. -- of Petas: Pv.II,4¹ (kāḷī f.); PvA.56¹ (°rūpa); of the dog of Yama (°sunakha) PvA.151. -- In other connⁿ: kāḷavaṇṇa-bhūmi darkbrown (i. e. fertile) soil Vin.I,48=II.209.

--añjana black collyrium VinI .203; --ânusārī black, (polished?) Anusāri (“a kind of dark, fragrant sandal wood” Vin. Texts II.51) Vin.I,203; S.III,156=V.44= A.V,22; --ayasa black (dark) iron (to distinguish it from bronze, Rh. D., Miln.trsl. II.364; cp. blacksmith › silversmith) Miln.414, 415; --kañjaka a kind of Asuras, Titans D.III,7; J.V,187; PvA.272; --kaṇṇī “black-cared,” as an unlucky quality. Cp. III,6¹¹; J.I,239; IV,189; V,134, 211; VI,347; DhA.I,307; II,26; the vision of the “black-eared” is a bad omen, which spoils the luck of a hunter, e. g. at DhA.III,31 (referring here to the sight of a bhikkhu); as “witch” PvA.272; DhA.III,38, 181; as k-k. sakuṇa, a bird of ill omen J.II,153; --kaṇṇika= prec.; --kabara spotted, freckled J.VI,540; --kesa (adj.) with glossy or shiny hair, by itself (kāḷa-kesa) rare, e. g. at J.VI,578; usually in cpd. susukāḷa-kesa “having an over-abundance of brilliant hair” said of Gotama. This was afterwards applied figuratively in the description of his parting from home, rising to a new life, as it were, possessed of the full strength and vigour of his manhood (as the rising Sun). Cp. the Shamash-Saga, which attributes to the Sun a wealth of shiny, glossy (=polished, dark) hair (=rays), and kāḷa in this connection is to be interpreted just as kaṇha (q. v.) in similar combinations (e. g. as Kṛṣṇa Hṛṣīkesa or Kesavā). On this feature of the Sun-god and various expressions of it see ample material in Palmer, The Samson Saga pp. 33--46. -- The double application of su° does not offer any difficulty, sukāḷa is felt as a simplex in the same way as eu)plokamόs or duh° in comb^ns like sudubbala PvA.149, sudullabha VvA.20. Bdhgh. already interprets the cpd. in this way (DA.I,284=suṭṭhu-k°, añjana-vaṇṇa k° va hutvā; cp. kaṇh-añjana J.V,155). Cp. also siniddha-nīla-mudu-kuñcita-keso J.I,89, and sukaṇhakaṇha J.V,202.- susukāḷakesa of others than the Buddha: M.II,66. Modern editors and lexicographers see in susu° the Sk. śiśu young of an animal, cub, overlooking the semantical difficulty involved by taking it as a separate word. This mistake has been applied to the compound at all the passages where it is found, and so we find the reading susu kāḷakeso at M.I,82=A.II,22 =J.II,57; M.I,163=A.I,68=S.I,9, 117; also in Childers’(relying on Burnouf), or even susū k° at S.IV,111; the only passages showing the right reading susu-k° are D.I,115, M.I,463. Konow under susu J.P.T.S. 1909, 212 has both. --kokila the black (brown) cuckoo VvA.57; --jallika (kāḷi° for kāḷa°) having black drops or specks (of dirt) A.I,253; --daṇḍa a black staff, Sdhp.287 (attr. to the messengers of Yama, cp. Yama as having a black stick at Śat. Br. xi. 6, 1, 7 and 13); --pakkha the dark side, i. e. moonless fortnight of the month A.II,18; --° cātuddasī the 14th day of the dark fortnight PvA.55; --° ratti a moonless night VvA.167; (opp. dosina r.) --meyya a sort of bird J.VI,539; --loṇa black (dark) salt Vin.I,202 (Bdhgh. pakati-loṇa, natural salt); --loha “black metal,” iron ore Miln.267; --valli a kind of creeper Vism.36, 183. --sīha a special kind of lion J.IV,208. --sutta a black thread or wire, a carpenter’s measuring line J.II,405; Miln.413; also N. of a Purgatory (nivaya) J.V,266. See Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76--78; --hatthin “black elephant,” an instrument of torture in Avīci Sdhp.195.

2. Kāla time, etc. (a) Morning: kāle early Pv.II,9⁴¹ (=pāto PvA.128), kālassa in the morning (Gen. of time), early VvA.256. Cp. paccūsa-kāle at dawn DhA.III,242. Opposed to evening or night in kāḷena in the morning Pv.I,6³ (opp. sāyaṁ). Kāle juṇhe by day and by night Nd² 631. -- (b) time in general: gacchante gacchante kāle in course of time DhA.I,319; evaṁ gacchante kāle as time went on PvA.54, 75, 127, etc. --kālaṁ for a time Vin.I,176 (spelt kāḷaṁ); kañci kālaṁ some time yet VvA.288; ettakaṁ kālaṁ for a long time PvA.102.-kālena kālaṁ (1) from time to time PvA.151; VvA.255, 276; -- (2) continuously, constantly A.IV,45; Pug.11 (+samayena samayaṁ); D.I,74 (: but expl^d at DA.I,218 by kāle kāle in the sense of “every fortnight or every ten days”). kāle in (all) time, always (cp. ai)ei/) Sn.73 (expl. in Nd² by niccakāle under sadā; but at SnA 128 by phāsu-kālena “in good time”); --kāle kāle from time to time, or repeatedly VvA.352. See also cira°, sabba°. -- (c) Time in special, either (1) appointed time, date, fixed time, or (2) suitable time, proper time, good time, opportunity. Cp. Gr. kairiζ and w(=ra; or (3) time of death, death. ‹-› (1) Mealtime: PvA.25; VvA.6; esp. in phrase kālo bho Gotamo, niṭṭhitaṁ bhattaṁ “it is time, Gotama, the meal is ready” D.I,119=226; Sn.p. 111; and in kālaṁ āroceti or ārocāpeti he announces the time (for dinner) D.I,109, 226; Sn.p. 111; PvA.22, 141; VvA.173. --date: kālato from the date or day of . . ., e. g. diṭṭha° paṭṭhāya “from the day that she first saw her” VvA.206; gihī° paṭṭhāya “from the day of being a layman” PvA.13. (2) proper time, right time: also season, as in utu° favourable time (of the year) Vin.I,299; II,173; kālaṁ jānāti “he knows the proper time” A.IV,114; as cattāro kālā, four opportunities A.II,140; yassa kālaṁ maññasi for what you think it is time (to go), i. e. goodbye D.I,106, 189, etc. The 3 times of the cycle of existence are given at Vism.578 as past, present, and future. --kāla° (adj.) in (due) time, timely Vism.229 (°maraṇa timely death). -- Opp. akāla (it is the) wrong time or inopportune D.I,205; akāla-cārin going (begging) at the improper time Sn.386. akālamegha a cloud arising unexpectedly (at the wrong time) Miln.144. --kāle at the proper time, with vikāle (opp.) Vin.I,199, 200; J.II,133; Sn.386. akāle in the wrong season VvA.288. kālena in proper time, at the right moment A.II,140; Sn.326, 387 (=yutta kālena SnA 374); Pv.I,5³ (=ṭhitakālena PvA.26); Pug.50; It.42; KhA 144 (=khaṇena samayena). Cp. vikāla. (3) The day, as appointed by fate or kamma, point of time (for death, cp. Vism.236), the “last hour,” cp. h)mar, illa dies. So in the meaning of death appl^d not only to this earthly existence, but to all others (peta°, deva°, etc.) as well, in phrase kālaṁ karoti “he does his time=he has fulfilled his time” Vin.III,80; Sn.343, DhA.I,70; and frequently elsewhere; cp. --kata, --kiriyā. -- As death in kālaṁ kaṅkhati to await the appointed time S.I,187; Sn.516 (cp. kaṅkhati) and in derⁿ kālika. -- Other examples for this use of kāla see under bhatta°, yañña°, vappa°.

--antara interval, period: kālantarena in a little while PvA.13; na kālantare at once PvA.19; --kata (adj.) dead Sn.586, 590; in combⁿ petā kālakatā “the Petas who have fulfilled their (earthly) time Sn.807; Pv.I,5⁷; I,12¹. Also as kālaṅkata Pv.II,7⁹; Vv 80⁹; Vism.296. --kiriyā death (often comb^d with maraṇa) M.II,108; A.I,22, 77, 261 (as bhaddikā, cp. A.III,293); IV,320; Sn.694; Pv.I,10¹² (of a Petī who has come to the end of her existence); DhA.II,36; IV,77. --gata=°kata PvA.29, 40. --ññū knowing the proper time for . . . (c. Dat. or Loc.) Sn.325; described at A.IV,113 sq.; as one of the five qualities of a rājā cakkavattī (viz. atthaññū, dhamma°, matta°, k°, parisa°) A.III,148; one of the seven qual. of a sappurisa, a good man (=prec.+atta°, puggala°) D.III,252, 283; as quality of the Tathāgata D.III,134=Nd² 276; Pug.50. --ññutā n. abstr. to prec. A.II,101; --(p)pavedana announcement of death (-time) Th.1, 563=J.I,118=Vism.389=DhA.I,248. --bhojana in a° eating at the improper time S.V,470; --vādin speaking at the proper time, in formula kāla° bhūta° attha° dhamma° vinaya° under sīla No. 7: D.I,4; III,175; DA.I,76; A.II,22, 209; Pug.58; --vipassin considering the right moment, taking the opportunity It.41. --sataṁ (°sahassaṁ, etc.) a hundred (thousand, etc.) times Vism.243. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kālantara: {'def': '【中】间隔，时期。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】间隔，时期。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kālaññū: {'def': '【形】识时的人，知晓适当时间的人。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】知时的人，知晓适当时间的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kālika: {'def': '【形】当时的。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】当时的。【反】akālikaṁ, 即时的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kāla ²] belonging to time, in time, as sabba-kālika always in time, cp. Gr. w(raίos Vv 39²; with time, i. e. gradual, slowly, delayed S.I,117=Nd² 645; usually neg. akālika 1. not delayed, immediate, in this world, comb. with sandiṭṭhika S.II,58; S.I,117= IV.41=339=V.343;--2. subject to time, i. e. temporal, vanishing PvA.87;--3. unusual, out of season Miln.114 (cp. akāla). -- See also tāva-kālika. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāliṅga: {'def': '【阳】迦陵伽（在东印度一个国家的名字）。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】迦陵伽(在东印度一个国名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kālusiya: {'def': 'n.［kalusa-ya］汚濁', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【中】污垢，阴暗。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】污垢，阴暗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(and Kālussiya) (nt.) [der. fr. kalusa, stained, dirty see cognates under kammāsa and kāla] darkness, obscurity DA.I,95; PvA.124 (cakkhu°); fig. (dosa°) VvA.30. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kālā: {'def': 'f.樹，葉', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kālāma: {'def': '﹐【阳】迦摩罗人。A.3.65.佛陀在迦摩罗人住的Kesamuttaṁ村开示有名的羁舍子经(Kesamuttisuttaṁ)，在本经世尊说十项不可随便相信的守则。A.3.65./I,189.︰‘etha tumhe, Kālāmā! (1)Mā anussavena, (2)mā paramparāya, (3)mā itikirāya, (4)mā piṭakasampadānena, (5)mā takkahetu, (6)mā nayahetu, (7)mā ākāraparivitakkena, (8)mā diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā, (9)mā bhabbarūpatāya, (10)mā samaṇo no garūti. (1)不要因听闻(就相信)( mā 勿+anussavena﹐anu随著＋su(梵wru)听；report)。(2)不要因习俗传统(就相信)( mā 勿+paraṁparāya﹐para越?后＋ṁ＋para越?后＋ya；lineage of teaching)。(3)不要因流传的消息(就相信)( mā 勿+itikirāya﹐iti如此＋kirā传说＋ya；hearsay)。(4)不要因宗教经典(就相信)( mā 勿+piṭakasampadānena﹐piṭaka经典＋sampadāna转移；collection of scriptures)。(5)不要因合乎逻辑(就相信)( mā 勿+takkahetu﹐takka思索＋hetu因；logical reasoning)。(6)不要因合乎推理(就相信)( mā 勿+nayahetu?naya＋hetu因；inferential reasoning)。(7)不要因外表的观察(就相信) (mā 勿+ākāra-parivittakena﹐ākāra外表＋pari遍＋vitakka思索；reflection on reasons)。(8)不要因深思熟虑(就相信)( mā 勿+diṭṭhiijjhānakkhantiyā见审谛忍﹐diṭṭhi见解＋nijjhāna审察＋kkhanti接受；acceptance of a view after pondering it)──Mā diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyāti amhākaṁ nijjhāyitvā khamitvā gahitadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṁ sametītipi mā gaṇhittha.(不要采取：「(这是)我们在审思、忍可后而来所执取的见解。」)。(9)不要因有可能(就相信)( mā 勿+bhabba可能＋rūpatā行相＋ya；plausibility似真)──不要采信︰因为有可能的(AA︰bhabbarūpatāyāti ayaṁ bhikkhu bhabbarūpo, imassa kathaṁ gahetuṁ yuttantipi mā gaṇhittha.(不要采取：「这位比丘的相貌庄严(bhabbarūpo)，这种论説是适宜采信的。」--此说有误解，bhabba与bhadda(威严的)可能雷同而混淆。)。(10)不要因沙门是我们的导师(就相信)( mā samaṇo no garū；the ascetic is our teacher) ──Mā samaṇo no garūti ayaṁ samaṇo amhākaṁ garu, imassa kathaṁ gahetuṁ yuttantipi mā gaṇhittha. (不要采取：「这位沙门是我们的老师，这种论説是适宜采信的。」)。Soma Thera’s translation︰(1)don’t go by reports, (2)by legends, (3)by traditions, (4)by scripture, (5)by logical conjecture, (6)by inference, (7)by analogies, (8)by agreement through pondering views, (9)by probability, or (10)by the thought, ‘This contemplative is our teacher.’ Thanissaro Bhikkhu’s translation︰(1)Do not go upon what has been acquired by repeated hearing; (2)nor upon tradition; (3)nor upon rumor; (4)nor upon what is in a scripture; (5)nor upon surmise; (6)nor upon an axiom; (7)nor upon specious reasoning; (8)nor upon a bias towards a notion that has been pondered over; (9)nor upon another’s seeming ability; (10)nor upon the consideration, ‘The monk is our teacher.’若遵守这十项原则就可以排除世间一些非法、非律的成份。另外，佛陀也说「法」若引生贪、瞋、痴则是无利益与苦法；若能助益离贪、瞋、痴则是有利益与乐法。佛陀也开示了恶有恶报，善有善报之理，以帮助辨识正法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kālānusāri: {'def': '﹐黑栴香。ye keci mūlagandhā, kālānusāri tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati(一切根香中、黑栴香为其最上)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kālīya: {'def': 'a kind of (shiny) sandal wood; so to be read for tālīsa at Vin.I,203 (see note on p. 381). (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】一种（有光泽的）沉香木。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】一种(有光泽的)沉香木(gallochum)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāma: {'def': '【阳】快乐，贪欲，乐趣，官能享乐的对象。 ~giddha, 贪欲，贪婪于官能享受。 ~guṇa,【阳】情欲，官能上的享受。 ~gedha,【阳】执情，执着于官能享受。~cchanda,【阳】激情，官能享受的刺激。~taṇhā,【阴】恋情，对官能享受之渴望。 ~da, ~dada,【形】情施，给予的都是很想要的东西。~dhātu 【阴】情欲世界。~paṅka,【阳】贪欲的泥沼。~pariḷāha,【阳】灼热的情感。 ~bhava,【阳】欲界。 ~bhogī,【形】享受感觉的快乐。 ~mucchā,【阴】官能上的麻木。 ~rati,【阴】好色，情痴，多情的享乐。~rāga,【阳】激情。~loka,【阳】情欲世界。~vitakka,【阳】情思，情欲的思绪。~saṅkappa,【阳】情欲的抱负。~saññojana,【中】情欲的妨害。 ~sukha,【中】情欲的快乐。 ~sevanā,【阴】（沉溺于）行房。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [Dhtp (603) & Dhtm (843) paraphrase by “icchāyaṁ,” cp. Vedic kāma, kam=Idg. *qā] to desire, cp. Lat. carus, Goth. hōrs, E whore. -- 1. Objective: pleasantness, pleasure-giving, an object of sensual enjoyment; -- 2. subjective: (a) enjoyment, pleasure on occasion of sense, (b) sense-desire. Buddhist commentators express 1 and 2 by kāmiyatī ti kāmo, and kametī ti kāmo Cpd. 81, n. 2. Kāma as sense-desire and enjoyment plus objects of the same is a collective name for all but the very higher or refined conditions of life. The kāma-bhava or --loka (worlds of sensedesire) includes 4 of the 5 modes (gati’s) of existence and part of the fifth or deva-loka. See Bhava. The term is not found analyzed till the later books of the Canon are consulted, thus, Nd¹ 1 distinguishes (1) vatthukāmā: desires relating to a base, i. e. physical organ or external object, and (2) kilesakāmā: desire considered subjectively. So also Nd² 202, quoted DhA.II,162; III,240; and very often as ubho kāmā. A more logical definition is given by Dhammapāla on Vv 1¹ (VvA.11). He classifies as follows: 1. manāpiyā rūpādi-visayā. -- 2. chandarāga. -- 3. sabbasmiṁ lobha. -- 4. gāmadhamma. -- 5. hitacchanda. -- 6. serībhāva, i. e. k. concerned with (1) pleasant objects, (2) impulsive desire, (3) greed for anything, (4) sexual lust, (5) effort to do good, (6) self-determination.

In all enumerations of obstacles to perfection, or of general divisions and definitions of mental conditions, kāma occupies the leading position. It is the first of the five obstacles (nīvaraṇāni), the three esanās (longings), the four upādānas (attachments), the four oghas (floods of worldly turbulence), the four āsavas (intoxicants of mind), the three taṇhās, the four yogas; and k. stands first on the list of the six factors of existence: kāmā, vedanā, saññā, āsavā, kamma, dukkha, which are discussed at A.III,410 sq. as regards their origin, difference, consequences, destruction and remedy. ‹-› Kāma is most frequently connected with rāga (passion), with chanda (impulse) and gedha (greed), all expressing the active, clinging, and impulsive character of desire. ‹-› The foll. is the list of synonyms given at various places for kāma-cchanda: (1) chanda, impulse; (2) rāga, excitement; (3) nandī, enjoyment; (4) taṇhā, thirst; (5) sineha, love; (6) pipāsā, thirst; (7) pariḷāha, consuming passion; (8) gedha, greed; (9) mucchā, swoon, or confused state of mind; (10) ajjhosāna, hanging on, or attachment Nd¹. At Nd² 200; Dhs.1097 (omitting No. 8), cp. DhsA.370; similarly at Vism.569 (omitting Nos. 6 and 8), cp. Dhs.1214; Vbh.375. This set of 10 characteristics is followed by kām-ogha, kāma-yoga, kām-upādāna at Nd² 200, cp. Vism.141 (kām-ogha, °āsava, °upādāna). Similarly at D.III,238: kāme avigata-rāga, °chanda, °pema, °pipāsa, °pariḷāha, °taṇha. See also kāma-chanda below under cpds. In connection with synonyms it may be noticed that most of the verbs used in a kāma-context are verbs the primary meaning of which is “adhering to” or “grasping,” hence, attachment; viz. esanā (iṣ to Lat ira), upādāna (upa + ā + dā taking up), taṇhā (tṛṣ, Lat. torreo=thirst) pipāsā (the wish to drink), sineha (snih, Lat. nix=melting), etc. -- On the other hand, the reaction of the passions on the subject is expressed by khajjati “to be eaten up” pariḍayhati “to be burnt,” etc. The foll. passage also illustrates the various synonymic expressions: kāme paribhuñjati, kāmamajjhe vasati, kāma-pariḷāhena pariḍayhati, kāmavitakkehi khajjati, kāma-pariyesanāyā ussukko, A.I,68; cp. M.I,463; III,129. Under this aspect kāma is essentially an evil, but to the popular view it is one of the indispensable attributes of bliss and happiness to be enjoyed as a reward of virtue in this world (mānussakāmā) as well as in the next (dibbā kāmā). See kāmāvacara about the various stages of next-world happiness. Numerous examples are to be found in Pv and Vv, where a standing Ep. of the Blest is sabbakāmasamiddha “fully equipped with all objects of pleasure,” e. g. Pv.I,10⁵; PvA.46. The other-world pleasures are greater than the earthly ones: S.V,409; but to the Wise even these are unsatisfactory, since they still are signs of, and lead to, rebirth (kāmûpapatti, It (4): api dibbesu kāmesu ratiṁ so nâdhigacchati Dh.187; rāgaṁ vinayetha mānusesu dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhu Sn.361, see also It.94. -- Kāma as sensual pleasure finds its most marked application in the sphere of the sexual: kāmesu micchācārin, transgressing in lusts, sinning in the lusts of the flesh, or violating the third rule of conduct equivalent to abrahmacariyā, inchastity (see sīla) Pug.38, 39; It.63, etc. itthi-kāmehi paricāreti “he enjoys himself with the charms of woman” S.IV,343. Kāmesu brahmacariyavā practising chastity Sn.1041. Kāmatthā for sexual amusement A.III,229.

Redemption from kāma is to be effected by selfcontrol (saṁyama) and meditation (jhāna), by knowledge, right effort and renunciation. “To give up passion” as a practice of him who wishes to enter on the Path is expressed by: kāmānaṁ pahānaṁ, kāmasaññānaṁ pariññā, kāma-pipāsānaṁ-paṭivinayo, kāmavitakkānaṁ samugghāto kāma-pariḷāhānaṁ vūpasamo Vin.III,111; --kāmesu (ca) appaṭibaddhacitto “uddhaṁsoto” ti vuccati: he whose mind is not in the bonds of desire is called “one who is above the stream” Dh.218; cp. Th.2, 12; -- tasmā jantu sadā sato kāmāni parivajjaye Sn.771; -- yo kāme parivajjeti Sn.768=Nett 69. -- nikkhamma gharā panujja kāme Sn.359; -- ye ca kāme pariññāya caranti akutobhayā te ve pāragatā loke ye pattā āsavakkhayaṁ A.III,69. -- Kāmānaṁ pariññaṁ paññāpeti Gotamo M.I,84; cp. A.V,64; kāme pajahati: S.I,12=31; Sn.704; kāmānaṁ vippahāna S.I,47; -- ye kāme hitvā agihā caranti Sn.464; -- kāmā nirujjhanti (through jhāna) A.IV,410; kāme panudati Dh.383=S.I,15 (context broken), cp. kāmasukhaṁ analaṁkaritvā Sn.59; -- kāmesu anapekkhin Sn.166=Ś I.16 (abbrev.); S.II,281; Sn.857; -- cp. rāgaṁ vinayetha . . . Sn.361. vivicc’eva kāmehi, aloof from sensuous joys is the prescription for all Jhāna-exercise.

Applications of these expressions:--kāmesu palāḷita A.III,5; kāmesu mucchita S.I,74; kāmālaye asatta S.I,33; kāmesu kathaṁ nameyya S.I,117; kāmesu anikīḷitāvin S.I,9 (cp. kela); kittassa munino carato kāmesu anapekhino oghatiṇṇassa pihayanti kāmesu gathitā pajā Sn.823 (gadhitā Nd¹); -- kāmesu asaññata Sn.243; -- yo na lippati kāmesu tam ahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ Dh.401; -- Muni santivādo agiddho kāme ca loke ca anûpalitto Sn.845; kāmesu giddha D.III,107; Sn.774; kāmesu gedhaṁ āpajjati S.I,73; -- na so rajjati kāmesu Sn.161; -- kāmānaṁ vasam upāgamum Sn.315 (=kāmānaṁ āsattataṁ pāpuniṁsu SnA 325); kāme parivajjeti Sn.768, kāme anugijjhati Sn.769.

Character of Kāmā. The pleasures of the senses are evanescent, transient (sabbe kāmā aniccā, etc. A.II,177), and of no real taste (appāsādā); they do not give permanent satisfaction; the happiness which they yield is only a deception, or a dream, from which the dreamer awakens with sorrow and regret. Therefore the Buddha says “Even though the pleasure is great, the regret is greater: ādīnavo ettha bhīyyo” (see k-sukha). Thus kāmā as kālikā (needing time) S.I,9, 117; aniccā (transitory) S.I,22; kāmā citrā madhurā “pleasures are manifold and sweet” (i. e. tasty) Sn.50; but also appassādā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā: quot. M.I,91; see Nd² 71. Another passage with var. descriptions and comparisons of kāma, beginning with app’assādā dukkhā kāmā is found at J.IV,118. --atittaṁ yeva kāmesu antako kurute vasaṁ Dh.48; -- na kahāpaṇavassena titti kāmesu vijjati appasādā dukkhā kāmā iti viññāya paṇḍito “not for showers of coins is satisfaction to be found in pleasures-of no taste and full of misery are pleasures: thus say the wise and they understand” Dh.186; cp. M.I,130; Vin.II,25 (cp. Divy 224). -- Kāmato jāyatī soko kāmato jāyatī bhayaṁ kāmato vippamuttassa n’atthi soko kuto bhayan ti “of pleasure is born sorrow, of pleasure is born fear” Dh.215. ‹-› Kāmānam adhivacanāni, attributes of kāma are: bhaya, dukkha, roga, gaṇḍa, salla, saṅga, paṅka, gabbha A.IV,289; Nd² p. 62 on Sn.51; same, except salla & gabbha: A.III,310. The misery of such pleasures is painted in vivid colours in the Buddha’s discourse on pains of pleasures M.I,85 and parallel passages (see e. g. Nd² 199), how kāma is the cause of egoism, avarice, quarrels between kings, nations, families, how it leads to warfare, murder, lasciviousness, torture and madness. Kāmānaṁ ādīnavo (the danger of passions) M.I,85 sq. =Nd² 199, quot. SnA 114 (on Sn.61); as one of the five anupubbikathās: K° ādīnavaṁ okāraṁ saṁkilesaṁ A.IV,186, 209, 439; -- they are the leaders in the army of Māra: kāmā te paṭhamā senā Sn.436; -- yo evamvādī . . . n’atthi kāmesu doso ti so kāmesu pātavyataṁ āpajjati A.I,266=M.I,305 sq.

Similes.--In the foll. passage (following on appassādā bahudukkhā, etc.) the pleasures of the senses are likened to: (1) aṭṭhi-kaṅkhala, a chain of bones; ‹-› (2) maṁsapesi, a piece of (decaying) flesh; -- (3) tiṇ’ukkā, a torch of grass; (4) aṅgāra-kāsu, a pit of glowing cinders; -- (5) supina, a dream; (6) yācita, beggings; -- (7) rukkha-phala, the fruit of a tree; -- (8) asisūna, a slaughter-house; -- (9) satti-sūla, a sharp stake; -- (10) sappa-sira, a snake’s head, i. e. the bite of a snake at Vin.II,25; M.I,130; A.III,97 (where aṭṭhisaṅkhala); Nd² 71 (leaving out No. 10). Out of this list are taken single quotations of No. 4 at D.III,283; A.IV,224=V.175; No. 5 at DhA.III,240; No. 8 at M.I,144; No. 9 at S.I,128=Th.2, 58 & 141 (with khandhānaṁ for khandhāsaṁ); No. 10 as āsīvisa (poisonous fangs of a snake) yesu mucchitā bālā Th.2, 451, and several at many other places of the Canon.

Cases used adverbially:--kāmaṁ Acc. as adv. (a) yathā kāmaṁ according to inclination, at will, as much as one chooses S.I,227; J.I,203; PvA.63, 113, 176; yena kāmaṁ wherever he likes, just as he pleases A.IV,194; Vv I.1¹ (=icchānurūpaṁ VvA.11) -- (b) willingly, gladly, let it be that, usually with imper. S.I,222; J.I,233; III,147; IV,273; VvA.95; kāmaṁ taco nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu (avasussatu in J) sarīre upasussatu maṁsa-lohitaṁ “willingly shall skin, sinews and bone remain, whilst flesh and blood shall wither in the body” M.I,481; A.I,50; S.II,28; J.I,71, 110; --kāmasā (Instr.) in same sense J.IV,320; VI,181; --kāmena (Instr.) do. J.V,222, 226; --kāmā for the love of, longing after (often with hi) J.III,466; IV,285, 365; V,294; VI,563, 589; cp. Mhv III,18, 467. --akāmā unwillingly D.I,94; J.VI,506; involuntarily J.V,237.

°kāma (adj.) desiring, striving after, fond of, pursuing, in kāma-kāma pleasure-loving Sn.239 (kāme kāmayanto SnA 284); Dh.83 (cp. on this passage Morris, J.P.T.S. 1893, 39--41); same explⁿ as prec. at DhA.II,156; Th.2, 506. -- atthakāma well-wishing, desirous of good, benevolent J.I,241; V,504 (anukampakā +); sic lege for attakāmarūpā, M.I,205, III,155, cf. S i.44 with ib. 75; A.II,21; Pv IV.3⁵¹; VvA.11 (in quotation); PvA.25, 112; mānakāma proud S.I,4; lābhakāma fond of taking; grasping, selfish A.II,240; dūsetu° desiring to molest Vin.IV,212; dhamma° Sn.92; pasaṁsa° Sn.825. So frequently in comb. w. inf., meaning, willing to, wishing to, going to, desirous of: jīvitu°, amaritu°, dātu°, daṭṭhu°, dassana°, kātu°, pattu°, netu°, gantu°, bhojetu°, etc. --sakāma (-adj.) willing J.V,295. --akāma 1. not desiring, i. e. unwilling: M.II,181; mayhaṁ akāmāya against my wish (=mama anicchantiyā) Pv.II,10⁷, J.V,121, 183, etc. 2. without desire, desireless, passionless Sn.445. --nikkāma same Sn.1131.

--agga (nt.) the greatest pleasure, intense enjoyment M.II,43; Vv 16³ (=VvA.79, attributed to the Paranimmita-vasavattino-devā); --aggi the fire of passion J.V,487; --ajjhosāna (nt.) attachment to lust and desire, No. 10 in kāmacchanda series (see above); --âdhikaraṇa having its cause in desire M.I,85; S.I,74; --âdhimutta, bent upon the enjoyment of sensual pleasures A.III,168; J.VI,159; --ânusārin pursuing worldly pleasures J.II,117; --andha blinded by passion Ud.76=Th.1, 297;-- âbhibhū overcoming passions, Ep. of the Buddha D.II,274; --âbhimukha bent upon lust, voluptuous PvA.3; --âvacara “having its province in kāma,” belonging to the realm of sensuous pleasures. This term applies to the eleven grades of beings who are still under the influence of sensual desires and pleasures, as well as to all thoughts and conditions arising in this sphere of sensuous experience D.I,34 (of the soul, expl^d DA. 120: cha k°-devapariyāpanna); J.I,47; Dhs.1, 431; Ps.1, 84, 85, 101; Vbh.324; Vism.88, 372, 452 (rūpa°, arūpa°, lokuttara), 493 (of indriyas), 574; PvA.138. --kamma an action causing rebirth in the six kāma-worlds Dhs.414, 418, 431; --devatā PvA.138 (+brahmādevatā) and --devā the gods of the pleasure-heavens J.I,47; V,5; VI,99; Vism.392; or of the kāmâvacara-devaloka J.VI,586, --bhūmi and --loka the plane or world of kāma Ps.I,83; J.VI,99; see also avacara; --âvacaraka belonging to the realm of kāma J.VI,99; Sdhp.254 (°ika); --assāda the relish of sensual pleasures PvA.262; DA.I,89, 311; --ātura affected by passion, love-sick J.III,170; --ārāma pleasure-loving A.IV,438 (gihī k-bhogī, °ratā, °sammuditā); --ālaya, the abode of sensual pleasure (i. e. kāma-loka) S.I,33=Sn.177; Sn.306; --āvaṭṭa the whirlpool of sensuality J.II,330; --āsava the intoxication of passion, sensuality, lusts; def. as kāmesu kāma-chando, etc. (see above k-chando) Vbh.364, 374; Dhs.1097; as the first of four impurities, viz. k°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā° at Vin.III,5 (the detachment from which constitutes Arahantship); Vbh.373; Dhs.1096, 1448; as three (prec. without diṭṭhi°) at It.49; Vbh.364; cp. D.I,84; II,81; III,216; M.I,7; --itthi a pleasure-woman, a concubine Vin.I,36; J.I,83; V,490; VI,220; --upabhoga the enjoyment of pleasures VvA.79; --upādāna clinging to sensuality, arising from taṇhā, as k° diṭṭhi° sīlabbata°, attavāda° D.III,230; M.I,51; Vbh.136, 375; Vism.569; --ûpapatti existence or rebirth in the sensuous universe. These are three: (1) Paccupaṭṭhita-kāmā (including mankind, four lowest devalokas, Asuras, Petas and animals), (2) Nimmāna-ratino devā, (3) Paranimmita-vasavattino devā D.III,218; It.94. --ûpasaṁhita endowed with pleasantness: in formula rūpā (saddā, etc.) iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā k° rajaniyā “forms (sounds, etc.=any object of sense), desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasant, endowed with pleasantness, prompting desires” D.I,245=M.I,85; 504; D.II,265; M.III,267; VvA.127. --esanā the craving for pleasure. There are three esanās: kāma°, bhava°, brahmacariya° D.III,216 270; A.II,42; Vbh.366; It.48; S.V,54; --ogha the flood of sensual desires A.III,69; D.III,230, 276; Vbh.375; Vism.141; DhsA.166; Nd² 178 (viz. kām°, bhav°, diṭṭh°, avijj°). --kaṇṭaka the sting of lust Ud.27; --kara the fulfilment of one’s desires J.V,370 (=kāmakiriyā) --karaṇīya in yathā° pāpimato the puppet of the wicked (lit. one with whom one can do as one likes) M.I,173; It.56; --kalala the mud of passions J.III,293; --kāra the fulfilment of desires Sn.351=Th.1, 1271; --kārin acting according to one’s own inclination Th.1. 971; or acting willingly DA.I,71; --koṭṭhāsa a constituent of sensual pleasure (=kāmaguṇa) J.III,382; V,149; DA.I,121; PvA.205; --kopa the fury of passion Th.1, 671; --gavesin, pleasure-seeking Dh.99=Th.1, 992. --gijjha J.I,210 and --giddha greedy for pleasure, craving for love J.III,432; V,256; VI,245; --giddhimā, same J.VI,525. --giddhin f. °inī same Mhvs VI,3. --guṇā (pl.) always as pañca: the five strands of sensual pleasures, viz., the pleasures which are to be enjoyed by means of the five senses; collectively all sensual pleasures. Def. as cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā, etc. A.III,411; D.I,245; II,271; III,131, 234; Nd² s. v.; Ps.I,129; as manāpiyehi rūpâdīhi pañcahi kāma-koṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā DA.I,121, where it is also divided into two groups: mānusakā and dibbā. As constituents of kāmarāga at Nett 28; as vana (desire) Nett 81. -- In the popular view they are also to be enjoyed in “heaven”: saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissāmi tattha dibbehi pañcahi k-guṇehi samappito samaṅgibhūto paricāressāmī ti Vin.III,72; mentioned as pleasures in Nandana S.I,5; M.I,505; A.III,40, IV.118; in various other connections S.IV,202; Vv 30⁷; Pv III,7¹ (°ehi sobhasi; expl. PvA.205 by kāma-koṭṭhāsehi); PvA.58 (paricārenti); cp. also kāma-kāmin. As the highest joys of this earth they are the share of men of good fortune, like kings, etc. (mānusakā k° guṇā) S.V,409; A.V,272, but the same passage with “dibbehi pañcahi k°-guṇehi samappita . . .” also refers to earthly pleasures, e. g. S.I,79, 80 (of kings); S.V,342 (of a Cakkavatti); A.II,125; IV,55, 239; V,203; of the soul D.I,36; Vbh.379; other passages simply quoting k-g° as worldly pleasures are e. g. S.I,16=Sn.171; S.I,92; IV,196. 326; A.III,69 (itthirūpasmiṁ); D.I,60, 104; Sdhp.261. In the estimation of the early Buddhists, however, this bundle of pleasures is to be banned from the thought of every earnest striver after perfection: their critique of the kāmaguṇā begins with “pañc’ime bhikkhave kāmaguṇā . . .” and is found at various places, e. g. in full at M.I,85=Nd² s. v.; M.I,454; II,42; III,114; quoted at M.I,92; A.III,411; IV,415, 430, 449, 458. Other expressions voicing the same view are: gedho pañcannaṁ k°-guṇānaṁ adhivacanaṁ A.III,312 sq.; asisūnā . . . adhivac° M.I,144; nivāpo . . . adhivac° M. I.155; sāvaṭṭo . . . adhivac° It.114. In connection w. rata & giddha PvA.3; pahīna M.III,295; gathita & mucchita M.I,173; mā te kāmaguṇe bhamassu cittaṁ “Let not thy heart roam in the fivefold pleasures” Dh.371; cittassa vossaggo Vbh.370; asantuṭṭha Vbh.350. See also Sn.50, 51, 171, 284, 337. --guṇika consisting of fivefold desire, appl. to rāga S.II,99; J.IV,220; Dhs.A.371; --gedha a craving for pleasure S.I,100; ThA.225; --cāgin he who has abandoned lusts Sn.719. --citta impure thought J.II,214; --chanda excitement of sensual pleasure, grouped as the first of the series of five obstacles (pañca nīvaraṇāni) D.I,156, 246; III,234, 278; A.I,231; IV,457; A.I,134=Sn.1106; S.I,99; V,64; Bdhd 72, 96, 130; Nd² 200, 420A. Also as the first in the series of ten fetters (saṁyojanāni) which are given above (p. 31) as synonyms of kāma. Enumerated under 1--10 at Nd² 200 as eight in order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10 (omitting pipāsā and gedha) Vbh.364; Dhs.1114, 1153; Nd² ad chandarāga and bhavachanda; in order: 2, 3, 5, 9, 6, 7, 10, 4 at A.II,10; -- as nine (like above, omitting gedha) at Vbh.374; Dhs.1097; -- as five in order: 1, 5, 9, 6, 7, (cp. above passage A.II,10) at M.I,241; -- as four in order: 1, 5, 9, 7 at S.IV,188; -- as six nīvaraṇas (5 + avijjā) at Dhs.1170, 1486. See also D.I,246; III,234, 269; Ps.I,103, 108; II,22, 26, 44, 169; Vism.141; Sdhp.459; --jāla the net of desires Th.1, 355; --taṇhā thirst after sensual pleasures; the first of the three taṇhās, viz. kāma°, bhava°, vibhava° D.III,216, 275; It.50; Vbh.365 (where defined as kāmadhātupaṭisaṁyutto rāgo); Dhs.1059, 1136 (cp. taṇhā: jappāpassage); as the three taṇhā, viz. ponobbhavikā, nandirāga-sahagatā, tatratatr’âbhinandinī at Vin.I,10= Vbh.101; as k-taṇhāhi khajjamāno k-pariḷāhena pariḍayhamāno M.I,504. See also D.II,308; S.I,131; A.II,11; Th.2, 140; J.II,311; V,451; Miln.318. --da granting desires, bestowing objects of pleasure and delight; Ep. of Yakkhas and of Vessantara (cp. the good fairy) J.VI,498, 525; Mhvs 19, 9; as sabba° Pv.II,13⁸; --dada=prec. Pv.II,9¹⁸; PvA.112; J.VI,508; of a stone Miln.243, 252; of Nibbāna Miln.321; Kh VIII,10: esa devamanussānaṁ sabbakāmadado nidhi “this is the treasure which gives all pleasures to gods and men”; --dukkha the pain of sensual pleasures J.IV,118; --duha granting wishes, like a cow giving milk J.V,33; VI,214; f. °duhā the cow of plenty J.IV,20; --dhātu “element of desire.” i. e. 1. the world of desire, that sphere of existence in which beings are still in the bonds of sensuality, extending from the Avīci-niraya to the heaven of the Paranimmita-vasavatti-devas S.II,151; Th.1, 181; also 2. sensual pleasures, desires, of which there are six dhātus, viz. kāma°, vyāpāda, vihiṁsā°, nekkhamma°, avyāpāda°, avihiṁsā°, Vbh.86; Nett 97; D.III,215= Vbh.363 (as the first three=akusaladhātus); Vbh.404. See also D.III,275; Th.1, 378; J.V,454; Vism.486 (cp. Vbh.86). --nandī sensual delight (cp. °chanda) A.II,11; Dhs.1114, etc. --nidānaṁ Acc. adv. as the consequence of passion, through passion, M.I,85, etc. (in kāmaguṇā passage); --nissaraṇa deliverance from passion, the extinction of passion It.61 (as three nissaraṇīyā dhātuyo), cp. A.III,245; --nissita depending on craving Miln.11; --nīta led by desire J.II,214, 215; --paṅka the mire of lusts Sn.945; Th.2, 354; J.V,186, 256; VI,230, 505; Mhbv 3; --paṭisandhi-sukhin finding happiness in the association with desire M.III,230; --pariḷāha the flame or the fever of passion M.I,242, 508; S.IV,188; A.I,68 (pariḍayhati, khajjati, etc.); A.II,11; Vin.III,20; Nd² 374 (com^d with °palibodha); DhA.II,2; see also kāmacchanda passage. --pāla the guardian of wishes, i. e. benefactor J.V,221; --pipāsā thirst for sensuality M.I,242; A.II,11, and under k°-chanda; --bandha Ud.93, and --bandhana the bonds of desire J.VI,28, also in the sense of k°-guṇā, q. v.; --bhava a state of existence dominated by pleasures. It is the second kind of existence, the first being caused by kamma Vbh.137. It rests on the effect of kamma, which is manifested in the kāma-dhātu A.I,223. It is the first form of the 3 bhavas, viz. kāma°, rūpa°, arūpa° Vin.I,36; D.III,216; A.IV,402; Vism.572. Emancipation from this existence is the first condition to the attainment of Arahantship: kāmabhave asatta akiñcana Sn.176, 1059, 1091 (expl. SnA 215: tividhe bhave alaggana); Bdhd 61. °parikkhīṇa one who has overcome the desire-existence Dh.415=Sn.639. --bhoga enjoyment of sensual pleasures, gratification of desires S.I,74 (sāratta --°esu giddhā kāmesu mucchitā); Th.2, 464; It.94 (-°esu paṇḍito who discriminates in worldly pleasures); J.II,65; --bhogin enjoying the pleasures of the senses Vin.I,203, 287; II,136, 149; D.III,124, 125; Miln.243, 350, as Ep. of the kāmûpapatti-beings It.94; as ten kinds A.V,177; as bringing evil, being blameworthy S.I,78; cp. A.IV,281, 438; S.IV,333 sq.; A.III,351; Th.2, 486; J.III,154. ye keci kāmesu asaññatā janā avītarāgā idha k-bhogino (etc.) A.II,6, cp. II.17. kāmabhogī kām’ārāmo kāmarato kāma-sammudita A.IV,439; --°seyyā sleeping at ease, way of lying down, the second of the four ways of sleeping (kāmabhogīseyyā vāmena passena) A.II,244; --bhojin=°bhogin Ud.65; --magga the path of sensuous pleasures J.V,67; --matta intoxicated with sensuous pleasures J.VI,231; --mucchā sensual stupor or languor S.IV,189; A.II,11; Dhs.1114, etc. (see kāmacchanda); --yoga application to sensuous enjoyment, one of the four yogas, viz. kāma°, bhava°, diṭṭhi°, avijjā° (cp. āsavā) A.II,10; only the first two at It.95; cp. D.III,230, 276; S.V,59; DhsA.166; --rata delighting in pleasures J.V,255; --rati amorous enjoyment (as arati) Th.2, 58 and 141; J.I,211; III,396; IV,107. –n’atthi nissaraṇaṁ loke kiṁ vivekena kāhasi bhuñjassu kratiyo mâhu pacchânutāpinī S.I,128. mā pamādam anuyuñjetha, mā kāmaratisanthavaṁ appamatto hi jhāyanto pappoti paramaṁ sukhan S.I,25=Dh.27=Th.1, 884; --rasa the taste of love J.II,329; III,170; V,451; --rāga sensual passion, lust. This term embraces the kāmaguṇā & the three rāgas: Dhs.1131, 1460; Nett 28; M.I,433 sq.; D.III,254, 282; S.I,22= A.III,411; S.I,13, 53; III,155; Th.2, 68, 77; PvA.6; see also k-chanda passage. Relinquishing this desire befits the Saint: Sn.139 (°ṁ virājetvā brahmalokûpago). As k-rāgavyāpāda Dhs.362; SnA 205; --rūpa a form assumed at will VvA.80, or a form which enjoys the pleasures of heaven Vbh.426; --lāpin talking as one likes D.I,91 (=DA.I,257 yadicchaka-bhāṇin); --lābha the grasping of pleasures, in °abhijappin A.III,353; --loka the world of pleasures=kāmâvacara, q. v. Sdhp.233, 261; --vaṇṇin assuming any form at will, Protean J.II,255= III,409=Vv 33¹⁹¹; J.V,157; Vv 16³; VvA.80, 143, 146; --vasika under the influence of passions J.II,215; --vitakka a thought concerning some sensuous pleasure, one of the three evil thoughts (kāma° vyāpāda° vihiṁsā°) D.III,215, 226; M.I,114; A.I,68; J.I,63; III,18, 375; IV,490; VI,29; It.82, 115; Vbh.362; Miln.310; --vega the impulse of lust J.VI,268; --sagga the heaven of sensuous beings, there are six q. v. under sagga J.I,105; II,130; III,258; IV,490; VI,29, 432; at all these passages only referred to, not enum^d; cp. k-âvacara; --saṅkappa- bahula full of aspirations after pleasure A.III,145, 259; D.III,215; --saṅga attachment to passion Ud.75; --saññā lustful idea or thought; one of the three akusalasaññās (as vitakka) D.I,182; III,215; M.II,262; S.I,126; Vbh.363; Th.1, 1039; virata k° āya S.I,53=Sn.175; --saññojana the obstacle or hindrance formed by pleasures; °âtiga Ep. of Arahant, free of the fetters of lust A.III,373 (+ kāmarāgaṁ virājetvā); --sineha love of pleasures Dhs.1097 (also as °sneha M.I,241; S.IV,188; A.II,10); see k-chanda; --sukha happiness or welfare arising from (sensual) pleasure, worldly happiness, valued as mīlha°, puthujjana°, anariya°, and not worth pursuit: see kāmaguṇā, which passage closes: yaṁ ime pañca k-guṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṁ somanassaṁ idaṁ vuccati k-sukhaṁ A.IV,415; S.IV,225; varying with . . . somanassaṁ ayaṁ kāmānaṁ assādo M.I,85, 92, etc. -- As kāma° and nekkhamma° A.I,80; as renounced by the Saint: anapekkhino k° ṁ pahāya Dh.346= S.I,77; M.III,230; Sn.59 (see Nd² s. v.). See also S.IV,208; M.II,43; Th.2, 483; Vv 6¹⁷; J.II,140; III,396; V,428; kāmasukhallik’ânuyoga attachment to worldly enjoyment S.IV,330; V,421; Vin.I,10; D.III,113; Nett 110; Vism.5, 32; --sutta N. of the first sutta of the Aṭṭhakavagga of Sn; --seṭṭhā (pl.) a class of devas D.II,258; --sevanā pursuit of, indulgence in, sensuous pleasure J.II,180; III,464; --sevin adj. to prec. J.IV,118; --hetu having craving as a cause: in ādīnava-section, foll. on kāmaguṇā M.I,86, etc., of wealth S.I,74; --hetuka caused by passion Th.2, 355=ThA.243; J.V,220, 225. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic kāma),【阳】【中】贪欲(性爱)，想要(不一定是贪)，快乐，乐趣，官能享乐的对象。kāmagiddha, 贪欲，贪婪於官能享受。kāmaguṇa,【阳】情欲，官能上的享受。kāmagedha,【阳】执情，执著於官能享受。kāmacchanda,【阳】激情，官能享受的刺激。kāmataṇhā,【阴】恋情，对官能享受之渴望。kāmada, kāmadada,【形】情施，给予的都是很想要的东西。kāmadhātu 【阴】情欲世界。kāmapaṅka,【阳】贪欲的泥沼。kāmapariḷāha,【阳】灼热的情感。kāmapaṅkabhava,【阳】欲界。kāmabhogī,【形】享受的财物。kāmamucchā,【阴】官能上的麻木。kāmarati,【阴】好色，情痴，多情的享乐。kāmarāga,【阳】激情。kāmaloka,【阳】情欲世界。kāmavitakka,【阳】欲寻，情欲的思绪。kāmasaṅkappa,【阳】情欲的抱负。kāmasaññojana,【中】情欲的妨害。kāmasukha,【中】情欲的快乐。kāmasevanā,【阴】(沉溺於)行房。M.22./I,130.(蛇喻经)︰Appassādā kāmā vuttā Bhagavatā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo.(世尊说欲(kāmā)是乐少，苦多、恼多，此处灾患更倍增)，说喻作：1.骸骨(aṭṭhikaṅkala骷髅，现外形，如露白骨；或如狗啃骨，不能疗饥)；2.肉脔(maṁsapesi﹐脔ㄌㄨㄢˊ﹐肉片、肉段。众鸟竞逐)；3.乾草炬(tiṇukkā草火把，如向风执炬逆走，若不放舍，必为所烧)；4.炭窝(aṅgārakāsu火坑，若堕火坑，必死无疑，设不死者，定受极苦)；5.梦(supinaka醒时全空)；借用物(yācitaka债主终必索还)；6.树果(rukkhaphala於树下若不躲避，终必被锯之树所伤)；7.屠宰场(asisūna必招宰杀)；8.长矛(sattisūla有被伤害的危险)。又参见《中阿含》200经》阿黎吒经》(T1.763)、《中阿含》202经》持斋经》大正1.774下~775上)、《别译杂阿含185经》(T2.440上)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāmacchanda: {'def': '【阳】激情，官能享受的刺激。Dhs.(PTS:1153；CS:1159.)︰ Tattha katamaṁ kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṁ? Yo kāmesu 1kāmacchando 2kāmarāgo 3kāmanandī 4kāmataṇhā 5kāmasineho 6kāmapariḷāho 7kāmamucchā 8kāmajjhosānaṁ--idaṁ vuccati kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṁ. (什么是‘慾欲盖’？凡是於慾，1慾欲、2慾染、3慾喜、4慾贪、5慾爱、6慾热、7慾醉、8慾黏，这称为慾欲盖。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāmadhātu: {'def': '【阴】情欲世界。Vbh.363.︰Tattha katamā kāmadhātu? Kāmavitakko kāmadhātu. Byāpādavitakko byāpādadhātu. Vihiṁsāvitakko vihiṁsādhātu.(什么叫做‘慾界’？慾界的慾寻；逆向(瞋)界的界的慾寻。害界的害寻。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāmaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kāma] only --° in neg. akāmaka unwilling, undesirous D.I,115; M.I,163; Vin.III,13; J.IV,31; cp. kāmuka. (Page 206)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāmatā: {'def': '【阴】渴望，志愿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】渴望，志愿。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. kāma] desire, longing, with noun: viveka° . . . to be alone PvA.43; anattha° J.IV,14; with inf. PvA.65 (gahetu°); J.III,362 (vināsetu°); Mhvs 5, 260; DhA.I,91. (Page 206)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāmaṇḍaluka: {'def': '(adj.) having a kamaṇḍalu (q. v.) S.IV,312 cp. A.V,263. (Page 206)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāmesumicchācārā: {'def': '(=kāmesu micchā carati), 邪淫。SA.14.25./II,145.(=MA.9./I,199.)：Kāmesumicchācāroti ettha pana kāmesūti methunasamācāresu. Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā kāmesumicchācāro.(於欲邪行：此处‘於欲’指淫行。邪行︰极度受责备的低劣的行为。从形相上，非法的欲求，转起身门，要经过不正确的寻思，在欲上邪行。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāmetabba: {'def': '【潜】令人想要的。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【义】令人想要的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāmeti: {'def': '[den. fr. kāma] to desire, to crave, 1. to crave for any object of pleasure: Th.1, 93; J.III,154; IV,167; V,480; -- 2. to desire a woman, to be in love with D.I,241; M.II,40; J.II,226; V,425; VI,307, 326, etc. ‹-› pp. kāmita in kāmita-vatthu the desired object PvA.119; VvA.122; grd. kāmitabba to be desired, desirable PvA.16 (v. l. for kañña, better), 73; VvA.127; and kāmetabba J. V.156 (=kamaṇīya); ppr. (kāmaṁ) kāmayamānassa Sn.766 (=icchamānassa, etc., Nd¹); J.VI,172=Nett 69. (Page 206)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kam+e), 渴望，需要。kāmesi,【过】。kāmita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kam + e), 渴望，需要。kāmesi, 【过】。kāmita, 【过分】。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāmin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kāma] 1. having kāma, i. e. enjoying pleasure, gratifying one’s own desires in kāma-kāmin realizing all wishes; attr. of beings in one of the Sugatis, the blissful states, of Yakkhas, Devas or Devaññataras (Pv.I,3³=PvA.16), as a reward for former merit; usually in combⁿ with bhuñjāmi paribhogavant (Pv IV.3⁴⁶) or as “nandino devalokasmiṁ modanti kkāmino” A.II,62=It.112; Th.1, 242; J.III,154; Pv.II,1¹⁵; Pv III,1¹⁶ (expl. “as enjoying after their hearts’content all pleasures they can wish for”). -- 2. giving kāma, i. e. benevolent, fulfilling people’s wishes; satisfying their desires, in atthakāminī devatā Sn.986. -- akāmakāmin passionless, dispassionate Sn.1096, syn. of vītataṇhā without desire (cp. Nd² 4). (Page 206)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāmuka: {'def': '(adj. -n.) [cp. Sk. kāmuka] desiring, loving, fond of; a sweetheart, lover J.V,306; Mhbv 3. (Page 206)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】好色的，淫荡的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】好色的，淫荡的。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāmī: {'def': '【形】是情欲的对象的人。(在【合】中) 想…。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】是情欲的对象的人。 (在【合】中) 想…。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kānana: {'def': '【中】森林，小树林。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. kānana] a glade in the forest, a grove, wood Sn.1134 (=Nd² s. v. vanasaṇḍa); Th.2, 254 (=ThA.210 upavana); J.VI,557; Sdhp.574. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】森林，小树林。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kānāmā: {'def': 'f. of konāma, 他叫做什么?(of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin.II,272, 273; J.VI.338.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'f. of konāma of what name? what is her (or your) name? Vin.II,272, 273; J.VI,338. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāpilanī: {'def': 'patron. f. of Kapila; the lady of the Kapila clan Th.2, 65. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāpilavatthava: {'def': '(adj.) of or from Kapilavatthu, belonging to K. D.II,165, 256; S.IV,182. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'a. Kapilavatthu(迦毘羅衛城)的, 屬於Kapilavatthu的.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '【形】迦毘罗卫城 (Kapilavatthu) 的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a. Kapilavatthu の.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'a.カピラヴアツトウの', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【形】属于迦毗罗卫城 (Kapilavatthu) 的。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāpotaka: {'def': '【形】淡白色的。kāpotikā,【阴】一种(微红色的)酒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】淡白色的。kāpotikā,【阴】一种（微红色的）酒。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kapota] pigeon-coloured, grey, of a dull white, said of the bones of a skeleton D.I,55; Dh.149 (=DhA.III,112). (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāpotikā: {'def': '(f.) [of doubtful origin, fr. kapota, but probably popular etym., one may compare Sk. kāpiśāyana, a sort of spirituous liquor Halāyudha 2, 175, which expresses a diff. notion, i. e. fr. kapi] a kind of intoxicating drink, of a reddish colour (like pigeons’fect) Vin.IV,109, cp. J.I,360 (surā). (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāpurisa: {'def': '【阳】可怜的人，可鄙的人。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】可怜的人，可鄙的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[kad + purisa] a low, vile, contemptible man, a wretch Vin.II,188; D.III,279; S.I,91, 154; II,241; V,204; Th.1, 124, 495; J.II,42; VI,437; Pv.II,9³⁰ (PvA.125=lāmaka°); sometimes denoting one who has not entered the Path A.III,24; Th.2, 189. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kār: {'def': '--secondary root of karoti, in denom. and intensive function in kāra, kāraka, kāraṇa, kārin, kāreti and their derivations. (Page 209)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāra: {'def': '【阳】行为，服务，尊崇的行为。【形】(在【合】中，如 rathakāra)：制造者。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】行为，服务，尊崇的行为。【形】(在【合】中，如 rathakāra)：制造者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. kār-, cp. Vedic kāra song of praise, which is, however, derived fr. kṛ=kir to praise; also Vedic °kāra in brāhma°, fr. kṛ] 1. abs. (a) deed, service, act of mercy or worship, homage: kāra-paṇṇaka J.VI,24 (vegetable as oblation); appako pi kato kāro devûpapattiṁ āvahati “even a small gift of mercy brings about rebirth among the gods” PvA.6. --kāraka one who performs a religious duty D.I,61 (=DA.I,170). (b) doing, manner, way: yena kārena akattha tena k° pavattamānaṁ phalaṁ “as you have done so will be the fruit” PvA.45. -- 2. (-°) (a) the production or application of, i. e. the state or quality of . . .: atta° one’s own state =ahaṁ kāra, individuality; para° the personality of others A.III,337; citti° reflection, thought PvA.26; see e. g. andha° darkness, sak° homage, etc. -- balakkārena forcibly PvA.68. -- (b) as ttg. the item, i. e. particle, letter, sound or word, e. g. ma-kāra the letter m PvA.52; ca-kāra the particle ca PvA.15; sa-kāra the sound sa SnA 23. -- (c) (adj. -n.) [cp. kara] one who does, handles or deals with: ayakāra iron-smith Miln.331. (Page 209)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāraka: {'def': '【阳】行为者。【中】（在语法中的）句法。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(usually --°) the doer (of): Vin.II,221 (capu-capu°); sāsana° he who does according to (my) advice Sn.445; Bdhd 85 sq.; -- f. kārikā: veyyāvacca° a servant PvA.65 (text reads °tā); as n. the performance of (-°), service: dukkara-kārikā the performance of evil deeds S.I,103; Th.2, 413 (=ThA.267). --agga-kārikā first test, sample Vin.III,80. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】作者，行为者，作事者。【中】(在语法中的)句法。【阴】kārikā。dukkara-kārikā,作难作的事(“doing of a hard task,” exertion, austerity)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [in meaning 1 represented in later Sk. by kāraṇā f., in meaning 2=Sk. kāraṇa nt., equivalent to prakṛti, natural form, constituent, reason, cause]. 1. --(a) a deed, action, performance, esp. an act imposed or inflicted upon somebody by a higher authority (by the king as representative of justice or by kamma: M.III,181; see kamma 11 3.A b.) as an ordeal, a feat or punishment: a labour or task in the sense of the 12 labours of Heracles or the labours of Hades. kāraṇaṁ kārāpeti “he makes somebody perform the task.” Pass, kāraṇaṁ or kāraṇā karīyati. Thus as a set of five tasks or purgatory obligations under the name of pañcavidha-bandhana “the group of five” (not, as Warren trsl. p. 257 “inflict on him the torture called the fivefold pinion”), a means of punishment in Niraya (q. v. under pañca). Not primarily torture (Rh. Davids, Miln.trsl. I.254, and others with wrong derivation from kṛṇtati). At DhA.III,70 these punishments are comprehended under the term dasa-dukkhakāraṇāni (the ten punishments in misery); the meaning “punishment” also at J.IV,87 (tantarajjukaṁ k°ṁ katvā), whereas at J.VI,416 k. is directly paraphrased by “maraṇa,” as much as “killing.” Often spelt karaṇa, q. v.; the spelling kāraṇā (as f.) at Miln.185 seems to be a later spelling for kāraṇaṁ. See karaṇa for further reference. -- Kiṁ kāraṇaṁ ajja kāressati “what task will he impose on me to-day?” A.V,324; as pañcavidhabandhana K° A.I,141, PvA.251, Nd² 304^III, -- As adj. °kāraṇa in dāruṇa° “being obliged to go through the dreadful trial” PvA.221. -- (b) duty obligation, in kāraṇ’âkāraṇā (pl.) duties great and small DhA.I,385. Cp. also kāraṇaṁ karoti to try M.I,444. -- (c) a trick (i. e. a duty imposed by a higher authority through training) J.II,325 (ānañja°); Miln.201 (ākāsa-gamana°). 2. -- (a) acting, action as (material) cause: k°-bhūta being the cause of . . . PvA.15;--(b) (intellectual) cause, reason Miln.150; DhA.I,389; esp. as --°: arodana° the reason for not crying PvA.63; asocana° same, ibid. 62; āgamana° the reason for coming (here) ibid. 81, 106. =pariyatti, DhA. 36.=attha, SA on I.215, SnA. I.238--Instr. kāraṇena by necessity, needs PvA.195; tena k° therefore ibid. 40 -- Abl. kāranā by means of, through, by (=hetu or nissāya) PvA.27; imasmā k° therefore PvA.40; kāraṇaṭṭhā (expl. as attha-kāraṇā Nd²) for the purpose of some object or advantage Sn.75; opp. nikkāraṇā from unselfishness ibid.-sakāraṇa (adj.) with good reason (of vacana) PvA.109. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】理由，因素。kāraṇā, 【来】经由，通过，由。kiŋ kāraṇā =为什么？(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'n. [〃] ① 因, 原因, 根拠. ② 懲罰, 懲治, 刑罰.③作，所作，能作', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【中】理由(原因)，因素。kāraṇā,【离】经由，通过，由。kiṁ kāraṇā = 为什么?', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāraṇika: {'def': '[der. fr. prec.] the meaning ought to be “one who is under a certain obligation” or “one who dispenses certain obligations.” In usu° S.II,257 however used simply in the sense of making: arrow-maker, fletcher. Perhaps the reading should be °kāraka. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāraṇā: {'def': '【阴】拷问，体罚。kāraṇika,【阳】处罚者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】拷问，体罚。kāraṇika,【阳】处罚者。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāraṇḍava: {'def': '² [cp. Sk. kāraṇḍava] a sort of duck Vv 35⁸ (expl^d as also by Halāyudha 2, 99 by kādamba, black goose). (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [of uncertain etym., cp. karaṇḍa] chaff, offal, sweepings, fig. dirt, impurity: yava° A.IV,169 (chaff); samaṇa° ibid. -- In passage kāraṇḍavaṁ niddhamatha, kasambuṁ apakassatha A.IV,172=Sn.281=Miln.414 trsl^d by Rh. Davids Miln.trsl. II.363 “get rid of filth, put aside rubbish from you,” expl. SnA 311 by kacavara (q. v.). Rh. D’s note³ Loc. cit. is to be modified according to the parallel passages just given. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāreti: {'def': '(Causative of karoti), to construct, to build, etc.; pp. kārita; der. --kārāpaṇa the construction of (vihāra°) DhA.I,416. For details see karoti IV.; see also kārāpaka & kārāpita. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(karoti 的【使】), 使做，使建立，使构造。kāresi,【过】。kāretvā,【独】。kārenta,【现分】。kārita,【过分】。kāreyya,【使】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(karoti 的【使】), 使做，使建立，使构造。kāresi, 【过】。kāretvā,【独】。kārenta,【现分】。kārita, 【过分】。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kārikā: {'def': '【阴】注释。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】注释。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see kāraka. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kārin: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) doing: yathāvādī tathākārī “as he says so he does” D.III,135, Sn.357; see for examples the various cpds. as kamma°, kibbisa°, khaṇḍa°, chidda°, dukkaṭa°, dvaya°, paccakkha°, pubba°, sakkacca°, sampajāna°, etc. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāritā: {'def': '= kārikā (performance); see pāripūri°. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'f. 作者，所作. cf. kāraka', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kāriy: {'def': '【形、中】责任，行动，应该被做的。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形、中】责任，行动，应该被做的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāriya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of kāreti, Caus. of karoti] to be done, neg. akāriya to be undone, (not) to be made good It.18. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāruñña: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. karuṇa] compassion (usually with anudayā and anukampā) S.II,199; A.III,189; Vism.300; PvA.75; Sdhp.509. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】同情。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】同情。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāruññatā: {'def': '(f.) compassionateness S.I,138. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāruṇika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. karuṇa] compassionate, merciful Pv.II,1¹³; PvA.16; Bdhd 49; often with mahā°: of great mercy Sdhp.330, 557; so of the Buddha: mahākāruṇika nātha “the Saviour of great mercy” in introductory stanzas to Pv and Vv. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】怜悯。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】怜悯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kārā: {'def': 'f. [〃] 牢獄, 獄舎. kāra-bhedaka 破獄者.②カーラ樹 cf.kālā', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【阴】 kārāghara,【中】监狱，监牢。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. kārā] confinement, captivity, jail, in °bhedaka cora a thief who has broken out of jail Vin.I,75. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'f.樹，葉', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【阴】kārāghara,【中】监狱，监牢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kārābhedaka: {'def': '【形】逃狱者。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】逃狱者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kārāpaka: {'def': '【阳】计划者，谋士，发令的人。kārāpikā,【阴】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】计划者，谋士，发令的人。kārāpikā, 【阴】。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. kārāpeti] a schemer, inventor J.VI,333. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kārāpana: {'def': '【中】令做，命令。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】令做，命令。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kārāpaṇa: {'def': 'see kāreti. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kārāpeti: {'def': '(karoti 的【使】)。kārāpesi, 【过】。kārāpita, 【过分】。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(karoti 的【使】),被做。kārāpesi,【过】。kārāpita,【过分】。kārāpetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kārāpita: {'def': '[pp. of kārāpeti, Caus. of karoti] made to do J.VI,374. (Page 210)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kārī: {'def': '【阳】行为者。(通常在【合】中，如 sātāccakārī)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】行为者。 (通常在【合】中，如 sātāccakārī)。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāsa: {'def': '【阳】 1. 芦苇。2. 结核病，痨病。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.芦苇(reed﹐台语：菅芒kuann bang)。2.咳，喘息。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. kāśa] a kind of reed, Saccharum spontaneum S.III,137. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. kāsa] cough; in list of diseases under ābādhā A.V,110=Nd² 304¹. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāsi: {'def': 'f. [Sk. Kāśi] 迦尸 [十六大國之一, 首都 Bārāṇasī(波羅奈)].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. [Sk. Kāśi] 迦尸, ヵーシ [十六大国の一, 首都は Bārāṇasī].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(梵Kāwi光的城市),【阳】迦尸(国名，迦尸国为佛世时印度十六大国之一。位於憍萨罗国之北，其都城婆罗木奈斯(Bārāṇasī)即今之瓦拉那西市(Varanasi)，系佛教与婆罗门教之圣地)。kāsika,【形】迦尸的，迦尸制造的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（古国名）咖西，（古音译：）迦尸，伽尸，伽奢，伽翅', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阳】迦尸（国名，首都是巴那拉斯市 (Benares)）。kāsika,【形】属于迦尸的，迦尸制造的。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāsika: {'def': 'Kāsiya a. [Kāsi-ka, -ya] カーシの, カーシ国産の(絹, 布, 香).', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'Kāsiya a. [Kāsi-ka, -ya] Kāsi的, Kāsi國所生産的(絹, 布, 香).', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. kāśika & in a diff. sense aḍḍha-kāsika] belonging to the Kāsī country, or to Benares; in °uttama (scil. vattha) an upper garment made of Benares cloth Pv.I,10⁸; J.VI,49 (where to be read kāsik’uttama for kāsi-kuttama). °vattha Benares muslin A.I,248; III,50; Pug.34; Miln.2; DhA.I,417; Vism.115. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāsu: {'def': '【阴】坑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】坑。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. karṣū, fr. kṛṣ] a hole; only in cpd. aṅgārakāsu a cinderhole, a fire-pit, usually understood as a pit of glowing cinders J.I,232. Mostly found in similes, e. g. S.IV,56, 188; Sn.396; Sdhp. 208; and in kāmā aṅgārakās’ûpamā metaphor A.IV,224=V.175; see also kāma. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāsāvaka: {'def': '[fr. kāsāva] a yellow robe DhA.II,86. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāsāviya: {'def': '[fr. kāsāva] one who is dressed in yellow, esp. of the royal executioner (cp. kāsāya-vattha) J.IV,447 (=cora-ghātaka C.). (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāsāya: {'def': 'kasāva,【中】黄袈裟。【形】染以橘色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'and Kāsāva (adj.) [Sk. kāṣāya from the Pāli; kāsāya prob. fr. Sk. śyāma or śyāva brown=Pāli sāma, with kā=kad, a kind of, thus meaning a kind of brown, i. e. yellow. See further under sāma and cp. kāla] 1. Kāsāya as attr. of vatthāni, the yellow robes of the Buddhist mendicant, in phrase kāsāyāni v° acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṁ pabbajitvā, describing the taking up of the “homeless state” D.I,60, 61, 63, 115; M.II,67; A.I,107; II,208; IV,118, 274, 280; Pug.57; Nd² 172. °vattha (adj.) with yellow robes Sn.64; cp. ‘nivattha J.III,179 (dressed in yellow, of the executioner: see Fick, Soziale Gliederung p. 104 & cp. kāsāya-nivāsana J.III,41; kāsāviya J.IV,447); PvA.20; °vāsin dressed in yellow Sn.487. -- 2. Kāsāva (vattha) the yellow robe (never in above formula) Vin.I,287; S.IV,190=V.53=301; Dh.9, 10=Th.1, 969, 970=J.II,198 =V.50; Miln.11. °kaṇṭhā (pl.) the “yellow necks” those whose necks are dressed in yellow Dh.307 (= DhA.III,480)=It.43; °pajjota glittering with yellow robes Vbh.247; Miln.19. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'kasāva,【中】黄袈裟。【形】染以橘色的。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kātabba: {'def': '【现分】应该被做。【中】责任。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【现分】应该被做。【中】责任。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. -n.) (grd. of karoti) that which ought to, can or must be done (see karoti) J.I,264, etc. Also as kattabba PvA.30. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kātara: {'def': '【形】吝啬的，卑鄙的，悲惨的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】吝啬的，卑鄙的，悲惨的。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kātave: {'def': 'kātuŋ, 【不】要去做。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'kātuṁ,【不】要去做。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kātu: {'def': '［karoti の inf.］ kātu-kāma なさんと欲する', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kātukāma: {'def': '【形】想做。kātukāmatā, kātukamyatā,【阴】想要去做或运行。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】想做。kātukāmatā, kātukamyatā,【阴】想要去做或运行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kātuye: {'def': 'is Vedic inf. of karoti Th.2, 418 (in ThA.268 taken as kātuṁ ayye!). (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'karoti の inf.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kātuṁ: {'def': 'and Kātu° (in compⁿ with kāma) inf. of karoti.

--kāma desirous of doing or making, etc. Mhvs 37³⁴ (a°). PvA.115; --kāmatā the desire to do, etc. J.IV,253; V,364. See also kattu° in same comb^ns. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāveyya: {'def': '【中】诗。A.4.230./II,230.︰Kāveyyanti “cattārome, bhikkhave, kavī. Katame cattāro? Cintākavi, sutakavi, atthakavi, paṭibhānakavī”ti (诸比丘！此等是四类之诗人。哪四种？思诗人、闻诗人、义诗人、辩诗人。诸比丘！此等是四类之诗人。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [grd. fr. kāvyate fr. kavi poet cp. Sk. kāvya] 1. poetry, the making of poems, poetry as business. one of the forbidden occupations D.I,11 (=DA.I,95 kabba-karaṇa) -- 2. poetry, song, poem (of suttanta) A.I,72=III,107.

--matta intoxicated with poetry, musing, dreaming S.I,110, 196. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】诗。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāya: {'def': '【阳】堆，聚集，身体。~kamma,【中】身业，身体的行动。~kammaññatā,【阴】身适业性。 ~gata,【形】与身体有关。 ~gantha,【阳】身体的束缚。 ~gutta,【形】保卫自己的身体，平稳的身体行动。~ḍāha,【阳】发烧，（医）炎症。 ~daratha,【阳】身体的苦恼。 ~duccarita,【中】恶身行，坏行为。 ~dvāra, 【中】（三门中之）身门。 ~dhātu, 【阴】（十八界中之）身界。 ~ppakopa,【阳】不当举止。 ~ppacālakaŋ,【副】摇摆身体地。 ~paṭibaddha,【形】以身体连接的。 ~payoga,【阳】借助于身体，靠身体。 ~parihārika,【形】看护着身体。 ~ppasāda,【阳】触觉感。 ~passaddhi,【阴】身轻安，感觉的安详。 ~pāgabbhiya,【中】无礼。 ~bandhana,【中】腰带。 ~bala,【中】体力。 ~mudutā,【阴】身柔软性。~lahutā,【阴】身轻快性。~vaṅka,【阳】不老实的行动。~vikāra,【阳】姿态。 ~viññatti,【阴】以身暗示，使用示意动作。 ~viññāna,【中】身识，经由触觉的意识。~viññeyya,【形】以触觉去识知。~viveka,【阳】身离，身体的隔离。~veyyāvacca,【中】仆人的责任。~saŋsagga,【阳】身体的接触。 ~sakkhī, 【形】（经过身体）他体悟最终的真理。~saṅkhāra,【阳】身行，身体的根本。 ~samācāra,【阳】正身行，正确的行为。 ~samphassa,【阳】身触，触觉感。 ~sucarita,【中】善身行，好行为。 ~soceyya,【中】身净，身体的纯净。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. kāya；der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection),【阳】1.堆，聚集，身体(group, heap, collection, aggregate, body)。2.心所(《分别论》#587.︰Tattha katamo kāyo? Saññākkhandho, saṅkhārakkhandho, viññāṇakkhandho--ayaṁ vuccati “kāyo”.(此中，什么是‘身’呢？想蕴、行蕴、识蕴，称为‘身’。)kāyakamma,【中】身业，身体的行动。kāyakammaññatā,【阴】身适业性。kāyagata,【形】与身体有关。kāyagantha,【阳】身体的束缚。kāyagutta,【形】保卫自己的身体，平稳的身体行动。kāyaḍāha,【阳】发烧，(医)炎症。kāyadaratha,【阳】身体的苦恼。kāyaduccarita,【中】恶身行，坏行为。kāyadvāra,【中】(三门中之)身门。kāyadhātu,【阴】(十八界中之)身界。kāyappakopa,【阳】不当举止。kāyappacālakaṁ,【副】摇摆身体地。kāyapaṭibaddha,【形】以身体连接的。kāyapayoga,【阳】借助於身体，靠身体。kāyaparihārika,【形】看护著身体。kāyappasāda,【阳】触觉感。kāyapassaddhi,【阴】身轻安，感觉的安详。kāyapāgabbhiya,【中】无礼。kāyabandhana,【中】腰带。kāyabala,【中】体力。kāyamudutā,【阴】身柔软性。kāyalahutā,【阴】身轻快性。kāyavaṅka,【阳】不老实的行动。kāyavikāra,【阳】姿态。kāyaviññatti,【阴】以身暗示，使用示意动作。kāyaviññāna,【中】身识，经由触觉的意识。kāyaviññeyya,【形】以触觉去识知。kāyaviveka,【阳】身离，身体的隔离。kāyaveyyāvacca,【中】仆人的责任。kāyasaṁsagga,【阳】身体的接触。kāyasakkhī,【形】(经过身体)他体悟最终的真理。kāyasaṅkhāra,【阳】身行。kāyasamācāra,【阳】正身行，正确的行为。kāyasamudaya(=kāyassa samudaya),【阳】身集。kāyasamphassa,【阳】身触，触觉感。kāyasucarita,【中】善身行，好行为。kāyasoceyya,【中】身净，身体的纯净。kāyasukha﹐身乐。(Kāyasukhanti pañcadvārikasukhaṁ.身乐：五门之乐。MA.149.)) Cetosukha﹐心乐。 (Cetosukhanti manodvārikasukhaṁ.心乐：意门之乐。MA.149.) Vism.427.：Kāyassa bhedāti upādiṇṇakkhandhapariccāgā.(身坏：是舍去有执受(有情)的五蕴。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[der. probably fr. ci, cinoti to heap up, cp. nikāya heaping up, accumulation or collection; Sk. kāya] group, heap, collection, aggregate, body. -- Definitions and synonyms. -- SnA 31 gives the foll. synonyms and similes of kāya: kuṭī, guhā (Sn.772), deha, sandeha (Dh.148=Th.1, 20), nāvā (Dh.369), ratha (S.IV,292), dhaja, vammīka (M.I,144), kuṭikā (Th.1, 1); and at KhA 38 the foll. def.: kāye ti sarīre, sarīraṁ hi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṁ vā kesādīnaṁ āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati. . . . It is equivalent to deha: S.I,27; PvA.10; to sarīra KhA 38; PvA.63, to nikāya (deva°) D.III,264; and cp. formula of jāti: sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti . . . Nd² 257.

Literal meaning.--1. mahājana-kāya a collection of people, a crowd S.IV,191; V,170; VvA.78; --bala° a great crowd Sn.p. 105; DhA.I,193, 398. -- 2. group or division: satta kāyā akaṭā, etc. (seven eternal groups or principles) D.I,56=M.I,517=S.III,211 (in Pakudha Kaccāyana’s theory); with reference to groups of sensations or sense-organs, as vedanā-kāya, saññā°, viññāṇa°, phassa°, etc. S.III,60, 61; D.III,243, 244; taṇhā° D.III,244; appl. to hatthi°, ratha°, patti°, groups of elephants, carriages or soldiers S.I,72. -- A good idea of the extensive meaning of kāya may be gathered from the classification of the 7 kāyas at J.II,91, viz. camma°, dāru°, loha°, ayo°, vāluka°, udaka°, phalaka°, or “bodies” (great masses, substances) of skin, wood, copper, iron, sand, water, and planks. -- Var. other comb^ns: Asura° A.I,143; D.III,7; Ābhassara° (“world of radiance”) D.I,17=III,29, 84; Deva° S.I,27, 30; D.III,264 (°nikāya); dibbā kāyā A.I,143; Tāvatiṁsa° D.III,15.

Applied meaning.--I. Kāya under the physical aspect is an aggregate of a multiplicity of elements which finally can be reduced to the four “great” elements, viz. earth, water, fire, and air (D.I,55). This “heap,” in the valuation of the Wise (muni), shares with all other objects the qualities of such elements, and is therefore regarded as contemptible, as something which one has to get rid of, as a source of impurity. It is subject to time and change, it is built up and kept alive by cravings, and with death it is disintegrated into the elements. But the kamma which determined the appearance of this physical body has naturally been renewed and assumes a new form. II. Kāya under the psychological aspect is the seat of sensation (Dhs.§§ 613‹-› 16), and represents the fundamental organ of touch which underlies all other sensation. Developed only in later thought DhsA. 311 cf. Mrs. Rhys Davids, Bud. Psy. Ethics lvi. ff.; Bud. Psy. 143, 185 f.

I. (Physical).--(a) Understanding of the body is attained through introspection (sati). In the group of the four sati-paṭṭhānas, the foundations of introspection, the recognition of the true character of “body” comes first (see Vbh.193). The standing formula of this recognition is kāye kāyânupassī . . . contemplating body as an accumulation, on which follows the description of this aggregate: “he sees that the body is clothed in skin, full of all kinds of dirty matter, and that in this body there are hair, nails, teeth,” etc. (the enumeration of the 32 ākāras, as given Kh III,). The conclusions drawn from this meditation give a man the right attitude. The formula occurs frequently, both in full and abridged, e. g. D.II,293, 294; III,104, 141; A.III,323=V.109; S.IV,111=V.278; Vbh.193, 194; Nett 83, 123; with slight variation: kāye asubhânupassī . . . A.III,142 sq.; V,109 (under asubhasaññā); It.81; cp. kāye aniccânupassī S.IV,211; and kāyagatā sati. -- This accumulation is described in another formula with: ayaṁ . . . kāyo rūpī cātum(m)ahābhūtiko mātā-pettika-sambhavo odana-kummās’upacayo, etc. “this body has form (i. e. is material, visible), is born from mother and father, is a heap of gruel and sour milk, is subject to constant dressing and tending, to breaking up and decay,” etc., with inferences D.I,55=S.III,207; S.II,94; IV,194; V,282, 370; D.I,76, 209; M.I,144, 500; II,17; A.IV,386=S.IV,83.

(b) Various qualities and functions of the material body. As trunk of the body (opposed to pakkhā and sīsa) S.II,231; also at Pv.I,8³; as depending on nourishment (āhāra-ṭṭhitika, etc.) Sv.64; A.II,145 (with taṇhā, māna, methuna); as needing attention: see °parihārika. As saviññāṇaka, having consciousness A.IV,53= S.II,252=S.III,80, 103, 136, 169; cp. āyu usmā ca viññānaṁ yadā kāyaṁ jahant’imaṁ S.III,143. As in need of breathing assāsa-passāsa S.V,330, 336; as tired, fatigued (kilanta-kāya) kilanta-kāyā kilanta-cittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavanti “tired in body, tired in mind these gods fall out of this assembly” (D.I,20; III,32≈); in other connection PvA.43; see also kilanta. kāyo kilanto D.III,255 sq.;=A.IV,332; S.V,317; M.I,116; jiṇṇassa me . . . kāyo na paleti Sn.1144; ātura-kāyo S.III,1 (cittaṁ anāturaṁ); paripuṇṇa-k° suruci sujāto, etc., with a perfect body (of the Buddha) Sn.548= Th.1, 818; cp. mahā-k° (of Brahmins) Sn.298. The body of a Buddha is said to be endowed with the 32 signs of a great man: Bhagavato kāye dvattiṁsa mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni . . . Sn.p. 107, cp. 549. The Tathāgata is said to be dhamma-kāyo “author and speaker of Doctrine,” in the same sense Brahma-kāyo “the best body” (i. e. of Doctrine) D.III,84 (Dial. iii, 81).

(c) Valuation of physical body. From the contemplating of its true character (kāyânupassī) follows its estimation as a transient, decaying, and repulsive object. -- kāye anicc’ânupassī S.IV,211 (and vay’ânupassī, nirodh’ânupassī), so also asubhânupassī It.81; kāyañ ca bhindantaṁ ñatvā It.69; evaṁdhammo (i. e. a heap of changing elements) A.III,324; aciraṁ vat’ayaṁ kāyo paṭhaviṁ adhisessati chuddho apetaviññāṇo niratthaṁ va kaliṅgaraṁ Dh.41. pittaṁ semhañ ca vamati kāyamhā Sn.198. As bahu-dukkho bahuādīnavo A.V,109; as anicca dukkha, etc. M.I,500; II,17; kāyena aṭṭiyamānā harayamānā S.IV,62; V,320; dissati imassa kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi ādānam pi nikkhepanam pi S.II,94. -- This body is eaten by crows and vultures after its death: S.V,370. Represented as pūti° foul S.I,131; III,120. -- Bdhgh. at Vism.240 defines kāya as “catu-mahābhūtika pūti-kāya” (cp. similar passages on p. 367: patthaddho bhavati kāyo, pūtiko bhavati kāyo).

(d) Similes.--Out of the great number of epithets (adhivacanāni) and comparisons only a few can be mentioned (cp. above under def. & syn.): The body is compared to an abscess (gaṇḍa) S.IV,83=A.IV,386; a city (nagara) S.IV,194; a cart (ratha) S.IV,292; an anthill (vammīka) M.I,144; all in reference to its consisting of the four fundamental elements, cp. also: pheṇ’ûpamaṁ kāyaṁ imaṁ viditvā “knowing that the body is like froth” Dh.46; kumbh’ûpamaṁ kāyaṁ imaṁ viditvā nagar’ûpamaṁ cittaṁ idaṁ ṭhapetvā Dh.40: the body is as fragile as a water-pot.

(e) Dissolution of the body is expressed in the standard phrase: kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā . . ., i. e. after death . . . upon which usually follows the mention of one of the gatis, the destinies which the new kāya has to experience, e. g. D.I,82, 107, 143, 162, 245, 247, 252; III,96, 97, 146, 181, 235; M.I,22; S.I,94; III,241; Dh.140; It.12, 14; J.I,152; PvA.27, etc., etc. Cp. also IV.

II. (Psychological).--As the seat of feeling, kāya is the fifth in the enumeration of the senses (āyatanāni). It is ajjhattika as sense (i. e. subjective) and its object is the tangible (phoṭṭhabba). The contact between subject and object consists either in touching (phusitvā) or in sensing (viññeyya). The formulas vary, but are in essence the same all through, e. g. kāya-viññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā D.I,245; kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusitvā D.III,226, 250, 269; M.I,33; II,42; S.IV,104, 112; kāyena phusitvā A.V,11; kāyo c’eva phoṭṭhabbā ca D.III,102. Best to be grouped here is an application of kāya in the sense of the self as experiencing a great joy; the whole being, the “inner sense,” or heart. This realization of intense happiness (such as it is while it lasts), pīti-sukha, is the result of the four stages of meditation, and as such it is always mentioned after the jhānas in the formula: so imaṁ eva kāyaṁ vivekajena pīti-sukhena abhisandeti . . . “His very body does he so pervade with the joy and ease born of detachment from worldliness” D.I,73 sq.=M.I,277; A.II,41, etc. -- A similar context is that in which kāya is represented as passaddha, calmed down, i. e. in a state which is free from worldly attachment (vivekaja). This “peace” of the body (may be translated as “my senses, my spirits” in this connection) flows out of the peace of the mind and this is born out of the joy accompanying complete satisfaction (pamuditā) in attaining the desired end. The formula is pamuditassa pīti jāyati pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṁ vedeti, sukhino cittaṁ samādhiyati D.III,241, 288; S.IV,351; M.I,37; A.III,21, 285; IV,176; V,3, 333; Vbh.227. ‹-› Similarly: pamuditāya pīti jāyati, pītimanāya kāyo p°, passadhakāyā sukhaṁ ved° Vin.I,294 (c̣p. Vin. Texts II.224: “all my frame will be at peace,” or “individuality”; see note) passaddhakāya-saṅkhāra mentioned at A.V,29 sq. is one of the ten ariya-vāsā, the noblest conditions. A quasi-analogy between kāya and kāma is apparent from a number of other passages: kāya-chando --°sneho --°anvayatā pahīyati M.I,500; ajjhattañ ca bahiddha ca kāye chandaṁ virājaye Sn.203; kāye avigata-rāgo hoti (kāme, rūpe) D.III,238=A.III,249; madhurakajāto viya kāyo S.III,106; A.III,69.

III, (Ethical).--Kāya is one of the three channels by which a man’s personality is connected with his environment & by which his character is judged, viz. action, the three being kāya, vacī (vāca) and manas. These three kammantas, activities or agents, form the three subdivisions of the sīla, the rules of conduct. Kāya is the first and most conspicuous agent, or the principle of action kat) e)coxήn, character in its pregnant sense.

Kāya as one of a triad.--Its usual combination is in the formula mentioned, and as such found in the whole of the Pāli Canon. But there is also another combination, found only in the older texts, viz. kayenā vācāya uda cetasā: yañ ca karoti kāyena vācāya uda cetasā taṁ hi tassa sakaṁ hoti tañ ca ādāya gacchati S.I,93 yo dhammacārī kāyena vācāya uda cetasā idh eva nam pasaṁsanti pacca sagge pamodati S.I,102. -- So also at A.I,63; Sn.232. Besides in formula arakkhitena kāyena a° vācāya a° cittena S.II,231=271; IV,112. ‹-› With su- and duccarita the combⁿ is extremely frequent, e. g. S.I,71, 72; M.I,22, etc., etc. In other comb. we have kāya- (v°., m.°) kamma, moneyya, soceyya, etc. -- k°. v°. m°. hiṁsati S.I,165; saṁsappati A.V,289 sq.; kāye (v°. m°.) sati kāya-sañcetanā-hetu uppajjati S.II,39 sq.; The variations of k- in the ethics of the Dhamma under this view of k°. v°. m°. are manifold, all based on the fundamental distinctions between good and bad, all being the raison d’être of kamma: yaṁ . . . etarahi kammaṁ karoti kāyena v. m. idaṁ vuccati navakammaṁ S.IV,132. -- Passages with reference to good works are e. g. D.III,245; A.I,151; V,302 sq.; (see also Kamma II.2 b. c.). -- With reference to evil: S.III,241, 247; A.I,201; kin nu kāyena vācāya manasā dukkaṭaṁ kataṁ Pv.II,1³ and passim. Assutavā puthujjano tīhi ṭhānehi micchā paṭipajjati kāyena v. m. S.II,151; pāpaṁ na kayirā vacasā manasā kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloke S.I,12=31; yassa kāyena vācāya manasā n’atthi dukkaṭaṁ saṁvutaṁ tīhi ṭhānehi, tam ahaṁ brūmi brāhmaṇaṁ Dh.391=Nett 183. Kāyena saṁvaro sādhu sādhu vācāya saṁvaro manasā saṁvaro sādhu sādhu sabbattha saṁvaro Dh.361=S.I,73= Miln.399; ye ca kāyena v. m. ca susaṁvutā na te Māravasânugā, na te Mārassa paccagū S.I,104; vācānurakkhī manasā susaṁvuto kāyena ca akusalaṁ na kayirā Dh.281=Nett 183.

Kāya as one of a dyad: vācā and kāya: S.I,172 (°gutta) M.I,461 (rakkhita and a°); Pv.I,2² (°saññatā and opp.); Vism.28 (k°-vacī-kamma); PvA.98.

Kāya alone as a collective expression for the three: A.I,54; Dh.259, 391; Sn.206, 407; kāye avītarāgo M.I,101; A.III,249; IV,461 sq.; °-samācāra S.V,354; kāyaṁ paṇidhāya Ps.I,175; Vbh.244=252; bhāvita° and a° M.I,239; A.I,250; III,106 sq., cp.: kāya-ppakopaṁ rakkheyya, kāyena saṁvuto siyā kāyaduccaritaṁ hitvā, kāyena sucaritaṁ care Dh.231. Ahiṁsakā ye munayo niccaṁ kāyena saṁvutā Dh.225.

Kāya in combⁿ with citta: ṭhito va kāyo hoti ṭhitaṁ cittaṁ . . . S.V,74; anikaṭṭha-kāyo nikaṭṭha-citto A.II,137; sāraddha-kāyo saṅkiliṭṭha-citto A.V,93=95= 97; bhāvita-kāyo, °sīlo, °citto, °pañño S.IV,111; A.IV,111; V,42 sq. Apakassa kāyaṁ apakassa cittaṁ S.II,198. Kāya-citta-passaddhi, etc. Dhs.§§ 29--51. In these six couples (or yugalas) later Abhidhamma distinguished kāya as=the cetasikas (mental properties, or the vedanā, saññā and saṅkhārā khandhas), body being excluded. Cpd. 96. See also combⁿ kilantakāya, kilanta-citta under kilamati.

IV. (Various).--Kāyena (i. e. “visibly”) aññamaññaṁ passituṁ A.II,61; as nānatta° and ekatta° at A.IV,39 =Nd² 570. The relation between rūpa-kāya (=cātumahābhūtika), and nāma-kāya, the mental compound (=vedanā saññā, etc.) is discussed at Nett 77, 78, and Ps.I,183 sq., see also S.II,24. K. is anattā, i. e. k. has no soul A.V,109; S.IV,166. n’âyaṁ kāyo tumhākaṁ n’āpi paresaṁ, purāṇaṁ idaṁ kammaṁ . . . “neither is this body yours, nor anyone else’s: it is (the appearance of) former karma” S.II,64, 65=Nd² 680. Dissamānena kāyena and upaḍḍha-dissamānena S.I,156. ‹-› Manomaya-kāya a body made by the mind (cp. VvA.10 and DA.I,110, 120, 222) according to Bdhgh only at the time of jhāna S.V,282 sq.; manomaya pīti-bhakkha sayaṁpabha D.I,17=VvA.10; manomayaṁ kāyaṁ abhinimmināya . . . D.I,77; m° sabbaṅga-paccaṅgī D.I,34, 77, 186, 195. -- Under the control of psychic powers (iddhi): kāyena va saṁvatteti he does as he likes with his body, i. e. he walks on water, is ubiquitous, etc. (yāva brahmalokā pi: even up to heaven) S.V,265= D.I,78=A.I,170: see also S.V,283, 284. -- In the various stages of Saṁsāra; kāyaṁ nikkhipati he lays down his (old) body S.IV,60, 400; cp. S.III,241 (ossaṭṭha-kāya); referring to continuous change of body during day and night (of a Petī) Pv.II,12¹¹.

--aṅga a limb of the body, kāy’aṅgaṁ vāc’aṅgaṁ vā na kopenti: they remain motionless and speechless (ref. to the bhikkhus begging) J.III,354; DhsA.93, 240; --ânupassin in combⁿ kāye kāyânupassī “realizing in the body an aggregate” D.II,94, 100, 291 sq.; D.III,58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M.I,56; A.I,39, 296; II,256; III,449; IV,300, 457 sq.; S.IV,211; V,9, 75, 298, 329 sq.; Vbh.193 sq.; 236; see also above. Der.: °anupassanā Ps. I.178, 184; II,152, 163, 232; °passita Nett. 123; --āyatana the sense of touch D.III,243, 280, 290; Dhs.585, 613, 653, 783;--indriya same D.III,239; Dhs.585, 613, 972; --ujjukatā straightness of body (+citta°, of thought) Dhs.53, 277, 330; Vism.466; Bdhd 16, 20. --ûpaga going to a (new) body S.II,24; --kamma “bodily action,” deed performed by the body in contradistinction to deeds by speech or thought (see above) D.I,250; III,191, 245, 279; M.I,415; III,206; A.I,104; III,6, 9, 141 sq.; V,289; Th.2, 277; Ps.II,195; Dhs.981, 1006; Vbh.208, 321, 366; Pug.41; Bdhd 69; DhsA.68, 77, 344. --kammaññatā wieldiness, alertness of the bodily senses included under nāmakāya Dhs.46, 277, 326. --kammanta=°kamma, in comb. °sampatti and °sandosa A.V,292, 294, 297; M.I,17. --kali “the misfortune of having a body”=this miserable body Th.2, 458, 501; ThA.282, 291; --kasāva bodily impurity or depravity A.I,112; --gata “relating to the body,” always combined with sati in the same sense as °anupassin (see above) S.I,188; M. III,92; A.I,44; Sn.340 (cp. SnA 343); Th.1, 468, 1225; J.I,394; Dh.293= Nett 39; Dh.299; Miln.248, 336, 393; Vism.111, 197, 240 sq. --gantha bodily tie or fetter (binding one to saṁsāra), of which there are four: abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṁ-saccâbhinivesa D.III,230= S.V,59=Dhs.1135=Vbh.374; cp. Mrs. Rh. D., Dhs. trsl. p. 304; --gandha spelling for °gantha at Nett 115‹-› 119; --gutta one who guards his body, i. e. controls his action (+vacīgutta) S.I,172=Sn.74; --gutti the care or protection of the body Vin.I,295; J.II,162; --citta body and mind: °ābādha physical and mental disease J.IV,166; see other comb^ns above; --ḍāha fever Vin.I,214; --tapana chastisement of body, curbing one’s material desires, asceticism PvA.98. --thāma physical strength J.III,114; --daratha bodily distress J.V,397; VI,295; --daḷha bodily vigour Vin.II,76, 313; --dukkha bodily pain (+ceto°) M.III,288; --duccarita misconduct by the body, evil deeds done through the instrumentality of the body (cp. °kamma) D.III,52, 96, 111, 214; A.I,48; Dh.231; It.54, 58; Dhs.300, 1305; Bdhd 16, 20; --duṭṭhulla unchastity Th.1, 114; --dvāra the channel or outlet of bodily senses J.I,276; IV,14; VvA.73; DhA.IV,85; Bdhd 69; --dhātu the “element” of body, i. e. the faculty of touch, sensibility Dhs.613; Kvu 12; --pakopa blameworthy conduct, misbehaviour (+vacī°, mano°) Dh.231=DhA 330; --pacālaka (nt.) shaking or swaying the body, “swaggering” Vin.II,213; --paṭibaddha 1. adj. (of the breath), dependent on, or connected with the body S.IV,293; attached or bound to the body J.III,377; V,254; 2. m. an article of dress worn on the body Vin.III,123, IV.214; --payoga the instrumentality or use of the body DA.I,72=DhsA.98; --pariyantika limited by the body, said of vedanā, sensation S.V,320=A.II,198; --parihārika tending or protecting the body D.I,71=A.II,209=Pug.58; Vism.65 (cīvara); DA.I,207; --pasāda clearness of the sense of touch or sense in general DhsA.306; Bdhd 62, 66, 74; cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 173ⁿ, 198ⁿ; --passaddhi serenity or quietude of the senses S.IV,125 (cp. IV.351 and above); V,66, 104; Dhs.40, 277, 320; DhsA.130; Bdhd 16, 19, 29; --pāgabbhiya “body-forwardness” immodesty, lasciviousness, gener. said of women J.II,32; V,449; --pāgabbhiniya same J.I,288; --pāguññatā good condition of the mental faculties, fitness of sense, opp. kāyagelañña, apathy Dhs.46, 277, 326; Vism.466; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; --phandita (nt.) bodily activity J.III,25; --baddha fastened to the body, appl. to robes DA.I,207; --bandhana a girdle or waistband Vin.I,46, 51; II,118, 135, 177, 213, 266; M.I,237; --bala physical strength PvA.30; --bhāvanā meditation or training with regard to action D.III,219; M.I,237; cp. Miln.85; --macchera “body-selfishness,” pampering the body Th.1, 1033; --mudutā pliability of sense=°kammaññatā Dhs.44, 277, 324; Bdhd 16, 20, 157; --muni a sage with regard to action It.56; --moneyya the true wisdom regarding the use of the body as an instrument of action It.56; 67; D.III,220; A.I,273; Nd² 514; --ratha the “carriagelike” body J.VI,253; --lahutā buoyancy of sense= °muduta, same loci; --vaṅka crookedness of action A.I,112; --vikāra change of position of the body J.III,354; --vijambhana alertness DhA.IV,113; --viññatti intimation by body, i. e. merely by one’s appearance, appl. chiefly to the begging bhikkhu Dhs.585, 636, 654, 844; DhsA.82, 301; Miln.229, 230; Vism.448; Bdhd 69, 70; --viññāṇa consciousness by means of touch, sensory consciousness D.III,243; Dhs.556, 585, 651, 685, 790; Miln.59; Vbh.180; °dhātu element of touch-consciousness Dhs.560; Vbh.88; Kvu 12; --viññeyya to be perceived by the sense of touch (+phoṭṭhabba, see above) D.I,245; II,281; III,234; M.I,85, 144; Dhs.589, 967, 1095; Vbh.14; Kvu 210; Miln.270; --vipphandana throbbing of the body, bodily suffusion, appl^d to °vinnatti Bdhd 69, 70; DhsA.323; --viveka seclusion of the body, hermitism J.I,289; DhsA.165; --vūpakāsa= °viveka D.III,285 (+citta° “singleness” of heart); --veyyāvacca menial duties J.I,12; °kara a servant J.II,334; --veyyāvaṭika same J.VI,418; Sn.p. 104; DhA.I,27; °kamma id. J.V,317 (=veyyāvacca) DhsA.160; --saṁsagga bodily contact, sexual intercourse Vin.III,121, 190; J.VI,566; --sakkhin he who has realized and gained the final truth concerning the body (cp. °anupassin) D.III,105, 254; M.I,478=Pug.14, 29; M.II,113; III,45; A.I,74; 118; IV,10, 451; V,23; Ps.II,52, 62; Nett 190; Kvu 58; Vism.93, 387. --saṅkhāra the material aggregate, substratum of body Vin.III,71; S.II,40; III,125; IV,293; A.I,122; II,158, 231; Ps.I,184, 186; Vism.530. --saṅgaha control of body (+citta°) Nett 91; --sañcetanā (-hetu) ground (for the rise of), material, i. e. impure thoughts A.II,157; Vism.530 (+vacī°, mano°). --samācāra (good) conduct as regards one’s actions D.II,279 (+vacī°) M.I,272 sq.; II,113; III,45; S.V,354; A.III,186 sq. --sampīlana crushing the body (of dukkha) Nett 29; --samphassa the sense of touch (see āyatana) D.III,243; S.V,351; Dhs.585, 616, 651, 684; °ja arisen through touch or sensibility D.III,244; Dhs.445, 558; --sucarita good conduct in action, as one of the three °kammāni (vacī°, mano°) D.III,52, 96, 111, 169, 215; It.55, 59, 99, Dhs.1306; --suci purity of body, i. e. of action (+vacī°, ceto°) A.I,273; It.55; --soceyya purification of body (+vacī°, mano°) D.III,219; A.I,271; V 264, 266; It.55. (Page 207)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāya-kammaññatā: {'def': 's. lahutā .', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Kāya-mudutā: {'def': 's. lahutā .', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Kāya-pāguññatā: {'def': 's. lahutā .', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Kāya-ujukatā: {'def': 's. lahutā .', 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Kāyabhāvanānuyogamanuyutta: {'def': '(kāya身+bhāvanā修习+anuyoga练习【阳】+m+anuyutta已随从【过分】)﹐【过分】具足於身修习之行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyagatā-sati: {'def': '身念', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Kāyakammaññatā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心所适业性(堪能)，去除心所(cetasika)的不适业性(akammaññabhāva)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyalahutā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心轻快性，去除心所(cetasika)的沉重(garubhāva)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyamudutā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心所柔软性，去除心所(cetasika)的僵硬性(thambha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyapaguññatā: {'def': '﹐【阴】心所练达性，使心所(cetasika)健全。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyapassaddhi: {'def': '﹐【阴】心所轻安，平静心所(cetasika)的不安(daratha)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyasaṅkhāra: {'def': '【阳】身行。MA.43./II,351.︰Kāyasaṅkhārāti assāsapassāsa(身行︰入息与出息。)。DA.18./II,644.︰Kāyasaṅkhārā hi catutthajjhānena pahīyanti, vacīsaṅkhārā dutiyajjhānena, cittasaṅkhārā nirodhasamāpattiyā.(身行确定在第四禅时断；语行在第二禅时断；心行在灭尽定时断。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyika: {'def': '(kāya+ika),【形】(关联到)身体的，由身体引起的。kāyikadukkha,【中】身苦，身体的痛苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kāya] 1. belonging to the body, i. e. felt by the body (experienced by the senses), or resulting from the body, i. e. done by the body (=acted as opposed to spoken or thought). sukhaṁ physical happiness (opp. cetasika°) S.V,209; A.I,81; dukkhaṁ D.II,306; M.I,302 (opp. cetasikaṁ); kāyikaṁ (sc. dhammaṁ) sikkhati to teach the conduct of body (opp. vācasikaṁ) Vin.II,248. In comb. with vācasika also at S.I,190; Pug.21; Vism.18 (of anācara); PvA.119 (of saṁyama, control) Shhp 55; Bdhd 26, 134; referring to diff. kinds of amusements Nd² 219=SnA 86. 2. --° (of devas) belonging to the company of-: ° D.I,220; gandhabba° PvA.119. (Page 209)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】关联到身体的，由身体引起的。 ~dukkha,【中】身苦，身体的痛苦。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāyujjukatā: {'def': '【阴】身正直，身体的笔直。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】身正直性，身体的笔直。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāyūpaga: {'def': '【形】执著身体的，去转生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】执着身体的，去转生。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāyūra: {'def': '【中】穿在上臂的手镯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Kāyura [see also keyūra, which is the only form in Sk.] 1. an ornamental bracket or ring worn on the upper arm (bāh’âlaṅkāra Pv; bhuj° Vv) or neck (gīvāya pilandhana J.III,437); a bracelet or necklace Vin.II,106; J.III,437; IV,92; Pv III,9³; Vv 36². -- 2. adj. as sakāyura raṭṭha having the insignia “regis” J.V,289=486. (Page 209)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】穿在上臂的手镯。(p100)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kāyūrin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] wearing bracelets Pv III,9¹. (Page 209)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kā°: {'def': 'in composition, is assimilated (and contracted) form of kad° as kāpuppha, kāpurisa. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāḷa: {'def': '【形】黑，暗。【阳】黑色。kāḷakūṭa,【阳】喜马拉雅山的一座山名。kāḷakesa,【形】黑头发的(即：年轻的)。kāḷatipu,【中】石墨。kāḷapakkha,【阳】黑半月份(阴历十六至廿九或卅日)。kāḷaloṇa,【中】黑盐。kāḷasīha,【阳】一种狮子。kāḷasutta,【中】墨线(木匠的墨斗中拉出的墨线)；黑绳地狱，八大地狱之一。kāḷahaṁsa, 黑天鹅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see kāla 1. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】黑，暗。【阳】黑色。~kūṭa,【阳】喜马拉雅山的一座山的名字。~kesa,【形】黑头发的（即：年轻的）。~tipu,【中】石墨。~pakkha,【阳】黑半月份（十六至廿九或卅日）。~loṇa,【中】黑盐。~sīha,【阳】一种狮子。~sutta,【中】墨线（木匠的墨斗中拉出的墨线）。~haŋsa, 黑天鹅。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '黑，黑分.= kāla ①.-añjana黑塗薬.-anusārika,-anusāriya［香料］黑栴檀香.-kaṇṇika-cola黑耳（不吉）布.-pakkha-candimā黑分の月.-miga黑鹿.-loṇa黑塩.-vaṇṇa黑色.-vallī黑葛.-vāta黑風.-sāma黑褐色.-sutta黑縄［地獄］', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Kāḷaka: {'def': '【形】黑色。【中】黑点，污点，谷粒中的黑米。kāḷakadhammaṁ (=kaṇhadhammaṁ)﹐黑法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】黑色。【中】黑点，污点，谷粒中的黑米。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kāḷa] black, stained; in enumeration of colours at Dhs.617 (of rūpa) with nīla, pītaka, lohitaka, odāta, k°, mañjeṭṭha; of a robe A.II,241; f. kāḷikā VvA.103; -- (nt.) a black spot, a stain, also a black grain in the rice, in apagata° without a speck or stain (of a clean robe) D.I,110=A.IV,186=210=213; vicita° (of rice) “with the black grains removed” D.I,105; A.IV,231; Miln.16; vigata° (same) A.III,49. -- A black spot (of hair) J.V,197 (=kaṇha-r-iva). -- Fig. of character DhA.IV,172. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāḷasutta: {'def': '黑索地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Kāḷudāyin: {'def': '（比库名）咖噜达夷，（古音译：）迦留陀夷', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Kāḷārika: {'def': 'see kaḷārika. (Page 212)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāḷāvaka: {'def': '【阳】一种象。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】一种象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāḷāyasa: {'def': '【中】（黑）铁。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(黑)铁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāḷīya: {'def': '参考 kālīya。(p101)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '一种(有光泽的)沉香木(gallochum)。参考 kālīya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāṇa: {'def': '【形】瞎（一只眼睛）。【阳】单眼的人。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. kāṇa),【形】瞎(一只眼睛)。【阳】单眼的人(blind, usually of one eye, occasionally of both)。kāṇakacchapa,盲龟(the blind turtle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. kāṇa] blind, usually of one eye, occasionally of both (see PugA 227) S.I,94; Vin.II,90= A.I,107=II.85=Pug.51 (in explⁿ of tamaparāyaṇa purisa); Th.2, 438; J.I,222 (one-eyed); VI,74 (of both eyes); DhA.III,71.

--kaccha Np. Sdhp.44; --kacchapa “the blind turtle” in the well-known parable of a man’s chances of human rebirth after a state of punishment Th.2, 500 (=ThA.290); Miln.204; DhsA.60; cp. M.III,169=S.V,455. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kāṭa: {'def': '【阳】男性的器官。(p99)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】男人性器官。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kāṭa-koṭacikā: {'def': '[kāṭa + koṭacikā] a low term of abuse, “pudendum virile & muliebre” Vin.IV,7 (buddhagh IV.354: kātan ti purisa-nimittaṁ); cp. Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 89. (Page 203)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kīdisa: {'def': '【形】什么类型？似什么的？', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(interr. adj.) [cp. Sk. kīdṛś=kiṁ dṛśa] what like? of what kind? which? (cp. tādisa) Sn.836, 1089 (=kiṁ saṇṭhita Nd²; Pv.II,6³; PvA.50, 51; VvA.76). -- As Np. S.IV,193. -- See also Kīrisa. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】什么类型？似什么的？(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kīla: {'def': '【阳】（木头或金属的）柱，桩。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】(木头或金属的)柱，桩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=a pin, a stake, see Khīla. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kīra: {'def': '【阳】鹦鹉。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】鹦鹉(parrot)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. kīra] a parrot Abhp 640 (cp. cirīṭi). (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kīrisa: {'def': '=kīdisa Th.2, 385 (cp. ThA.256). (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kīta: {'def': '(kiṇāti 的【过分】), 已买。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of kiṇāti] bought J.I,224 (°dāsa a bought slave) II.185. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kiṇāti 的【过分】), 已买。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kīva: {'def': '【无】多少?多久? kīvataka,【形】多少?', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】多少？多久？ ~taka,【形】多少？(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kīvant: {'def': '& Kīva (interr. adj. and adv.) [Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki] how great? how much? how many? and in later language how? (cp. rel. yāva). As indef.: Kīvanto tattha bheravā “however great the terrors” Sn.959. -- Kīva kaṭuka how painful? PvA.226; k°-ciraṁ how long? Pj and Sn.1004; k°-dīghaṁ same Sn.p. 126; k° dūre how far? Miln.16; DhA.I,386; k°-mahantaṁ how big? DhA.I,29; VvA.325; k° bahuṁ how much? DhA.IV,193. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& Kīva (interr. adj. and adv.) (Sk. kiyant and kīvant; formed fr. interr. stem ki),多大，多少(how great? how much? how many? and in later language how?)Kīvanto tattha bheravā, 多恐怖(“however great the terrors” Sn 959)。Kīva kaṭuka, 多痛苦(how painful? PvA 226)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kīvatika: {'def': '(interr. adj.) [fr. last] of number: how much? how many? Kīvatikā bhikkhū how many Bhikkhus? Vin.I,117. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kīḷanaka: {'def': '【中】玩具。【形】玩的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. kīḷati] a plaything, a toy Th.2, 384 (with ref. to the moon). (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】玩具。【形】玩的。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kīḷanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. same) playing, sport, amusement Nett 18; PvA.67; DhA.III,461 (nakkhatta° celebration). (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'keḷī,【阴】运动，欢乐。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'keḷī,【阴】运动，欢乐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kīḷati: {'def': '(kīḷ + a), 玩，游戏，消遣。kiḷi, 【过】。kīḷanta, kīḷāna, 【现分】。 kīḷitvā,【独】。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(kīḷ +a), 玩，游戏，消遣。kiḷi,【过】。kīḷita,【过分】。kīḷanta, kīḷāna,【现分】。kīḷitvā,【独】。kīḷitabba,【义】。kīḷeti, kīḷayati,【义】。kīḷayamāno vicaranto, 走动的玩，跳舞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. krīḍati] to play, sport, enjoy or amuse oneself Vin.IV,112 (udake k. sport in the water); Pv.II,1²¹ (=indriyāni paricarāmi PvA.77) D.II,196; J.V,38; Th.2, 147; PvA.16, 67, 77, 189; -- c. Acc. to celebrate: nakkhattaṁ J.I,50; VvA.63; PvA.73; ThA.137; chaṇaṁ DhA.III,100. -- pp. kīḷita. Caus. II. kīḷāpeti to make play, to train J.II,267 (sappaṁ to train or tame a snake). (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kīḷikā: {'def': '(f.) play, sport, amusement; always --°, like kumāra° D.II,196; uyyāna° (sport in the garden) J.III,275; IV,23, 390; udaka° ThA.186. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kīḷita: {'def': '[pp. of kīḷati] played or having played, playing, sporting; celebrated (of a festival) A.IV,55 (hasitalapita°); PvA.76 (sādhu°). --(nt.) amusement, sport, celebration M.I,229 (kīḷita-jātaṁ kīḷati). Cp. sahapaṁsu°°; see also keḷi & khiḍḍā. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kīḷati 的【过分】), 已玩。【中】游戏，玩。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(kīḷati 的【过分】), 已玩。【中】游戏，玩。kīḷitakīḷita, 玩耍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kīḷā: {'def': '【阴】玩，运动。~goḷaka,【中】球。~pasuta,【形】好玩。~bhaṇḍaka,【中】玩具。 ~maṇḍala,【中】游戏场，运动场。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'f. [fr. krīḍ, cp. Sk. krīḍā] play, sport, enjoyment; udakakīḷaṁ kīḷantī enjoying herself on the water PvA.189. -- uyyāna° amusement in the park DhA.I,220; IV, 3; nakkhatta-kīḷaṁ kīḷati to celebrate a festival (i. e. the full moon when standing in a certain Nakkhatta) VvA.109, ThA.137; sāla-kīḷā sport in the sāla woods J.V,38; kīḷādhippāyena in play, for fun PvA.215; -- Cp. kīḷikā.

--goḷa a ball to play with Vism.254. --goḷaka id. Vism.256 (cp. KhA 53); ThA.255; --pasuta bent on play J.I,58; --bhaṇḍaka (nt.) toy Miln.229 (=kīḷāpanaka M.I,266); --maṇḍala play-circle, children’s games, playground J.VI,332; DhA.III,146; --sālā playhouse J.VI,332. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】玩，运动。kīḷāgoḷaka,【中】球。kīḷāpasuta, 【形】好玩。kīḷābhaṇḍaka,【中】玩具。kīḷāmaṇḍala,【中】游戏场，运动场。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kīḷāpanaka: {'def': '1. (nt.) a plaything, toy M.I,266, 384; a list given at A.V,203. -- 2. (adj.) one who makes play J.IV,308 (sappa° a snake-trainer, cp. sappaṁ kīḷāpeti J.II,267). (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】游戏教练。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】游戏教练。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kīḷāpeti: {'def': 'Kīḷāpayati (kīḷati 的【使】), 令玩。kīḷāpesi,【过】。kīḷāpenta,【现分】。kīḷāpetvā,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kīḷati 的【使】), 令玩。kīḷāpesi, 【过】。kīḷāpenta, 【现分】。kīḷāpetvā,【独】。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kīṭa: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. kīṭa] a general term for insect DhA.I,187; usually in combⁿ with paṭaṅga, beetle (moth?) M.III,168 (with puḷava); Sn.602; J.VI,208; Miln.272 (°vaṇṇa); PvA.67; Vism.115. kīṭa at J.V,373 means a kind of shield (=cāṭipāla ? c.), the reading should prob. be kheṭa. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'kīṭaka,【阳】昆虫，蠹。(p103)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'kīṭaka,【阳】昆虫，蠹(moth)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kīṭaka: {'def': '(nt.) one or all kinds of insects Vin.I,188. (Page 217)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kūjana: {'def': '【中】鸟的吱喳呜。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】吱喳声，车轹声。【反】akūjana。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kūjanta: {'def': 'kūjamāna,【现分】正在吱喳而呜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'kūjamāna,【现分】正在吱喳而呜。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kūjati: {'def': '(kūj+a), 吱喳而呜。kūji,【过】。kūjita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kūj + a), 吱喳而呜。kūji, 【过】。kūjita, 【过分】。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kūjita: {'def': '【中】鸟的歌唱。【过分】已以鸟的歌唱呜响。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】鸟的歌唱。【过分】已以鸟的歌唱呜响。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kūla: {'def': '【中】河岸，堤防，筑堤。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】河岸，堤防，筑堤。(p108)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Dhtp 271: kūla āvaraṇe] a slope, a bank, an embankment. Usually of rivers: S.I,143=J.III,361; A.I,162; Sn.977; J.I,227; Miln.36: udapāna° the facing of a well Vin.II,122; vaccakūpassa k° the sides of a cesspool Vin.II,141. See also paṁsu°, & cp. uk°, upa°, paṭi°. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kūpa: {'def': '【阳】井，洞。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】井，洞。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m.) [Vedic kūpa, orig. curvature viz. (a) interior= cavity, cp. Lat. cupa, Gr. ku/pellon cup; also Gr. ku/mbh, Sk. kumbha; -- (b) exterior=heap, cp. Ags. hēap, Ohg. heap, Sk. kūpa mast]. 1. a pit, a cavity: akkhi° the socket of the eye M.I,80, 245; DhsA.306; gūtha° a cesspool D.II,324; Sn.279; Pv.II,3¹⁶; Pug.36; miḷha° a pit for evacuations Pgdp 23, 24; loma° the root of the hair, a pore of the skin DA.I,57; Vism.262, 360; also in na loma-kūpamattaṁ pi not even a hairroot J.I,31; III,55; vacca°=gūtha° Vin.II,141, 222. As a tank or a well: J.VI,213; VvA.305. -- 2. the mast of a boat J.III,126; Miln.363, 378. See next.

--khaṇa one who digs a pit J.VI,213. --tala the floor of a pit Vism.362. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kūpaka: {'def': '=kūpa 1. Vism.361 (akkhi°), 362 (nadītīra°), 449 (id.); =kūpa. 2. J.II,112; IV,17. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】桅杆，柱，旗杆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】桅杆，柱，旗杆。(p108)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kūra: {'def': '(nt.) in sukkha° boiled rice (?) Vin.IV,86; DhA.II,171. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kūṭa: {'def': '⁴ (adj.) [Sk. kūṭa, not horned; *(s)qer to cut, mutilate, curtail, cp. Lat. caro, curtus; also Sk kṛdhu maimed. The explⁿ of kuṭ as “chede,” or “chedane” (cutting) at Dhtp 90, 555; Dhtm 115, 526, 781 may refer to this kūṭa. See also kuṭṭa] without horns, i. e. harmless, of goṇa a draught bullock Vin.IV,5=J.I,192 (in play of words with kūṭa deceitful J. trsl. misses the point & translates “rascal”). These maimed oxen (cows & calves) are represented as practically useless & sluggish in similes at Vism.268, 269: kūṭa-goṇa- (so read for °poṇa)--yutta-ratha a cart to which such a bullock is harnessed (uppathaṁ dhāvati runs the wrong way); kūṭa-dhenuyā khīraṁ pivitvā kūṭa-vaccho, etc., such a calf lies still at the post. -- Kūṭa-danta as Np. should prob. belong here, thus meaning “ox-tooth” (derisively) (D.I,127; Vism.208), with which may be compared danta-kūṭa (see under danta). (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Dhtp 472 & Dhtm 526 expl. kuṭ of kūṭa¹ by koṭille (koṭilye), cp. Sk. kūṭa trap, cp. Gr. paleu/w to trap birds] a trap, a snare; fig. falsehood, deceit. As trap J.I,143 (kūṭapāsādi); IV,416 (explⁿ paṭicchannapāsa). As deceit, cheating in formula tulā° kaṁsa° māna° “cheating with weight, coin and measure” (DA.I,78=vañcana) D.I,5=III,176=S.V,473=M.I,180 =A.II,209; V,205=Pug.58. māna° PvA.278. -- As adj. false, deceitful, cheating, see cpds. -- Note. kūṭe J.I,145 ought to be read kuṭe (antokuṭe padīpo viya, cp. ghaṭa).

--aṭṭa a false suit, in °kāra a false suitor J.II,2; DhA.I,353; --jaṭila a fraudulent ascetic J.I,375; DhA.I,40; --māna false measure PvA.191; --vāṇija a false-trader Pv III,4²; PvA.191; --vinicchayikatā a lie (false discrimination) PvA.210. --vedin lier, calumniator J.IV,177. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '³ (nt.) [*qolā to beat; cp. Lat. clava; Gr. klάw, koλos, and also Sk. khaḍga; Lat. clades, procello; Gr. kladarόs. The explⁿ of kuṭ³ at Dhtp 557 & Dhtm 783 is “āko ṭane”] a hammer, usually as aya° an iron sledge hammer J.I,108; or ayo° PvA.284; ayomaya° Sn.669; kammāra° Vism.254. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (m. nt.) [Vedic kūṭa horn, bone of the forehead, prominence, point, *qele to jut forth, be prominent; cp. Lat. celsus, collis, columen; Gr. kolwnόs kolofw/n; Ags. holm, E. hill] -- (a) prominence, top (cp. koṭi), in abbha° ridge of the cloud Vv I.¹ (=sikhara); aṁsa° shoulder, clavicle, VvA.121, 123 pabbata° mountain peak Vin.II,193; J.I,73. Cp. koṭa. -- (b) the top of a house, roof, pinnacle A.I,261; Vv 78⁴ (=kaṇṇikā VvA.304); gaha° Dh.154; PvA.55. Cp. also kūṭāgāra. -- (c) a heap, an accumulation, in saṅkāra° dust-heap M.II,7; PvA.144. -- (d) the topmost point, in phrase desanāya kūṭaṁ gahetvā or desanā kūtaṁ gaṇhanto “leading up to the climax of the instruction” J.I,275, 393, 401; V,151; VI,478; VvA.243. Cp. arahattena kūṭaṁ gaṇhanto J.I,114; arahattaphalena k. gaṇhiṁ ThA.99.

--aṅga the shoulder Vv 15⁸ (=VvA.123). --âgāra (nt.) a building with a peaked roof or pinnacles, possibly gabled; or with an upper storey Vin.I,268; S.II,103= V.218; III,156; IV,186; V,43, 75, 228; A.I,101, 261; III,10, 364; IV,231; V,21; Pv III,1⁷; 2²¹; Vv 8² (=ratanamayakaṇṇikāya bandhaketuvanto VvA.50); VvA.6 (upari°, with upper storey) v. l. kuṭṭhāgāra; PvA.282 (°dhaja with a flag on the summit); DhA.IV,186. In cpds.: --° matta as big as an upper chamber J.I,273; Miln.67; --°sālā a pavilion (see description of Maṇḍalamāḷa at DA.I,43) Vin.III,15, 68, 87; IV,75; D.I,150; S.II,103=V.218; IV,186. --(n)gama going towards the point (of the roof), converging to the summit S.II,263= III,156=V.43; --ṭṭha standing erect, straight, immovable, in phrase vañjha k° esikaṭṭhāyin D.I,14=56= S.III,211=M.I,517 (expl. DA.I,105 by pabbatakūṭaṁ viya ṭhita); --poṇa at Vism.268 is to be read °goṇa: see kūṭa⁴. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】顶端，突起，山顶，脊，高峰，铁锤。【中】谎言，欺骗。S.V,40.：Seyyathāpi bhikkhave kūṭāgārassa Yā kāci gopānasiyo sabbā tā kūṭavgamā kūṭaninnā kūṭasamosaranā, kūtaṁ tāsam aggam akkhāyati. (比丘们！犹如楼阁的任何椽，都往(摄於)屋顶、向屋顶、会合於屋顶，屋顶被称为它们(诸椽)的最上者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】顶端，突起，山顶，脊，高峰，铁锤。【中】谎言，欺骗。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】奸诈的，欺诈的，未驯服的。~goṇa,【阳】未驯服的公牛。~aṭṭa,【中】不老实的诉讼。~aṭṭakāraka,【阳】不老实的起诉者。~jaṭila,【阳】虚伪的苦行者。~vāṇija,【阳】奸商。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】奸诈的，欺诈的，未驯服的。kūṭagoṇa,【阳】未驯服的公牛。kūṭaṭṭa,【中】不老实的诉讼。kūṭaṭṭakāraka,【阳】不老实的起诉者。kūṭajaṭila,【阳】虚僞的苦行者。kūṭavāṇija,【阳】奸商。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kūṭeyya: {'def': '(nt.) [der. fr. *kūṭya of kūṭa¹, cp. in formation sāṭheyya] fraud, deceit, in combⁿ with sāṭheyya & vaṅkeyya M.I,340; A.V,167. (Page 225)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kūṭāgāra: {'def': '【中】小尖塔般耸立的建筑物，或如此的暂时建筑物，灵柩台。pañcakūṭāgārasatāni katāni﹐造五百间临时屋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】小尖塔般耸立的建筑物，或如此的暂时建筑物，灵柩台。(p107)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

L: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十八个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 l。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十八个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 l。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

La: {'def': 'syllable of abbreviation, corresponding to our “etc.”: see peyyāla. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Labbhamanatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. med. of labhati] the fact of being taken PvA.56. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Labbhati: {'def': '(labh + ya), 被获得，被接收。【过分】 laddha,【现分】 labbhamāna。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(labh获得+ya), 被获得，被接收。【过分】laddha,【现分】labbhamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Labbhā: {'def': '【无】可能的，可允许的，可能被获得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】可能的，可允许的，可能被获得。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [best to be taken, with Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 465, as an old Opt. 3^rd sg., like sakkā which corresponds to Vedic śakyāt. Thus labbhā=*labhyāt, as in Māgadhī] allowable, possible (with inf.); usually neg. (thus=Prohibitive!) Sn.393 na l. phassetuṁ; SnA p. 376 expl^s by “sakkā”), 590; Pv.II,6¹⁰; J.I,64 (na l. tayā pabbajituṁ), 145 (id.), PvA.96 (=laddhuṁ sakkā). (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Labha: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [a base-formation fr. labh] receiving, to be received, to get; only in dul° hard to get Sn.75; S.I,101; J.I,307; Pug.26; Miln.16; Sdhp.17, 27; and su° easy to obtain Pv.II,3¹⁹. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Labhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. labh] taking, receiving, gift, acquisition DhA.III,271 (°bhāva); PvA.73 (°ṭṭhāna), 121 (id.). (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Labhati: {'def': '(labh获得+a), 收获，获得，达到。【过】labhi。【过分】laddha,【现分】labhanta。【独】labhitvā, laddhā,【不】labhituṁ, laddhuṁ。catunnañ ca āhārānaṁ kāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī(四食随愿欲而得，不劳而得，不苦而得。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(labh + a), 收获，获得，达到。【过】 labhi。【过分】 laddha, 【现分】 labhanta。【独】 labhitvā, laddhā, 【不】 labhituŋ, laddhuŋ。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[later Vedic labh for older rabh, cp. rabhate, rabha, rabhasa. Related are Gr. lambάnw to get, lάfuron booty; Lat. rabies=E. rabies; Lith. lõbis wealth. -- The Dhtp (204) simply defines as “lābhe.” On the Prk. forms see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 484. -- See also rabhasa] 1. (the very freq. & ordinary meaning) to get, to receive, obtain, acquire. -- 2. (fig.) to obtain permission, to receive an opportunity, etc., as “pabbajituṁ sace lacchāmi” if I am allowed to receive the pabbajjā Mhvs 18, 5; or “labhamāno niccam pi khāditu-kāmo ‘mhi” if I get the chance I should always like to eat J.I,478; and passim (cp. Pass. labbhati below). The paradigma of labhati shows a great variety of forms owing to its frequent occurrence (cp. E. “get”). We have selected the most interesting ones. Pres. Ind. labhati rare (late, e. g. Vism.136); usually med labhate Th.1, 35; Sn.185, 439; 1^st sg. labhe Pv.I,6⁴; 2^nd sg. labhase J.II,220; 3^rd pl. labhare S.I,110. -- ppr. med. labhamāna S.I,122 (otāraṁ a°, cp. IV.178; M.I,334); also in Pass. sense “getting taken” PvA.71. -- Opt. 3^rd sg. labhe Sn.458, & (med.) labhetha Sn.45, 46, 217; Pv.II,9⁷; also (usual form) labheyya PvA.115. 2^nd sg. med. labhetho (=Sk. °thāh) Sn.833. -- Imper. 2^nd sg. labha It.77; 3^rd labhatu PvA.112; med. 2^nd sg. labhassu Th.2, 432; 3^rd sg. labhataṁ D.II,150; 1^st pl. (as Hortative) labhāmase Pv.I,5⁵ (=labhāma PvA.27); & labhāmhase Pv III,2²⁴. -- Fut. 3^rd sg. lacchasi (Sk. lapsyati) S.I,114; Pv.II,4⁶; III,3⁷; J.II,60 (Māro otāraṁ l.), 258; Miln.126; DhA.I,29; SnA 405; ThA.69 (Ap.); 1^st sg. lacchāmi M.II,71; 2^nd sg. lacchasi Vv 83⁵; Pv IV.1⁶⁰; 1^st pl. lacchāma J.I,54; IV,292; & lacchāmase (med.) Vv 32⁹. Also (the Com. form) labhissati PvA.190; VvA.136. -- Cond. 1^st pl. alabhissāma J.III,35; med. 3^rd sg. alabhissatha D.II,63. -- Pret. (& aor.) (a) 3^rd sg. alattha D.I,176 (alattha pabbajjaṁ); M.II,49; S.IV,302; J.IV,310; VvA.66, 69; 1^st sg. alatthaṁ D.II,268; Vv 81²²; Th.1, 747; DhA.III,313; 2^nd sg. alattha S.I,114; 1^st pl. alatthamha M.II,63; 3^rd pl. alatthuṁ D.II,274, & alatthaṁsu S.I,48. -- (b) (Prohib.) mā laddhā (3^rd sg. med.) shall not receive (Sk. alabdha) J.III,138. ‹-› (c) labhi Sn.994; 1^st sg. labhiṁ Th.1, 218; 2, 78; J.II,154; VvA.68; & alabhitthaṁ Th.1, 217; 3^rd sg. alabhittha Pv.I,7⁷ (spelt bbh); 1^st pl. labhimhā (for labhimha) D.II,147. -- Inf. laddhuṁ J.II,352; DhA.III,117; PvA.96. -- Ger. laddhā (poet.) Sn.306, 388, 766, 924; laddhāna (poet.) Sn.67 (=laddhā, labhitvā Nd² 546); It.65; and (ord.) labhitva J.I,150; III,332; PvA.95. ‹-› Grd. (a): labbhiya (only neg. alabbhiya what cannot be got) J.IV,86; Pv.II,6⁹; labbhaneyya (a°) (in Com. style as explⁿ of labbhanīya) J.IV,86 (°ṭhāna); PvA.65 (°vatthu), 96 (id.); and labbhanīya (as a°-ṭṭhānāni impossible things) A.III,54 sq. (five such items), 60 sq. (id.); J.IV,59. -- (b): laddhabba J.III,332; PvA.112, 252. -- (c): laddheyya Pv IV.3²⁵. -- Caus. labbheti (for *lābheti, a diff. formⁿ fr. Sk. lambhayati, which is found in P. pa-lambheti) to make someone get, to procure, in 1^st sg. aor. alabbhesi Vin.IV,5=J.I,193; DhA.III,213 (v. l. labh°); and in pres. 3^rd sg. labbheti J.III,353 (=adhigameti C.). -- Pass. labbhati (fig.) to be permitted, to be possible or proper; (or simply:) it is to be Mhvs 30, 43; KhA 192 (vattuṁ), 207 (id.). -- pp. laddha. -- Cp. upa°, pati°, vi°. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Labhissati: {'def': '= lacchati, 【未】 labhati。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Labuja: {'def': '【阳】面包果(一种高的乔木 (Atrocarpus altilis)，广布於热带地区，结面包果，树皮含坚韧的纤维，用作织布、黏性物质。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】面包果（一种高的乔木 (Atrocarpus altilis)，它很可能原产于马来西亚，而现在以栽培和逸出植物广布于热带地区，结面包果，树皮含坚韧的纤维，当地用作织布和生产可用的木材以及一种黏性物质，用于堵缝和作一种胶水或粘鸟胶）。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. labuja] the bread-fruit tree, Artocarpus lacucha or incisa D.I,53; J.IV,363; V,6, 417; PvA.153 (sa°, read as salaḷa°, like Vv 35⁵, expl^d at VvA.162). (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lacchati: {'def': '= labhissati, 【未】 labhati。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'fut. of labhati (q. v.). (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '= labhissati,【未】labhati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lacchī: {'def': 'f. [= Lakkhī, Sk. Lakṣmī] 吉祥天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Laddha: {'def': '(labhati‘获得’的【过分】), 已获得，已接收( (having) obtained, taken, received)。laddhaka,【形】迷人的，愉快的。laddhabba,【义】应该被接收。laddhabhāva,【阳】接收的事实，达到的事实。laddhassāda,【形】精力恢复的，病愈的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(labhati 的【过分】), 已获得，已接收。 ~ka, 【形】迷人的，愉快的。~bba, 【潜】应该被接收。 ~bhāva, 【阳】接收的事实，达到的事实。~assāda, 【形】精力恢复的，病愈的。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of labhati] (having) obtained, taken, received Sn.106, 239; J.V,171; Mhvs 5, 133 (kiñci laddhaṁ); 10, 37 (kaññā laddhā); PvA.5. --laddhatvaṁ at J.IV,406. is to be corrected to uddhatvā. -- Cp. upa°, pa°. --adhippāya one who obtains his wishes Nd² 542. --assāsa getting one’s breath again, coming to (out of a swoon) J.IV,126. --upasampada one who has obtained ordination PvA.54. --jaya victorious Mhvs 25, 98. --jīvika revived PvA.40. --nāma so-called ThA.292 (puthulomo laddhanāmo maccho); PvA.33 (yamaloka l-n. petaloka), 52 (niraya l-n. naraka), 57 (kuñjara l-n. hatthi), 107 (sūcikā jighacchā), 119 (Purindada= Sakka), 143 (Himavanto=pabbata-rājā), etc. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laddhi: {'def': '【阴】理论的意见，~ka, 【形】有某种见解的。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. labh] religious belief, view, theory, esp. heretical view; a later term for the earlier diṭṭhi (cp. Kvu trsl. introd. p. 47) J.I,142 (Devadattassa), 425; III,487; V,411; Dāvs II.86 (dulladdhi wrong view); DA.I,117; PvA.254; Sdhp.65. Cp. upa°. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】理论的意见，laddhika,【形】有某种见解的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laddhika: {'def': '(-°) [fr. laddhi] having a (wrong) view or belief, schismatic J.I,373 (evaṁ°); Dpvs VII.35 (puthu°). (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laddhuŋ: {'def': '(= labhituŋ), 【不】要获得，要接受。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Laddhuṁ: {'def': '(= labhituṁ),【不】要获得，要接受。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laddhā: {'def': 'is ger. and 3^rd sg. aor.; laddhāna ger. of labhati (q. v.). (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'laddhāna, (labhati‘获得’的【独】), 有得到，有收到，有达到。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'laddhāna, (labhati 的【独】), 有得到，有收到，有达到。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lagana: {'def': '& Laggana (nt.) [fr. lag] 1. adhering J.I,46 (g.; V,281); with gg: J.III,202 (=saṅga); Nd² p. 188 (s. v. nissita, in sequence l., bandhana, palibodha); Miln.105; DhA.III,433. -- 2. slinging round, making fast VvA.212. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lagati: {'def': '& Laggati [with variant laṅgati; the spelling with gg is the usual one. Root lag, as in Vedic lakṣa etc.; Sk. lagati, pp. lagna (from the pp. lagga the double g has been generalized in P.: but see Geiger, P.Gr. § 136); perhaps to Lat. langueo, E. languid, from meaning “to lag,” but doubtful: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. langueo. ‹-› The Dhtp 23 gives lag in meaning “saṅga,” which is the customary syn. in the commentaries. Cp. laṅgī] to adhere to, stick (fast) to (Loc.), to hang from Vin.I,202; J.III,120; DhA.I,131; III,298 (ppr. alaggamāna); DA.I,257 (for abhisajjati); aor. laggi PvA.153 (tīre); ger. laggitva J.III,19; DhA.IV,25; PvA.280 (but better to be read laggetvā making fast; as v. l.). -- pp. lagga & laggita. -- Caus. laggeti to make stick to, to fasten, tie, hang up Vin.I,209; II,117, 152; J.III,107; V,164, 175; Mhvs 7, 9 (suttañ ca tesaṁ hatthesu laggetvā); DhA.I,138. ‹-› Caus. II. laggāpeti to cause to fasten or stick, to make stick, to obstruct J.III,241; Mhvs 33, 11; 34, 48 (kalāpaṁ); DhA.IV,183. -- Cp. ālaggeti. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lagga: {'def': '【形】卡住的，执著的。alaggatā﹐无执著性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】卡住的，执着的。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of lag(g)ati] sticking; stuck, attached; obstructed, hindered Nd² 107; Miln.346 (laggaṁ disvā mahiṁ); DhsA.127 (alagga-bhāva); DhA.I,361 (°mānasa). Neg. alagga unobstructed (lit. not sticking or being stuck to), in phrase ākāso alaggo asatto apatiṭṭhito apalibuddho Miln.388 and elsewhere. -- Cp. olagga. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laggana: {'def': '(‹lag),【中】黏附，执著，悬挂。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】粘附，执着，悬挂。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Laggati: {'def': '(lag + a), 黏住，执着，黏附在，悬挂。【过】 laggi, 【过分】 laggita。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lag+a), 黏住，执著，黏附在，悬挂。【过】laggi,【过分】laggita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laggeti: {'def': '(lag + e), 坚持，不挂断，粘住。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 laggita。【独】laggetvā。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lag+e), 坚持，不挂断，粘住。【过】laggesi。【过分】laggita。【独】laggetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laggita: {'def': '[pp. of lag(g)ati] stuck, adhering; obstructed J.IV,11. Often in exegetical style in sequence lagga, laggita, palibuddha, e. g. Nd² p. 188 (s. v. nissita), cp. No. 107. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laggāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. laggāpeti: see lagati] making stick, causing obstruction J.III,241. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laghima: {'def': '(laṅghima) in phrase aṇima-laghim’ādikaṁ is doubtful in reading & meaning at KhA 108=Vism.211 (spelt laṅgh° here). (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laguḷa: {'def': '【阳】棍棒。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. laguḍa, Marāthī lākūḍa, Hindī lakuṭa stick. The word is really a dialect word (Prk.) and as such taken into Sk. where it ought to be *lakṛta=lakuṭa. Other etym. connections are Lat. lacertus (arm), Gr. lέkrana, lάc; Old Prussian alkunis elbow; and distantly related E. leg. See Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lacertus. Cp. P. bhuja¹ & ratana] a club, cudgel Vin.III,77 (enum^d with var. weapons of murder, like asi, satti, bheṇḍi, pāsāṇa etc.); Miln.152, 351 (kodaṇḍa-laguḷa-muggara), 355 (kilesa°); J.VI,394; Vism.525 (°abhighāta). (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】棍棒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lahati: {'def': 'to lick: see ullahaka, palahati, & lehati. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lahu: {'def': '【形】轻的，快的。【中】短，元音。 ~ka, 【形】轻的，微不足道的，有浮力的。 ~kaŋ, 【副】很快地。 ~tā, 【阴】轻，浮力。 ~parivatta, 【形】很快地变化。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】轻的，快的。【中】短，母音。lahuka,【形】轻的，微不足道的，有浮力的。lahukaṁ,【副】很快地。lahutā,【阴】轻，浮力。lahuparivatta,【形】很快地变化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. laghu & raghu: see etym. under laṅghati] light, quick A.I,10, 45. --lahuṁ karoti to make light, to be frivolous J.II,451. -- nt. lahuṁ (adv.) quickly Pv IV.1⁶⁰; Dpvs.I,53; Mhvs 4, 17. -- Usually as lahuka (q. v.).

--citta light-minded S.I,201; J.III,73. --ṭṭhāna lightness of body, bodily vigour, good health M.I,437, 473; D.I,204; Ud.15; Miln.14. [Cp. BSk. laghūtthānatā Divy 156.] --parivatta quickly or easily changing VbhA.408. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lahukā: {'def': '(adj.) [lahu+ka] 1. light (opp. garuka); trifling Vin.I,49; A.II,48 (āpatti); IV,137 (jīvitaṁ parittaṁ l.); Miln.344 (āpatti). -- 2. light, buoyant Th.1, 104 (kāyo); Dhs.648; Miln.105; PvA.280. atilahukaṁ (adv.) too soon Vin.II,215. -- 3 (as tt. in grammar) light (of letters or syllables), opp. garuka DA.I,177 (with ref. to the 10 fold vyañjana of the dhamma). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lahusa: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lahu] easily offended, touchy D.I,90; expl^d by DA.I,256 as follows: “lahusā ti lahukā, appaken’eva tussanti vā russanti vā udaka-piṭṭhe lābukaṭāhaṁ viya appakena pi uppilavanti.” Cp. rabhasa. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lahuso: {'def': '(adv.) [orig. Abl. of lahu] quickly A.IV,247 (sabba°); Vism.238. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lahutā: {'def': "(and mudutā , kammaññatā), as rūpassa- , kāya- , or citta- , are for the first time found in the Abh. Canon, esp. Dhs. All, however, perhaps with the sole exception of paguññatā , are implied in the Sutta Canon, e.g. ' citte mudu-bhūte kammanīye ' (M 4); ' lahu-saññañ ca kāye okkamitvā ' (S. LI. 22); ' cittaṃ ujukam akamsu' (S. I. 26; PTS). Kāya-passaddhi and citta-passaddhi , however, are well known in the old sutta texts in this connection.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. lahu] lightness, buoyancy Dhs.42, 322, 585; Vism.448. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lahuŋ: {'def': 'lahuso, 【副】很快地。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lahuṁ: {'def': 'lahuso,【副】很快地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lajjana: {'def': '【中】很丢脸，羞耻。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lajj] being ashamed Dhtp 72. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹lajj),【中】很丢脸，羞耻(being ashamed)。alajjana﹐无羞耻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lajjanaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lajjana] causing shame, humiliating, disgraceful J.VI,395. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lajjati: {'def': '[lajj; Dhtp 72: lajjane] 1. to be ashamed or abashed, to be modest or bashful PvA.48 (for harāyati); ppr. lajjamāna DhA.I,188; PvA.88; fut. lajjissati J.III,218; inf. lajjituṁ DhA.I,72; ger. lajjitvā J.I,208; grd. lajjitabba (nt.) what one has to be ashamed of, something disgraceful J.VI,395; also (an odd form) lajjitāya (so read: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 203 against Trenckner, Notes, 66²⁷) Dh.316. -- 2. to have regard of (Gen.), to consider, to respect J.IV,128. -- Caus. II. lajjāpeti to cause to be ashamed, to put to the blush J.III,137; V,296. -- pp. lajjita. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lajj + a), 感到惭愧，蒙羞。【过】 lajji。【过分】 lajjita。【现分】 lajjanta,~māna。【独】 lajjitvā。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lajj惭愧+a), 1.感到惭愧，有羞耻心，蒙羞(to be ashamed or abashed, to be modest or bashful)。【过】lajji。【未】lajjissati。【不】lajjituṁ。【现分】lajjanta﹐lajjamāna。【独】lajjitvā。【未被】lajjitabba﹐lajjitāya。2.认为，考虑(to have regard of (Gen.), to consider, to respect)。【使】 lajjāpeti( to cause to be ashamed, to put to the blush)。【过分】lajjita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lajjava: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lajj] shamefacedness D.III,213 (where Dhs.1340 has maddava); cp. A.I,94. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lajjin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lajj] feeling shame, modest, afraid, shy, conscientious (expl^d as “one who has hiri & ottappa” by C. on S.I,73: see K.S. 320 & cp. Dhs. trstlⁿ p. 18) D.I,4, 63; III,15; S.I,73; A.II,208; IV,249 sq.; Pug.57; Pv.II,9¹⁵ (expl^d as one who is afraid of sin); Miln.373; DA.I,70. -- pl. lajjino Vin.I,44.

--dhamma (lajji°) modesty, feeling of shame Vin.II,53 sq. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lajjita: {'def': '[pp. of lajjati] ashamed, bashful Sdhp.35. -- f. lajjitā as n. abstr. “bashfulness” DhA.I,188. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lajjitabbaka: {'def': '【形】应该感到惭愧的。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [grd. of lajjati+ka] something to be ashamed of, a cause of shame, disgrace J.VI,395. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】应该感到惭愧的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lajjā: {'def': '【阴】耻辱，害羞。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】耻辱，害羞(歹势phainn2 se3，惊见笑kiann kian3 siau3)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. lajj] shame, bashfulness, modesty M.I,414; DA.I,70; DhA.II,90; Instr. lajjāya out of shame PvA.47, 112, 283. Cp. nillajja. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lajjāpana: {'def': '【中】惭愧心。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】惭愧心。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lajjāpanikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. lajjāpeti, Caus. II. of lajjati] making ashamed, putting to shame, disgracing J.V,284 (kula° bringing disgrace on the clan). (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lajjāpeti: {'def': '(lajjati’惭愧’的【使】), 使惭愧。【过】lajjāpesi。【过分】lajjāpita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(lajjati 的【使】), 使惭愧。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~pita。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lajjī: {'def': '【形】有惭愧心的，谦逊的，有责任心的。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有惭愧心的，谦逊的，有责任心的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lak-aṭṭhika: {'def': 'at VvA.222 is doubtful; aṭṭhika means “kernel,” lak° may be a misspelling for labujak° (?). (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lakanaka: {'def': '(nt.?) [fr. lag, with k for g, as lakuṭa: laguḷa etc. Would correspond to Sk. *lagnaka, cp. Trenckner. Notes 62; Geiger, P.Gr. § 39¹] ship’s anchor (nāvā°) Miln.377 (v. l. lagganaka), 378. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laketi: {'def': '[for laggeti, see lakanaka] to hold fast (lit. to make adhere) Miln.377. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lakkha: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lakṣ (see lakkhaṇa), or (after Grassmann) lag “to fix,” i. e. to mark. Cp. Vedic lakṣa price at gambling (Zimmer, Altind. Leben 287)] 1. a mark Miln.102. -- 2. a target Miln.418; DhA.I,52 (°yoggā target practice, i. e. shooting). -- 3. a stake at gambling J.VI,271. -- 4. a high numeral, a lac or 100,000 (but cp. PvA.255, where lakkha of Pv IV.3³⁸ is taken as a “period of time,” equal to 100 koṭis); Dāvs.V,66. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】标志，目标，赌注，记帐的标志，十万。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】标志，目标，赌注，记帐的标志，十万。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lakkhañña: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lakkhaṇa, cp. BSk. lakṣaṇya diviner Divy 474] connected with auspices, auspicious, in phrase “lakkhaññā vata bho dosinā ratti” (how grand a sign, friends, is the moonlight night! trslⁿ) D.I,47=J.I,509 (expl^d at DA.I,141 as “divasa-mās’--ādīnaṁ lakkhaṇaṁ bhavituṁ yuttā”); J.V,370 (°sammata considered auspicious). (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lakkhaṇa: {'def': '【中】相，告示，标志，特征，预兆，质量。 ~pāṭhaka, 【阳】占相者（解读征兆的专家）。 ~sampatti, 【阴】相的优点。 ~sampanna, 【形】有吉兆的。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹laks标记、特徵),【中】相，特相，告示，标志，特徵，预兆，特质。lakkhaṇapāṭhaka,【阳】占相者(解读徵兆的专家)。lakkhaṇasampatti,【阴】相的优点。lakkhaṇasampanna,【形】有吉兆的。wrīvatsalaksana, 【梵】卍、卐。音译作：室利靺蹉洛刹曩。意译作吉祥海云、吉祥喜旋。DhsA.(CS:p.106)：Lakkhaṇādīsu hi tesaṁ tesaṁ dhammānaṁ sabhāvo vā sāmaññaṁ vā lakkhaṇaṁ nāma.(各种诸法的诸相共通的自相，称为‘特相’(particular characteristic)。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '标识;相;特相;相好', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic lakṣman nt. sign; adj. lakṣmaṇa; later Sk. lakṣmaṇa nt. In the defⁿ of grammarians syn. with aṅka brand, e. g. Dhtp 536 “aṅka lakkhaṇe lakkha dassane,” or Dhtm 748 “lakkha=dassanaaṅke”; cp. J.I,451 lakkhaṇena aṅketi to brand. ‹-› The Sk. Np. Lakṣmaṇa appears also in Prk. as Lakkhaṇa: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 312] 1. sign, characteristic, mark; esp. a sign as implying something extraordinary or pointing to the future, therefore a prognosticative mark (cp. talisman), a distinguishing mark or salient feature, property, quality (as Rh. D. in Dial. I.19 somewhat lengthily, after Bdhgh, trsl^s lakkhaṇa by “signs of good & bad qualities in the foll. things and of the marks in them denoting the health or luck of their owners”) D.I,9 (a long list, as forbidden practice of fortune-telling, like maṇi° from jewels, daṇḍa° from sticks, asi° from marks on swords etc.); Sn.360 (pl. lakkhanā, here as fortune-telling together with supina telling fr. dreams, cp. SnA 362: daṇḍa°, vattha° etc. referring to D.I,9), 927 (with Āthabbana, supina & nakkhatta, all kinds of secret sciences; expl^d at SnA 564 as “maṇi-lakkhaṇâdi”) 1018 (gottaṁ brūhi sa° “with its distinguishing marks”); J.VI,364 (sign of beauty); Miln.171 (yathāva° just characterization); Mhvs 35, 109 (itthi° auspicious signs in women); PvA.161, 219; SnA 386. A long enumⁿ of all sorts of (perfect) marks (tatha-lakkhaṇāni) is found at DA.I,62 sq. Cp. tādi-lakkhaṇa marks of such (a being), with ref. to good luck etc. J.III,98; SnA 200; VvA.95. -- 2. mark on the body, esp. when serving a def. purpose, e. g. as the branding (of slaves), or the marks of a fortunate being, pointing towards his future greatness: (a) brand J.I,451, cp. cpd. °āhata. -- (b) the (32) marks of a mahā-purisa or a great being, either destined to be a rājā cakkavatti, or a sammā-sambuddha. These are given at Sn.1019 (pl. lakkhanā), 1021, 1022 as only 3 (viz. mukhaṁ jivhāya chādeti, uṇṇ’assa bhamuk’antare, kos’ohitaṁ vattha-guyhaṁ with ref. to his tongue, the hair between the eyebrows & the sexual organ); more completely as 32 at D.II,16 sq.; III,142 sq. (the Lakkhaṇa Suttanta); referred to at D.I,88, 105; J.I,56; Mhvs 5, 91; cp. paripuṇṇa-kāya Sn.548 (with explⁿ lakkhaṇehi puṇṇatāya at SnA 452). -- 3. (in spec. sense:) pudendum J.V,197 (subha°, the male member), 366. -- 4. (adj.) (--°) having the marks (of), characterized by, of such & such character A.I,102 (kamma°; bāla° & paṇḍita°, together with bāla- & paṇḍitanimitta); Miln.111 (sata-puñña°, of the Buddha); VvA.71 (para-sampatti-usuyyā-lakkhaṇā issā); PvA.17, 120. -- 5. (as t. t. in philosophy) specific attribute, characteristic (mark). In contrast to nimitta more a substantial attribute or primary characteristic (cp. VbhA.261). Compared with other terms of definition we get the foll.: rasa essential property, paccupaṭṭhāna recurring phenomenon, padatṭhāna immediate occasion DhsA.63 (trslⁿ Expos. I.84), cp. Cpd. 13 (where padaṭṭhāna is trsl^d as “proximate cause”). -- Ps.I,54 sq. (khandhānaṁ); II,108 (saccānaṁ), VbhA.85, 136 (with ref. to the Paṭiccasamuppāda, cp. Vism.528), 261 (fourfold, of kesā etc.); Vism.278 (with ref. to kammaṭṭhāna) 351 (4, of the dhātus: thaddha°, ābandhana°, paripācana°, vitthambhana°), 363 sq. (id.), 495 (ariya-saccānaṁ); VvA.38 (comp^d with ārammaṇa with ref. to jhāna). -- The 3 properties (tilakkhaṇaṁ) of existing things or of the phenomenal world are anicca, dukkha, anatta, or impermanence, suffering, unreality: thus at J.I,48 (dhamma-desanā ti-l-°muttā), 275; III,377 (through contemplating them arises vipassanā & pacceka-bodhi-ñāṇa). -- Abl. lakkhaṇato “by or qua characteristic,” “in its essential qualification,” often found in exegetical analysis in Commentary style comb^d with var. similar terms (atthato, kamato, nimittato etc.), e. g. Vism.351, 363, 495, 528; VbhA.46, 76, 83, 131, 261 (where Vism.351 has paripācana for uṇhatta); SnA 343. -- Cp. upa°, vi°, sa°. --āhata affected with a mark (of punishment or disgrace), branded Vin.I,76; VvA.66. --kusala clever at interpreting bodily marks or at fortune-telling from signs (cp. nemittaka) M.I,220; J.I,272. --kusalatā cleverness at (telling people’s fortune by) signs VvA.138. --paṭiggāhaka one who reads the signs, a soothsayer, wise man J.I,56. --pāṭhaka an expert in (interpreting) signs, fortune-teller J.I,455; II,194; V,211. --manta the secret science of (bodily) marks Sn.690 (but expl^d at SnA 488 as “lakkhaṇāni ca vedā ca,” thus taking it as Dvandva); DhA.III,194. --sampatti excellency of marks J.I,54. --sampanna endowed with (auspicious) signs Sn.409; J.I,455.

the 3 lakkhaṇas at Sn.1022 refer to the brahmin Bāvari. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lakkheti: {'def': '[denom. fr. lakkha] to mark, distinguish, characterize Nett 30. -- pp. lakkhita. -- Cp. upa°. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lakkh + e), 作标记，区别，表现…的特色。【过】 ~esi。【过分】~khita。【独】 ~khetvā。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'lakkhayati (lakkh+e), 作标记，区别，表现…的特色。【过】lakkhesi。【过分】lakkhita。【独】lakkhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lakkhika: {'def': '【形】幸运的。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& °ya (adj.) [fr. lakkhī] belonging to auspices, favoured by good luck Sdhp.105 (°ya); usually neg. alakkhika unlucky, unfortunate, ill-fated; either with appa-puñña of no merit, e. g. S.V,146=J.II,59; Vv 50⁸ (=nissirīka, kālakaṇṇi VvA.212); or pāpa wicked Vin.II,192 (of Devadatta). (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】幸运的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lakkhita: {'def': '(lakkheti 的【过分】)。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of lakkheti] see abhi°. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lakkheti 的【过分】) 作标记，区别，表现…的特色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lakkhī: {'def': '【阴】好运气，繁荣，财神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. lakṣmī] 1. luck, good fortune, success, personal welfare J.III,443 (comb^d with sirī splendour; expl^d by parivāra-sampatti & paññā respectively); IV,281 (expl^d as “sirī pi puññam pi paññā pi”). ‹-› 2. splendour, power Dāvs.I,6 (rajja° royal splendour); IV,38 (id.). -- 3. prosperity Dāvs.V,35 (°nidhāna Anurādhapura). (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】好运气，繁荣，财神。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lakuṇṭaka: {'def': '【形】矮子。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[dialectical] a dwarf Mhvs 23, 50 (°sarīratta); VbhA.26 (°pāda-purisa, cpd. with arūpa); PugA 227; C. on S.I,237. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Lakuṇḍaka,【阳】矮子，侏儒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lakuṇṭakatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lakuṇṭaka] dwarfishness J.VI,337. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lakuṭa: {'def': '[see laguḷa for etym.] a club, cudgel Miln.255 (in sequence daṇḍa-leḍḍu-lakuṭa-muggara), 301, 367, 368. See also laguḷa. (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lakāra: {'def': '【阳】帆。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】帆(可能由印尼语layara转化)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[for alaṅkāra, lit. “fitting up,” cp. Hindī & Marāthī langara, Tamil ilankaran “in meaning anchor.”] a sail J.II,112; Miln.378; Dāvs.IV,42; Vism.137 (v. l. BB. laṅkāra). (Page 578)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lalanā: {'def': '【阴】女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lalita: {'def': '【中】优雅，吉祥物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】优雅，吉祥物。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lalāṭa: {'def': 'see nalāṭa (cp. laṅgula). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lamba: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. lamb] hanging down, drooping, pendulous S.IV,341, 342 (°cūḷakā bhaṭa hirelings with large or drooping top-knots); J.II,185 (°tthana with hanging breasts); III,265 (°cūla-vihaṅgama); Dāvs II.61. --alamba not drooping, thick, short J.V,302; VI,3 (°tthaniyo). -- Cp. ā°, vi° & ālambana. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】悬挂的，下垂的。 ~ka, 【中】正在悬挂的东西，钟摆。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】悬挂的，下垂的。lambaka,【中】正在悬挂的东西，钟摆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lambati: {'def': '(lab+ṁ-a), 悬挂，吊。【过】lambi。【现分】lambanta, lambamāna。【独】lambitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[lamb; cp. Lat. limbus “limb,” which may be also in E. limp, lit. “hanging down.” -- The Dhtp defines the root as “ramba lamba avasaṁsane” (No. 199), as does Dhtm 284] to hang down, to droop, fall Mhvs 32, 70 (laggāni lambiṁsu), 71 (ākāse lambamānāni). ‹-› Fut. lambahīti (poet.) J.V,302 (=lambissati). -- Caus. lambeti to cause to hang up or to be suspended, to hang up Mhvs 34, 48. -- Caus. II. lambāpeti id. Mhvs 21, 15. -- pp. lambita. -- Cp. abhi°, pa°, vi°. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lab + ŋ-a), 悬挂，吊。【过】 lambi。【现分】~banta, ~bamāna。【独】 ~bitvā。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lambeti: {'def': '(Lambati的【使】), 使悬挂，使吊。【过】lamesi。【过分】lambita。【独】lambetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lambheti: {'def': '[Caus. of labh, for which usually labbheti (q. v. under labhati). The Sk. form is lambhayati. -- The Dhtm. (840) puts it down as a special root, although it occurs only in cpd. pa° in this special meaning: “labhi vañcane”] see palambheti (to deceive, dupe). It may be possibie that reading lampetvā at A.II,77 (v. l. lambitvā) is to be corrected to lambhetvā (comb^d with hāpetvā). --alambhavissa at S.V,146 is to be read alam abhavissa, as at J.II,59. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lambila: {'def': '【形】酸的(sour, acrid, astringent (of taste))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [reading not quite certain, cp. ambila] sour, acrid, astringent (of taste) Nd¹ 240; Nd² 540; Dhs.629; DhsA.320 (reads lapila, v. l. lampila; expl^d as “badara-sāḷava-kapiṭṭha-sāḷav’ādi”); Miln.56 (reads ambila). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lambin: {'def': '(‹lamb,【形】悬挂，弯下(hanging down, able to hang or bend down(with ref. to the membrum virile男根) Vin III.35 (“tassa bhikkhussa angajātaṁ dīghaṁ hoti lambati, tasmā lambīti vutto” Sam. Pās. I.278).)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lamb] hanging down, able to hang or bend down (with ref. to the membrum virile) Vin.III,35 (“tassa bhikkhussa aṅgajātaṁ dīghaṁ hoti lambati, tasmā lambī ti vutto” Sam. Pās. I.278). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lambita: {'def': '[pp. of lambeti] hanging down, suspended Mhvs 27, 38; 30, 67. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Landhati: {'def': 'see nandhati & pilandhana. Concerning l›n cp. laṅgula. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lapa: {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. lap: see lapati] talkative, talking, prattling; a talker, tattler, prattler, chatterer A.II,26; Th.1, 959=It.112; Vism.26 (doubled: lapa-lapa)= Nd¹ 226 (as lapaka-lapaka). (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lapaka: {'def': '[fr. lap] one who mutters, a droner out (of holy words for pay) D.I,8 (cp. Dial. I.15); A.III,111; J.III,349; Miln.228; DA.I,91. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lapana: {'def': '【中】嘴，演讲。 ~ja, 【阳】牙齿。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】嘴，演讲。lapanaja,【阳】牙齿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & lapanā (f.) 1. talking, muttering; esp. prattling or uttering indistinct words for the sake of begging, patter D.I,8; A.II,26; III,430; Nd¹ 389; Nett 94; Miln.383. As f. lapanā at Vbh.352; Vism.23 & 27 (def.); VbhA.482. -- 2. the mouth, in cpd. lapana-ja “mouth born,” i. e. tooth J.VI,218 (=mukhaja C.). ‹-› Cp. ālapana ālapanatā, ullapana. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lapanā: {'def': '【阴】小孩般说话，谄媚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】小孩般说话，谄媚。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lapati: {'def': '(lap + a), 谈话，讲话，小孩般说话。【过】 lapi。【过分】 lapita。【独】 lapitvā。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lap说+a), 谈话，讲话，小孩般说话。【过】lapi。【过分】lapita。【独】lapitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[lap, cp. Russ. lépet talk, Cymr. llêf voice. The Dhtp 188 & 599 defines lap with “vacana”] to talk, prattle, mutter Sn.776; It.122; Pv.I,8¹; II,6³. -- Cp. ullapati, palapati, samullapati. -- Caus. lapeti (and lāpeti, metri causâ) to talk to, to accost, beg S.I,31 (here meaning “declare”); Sn.929 (janaṁ na lāpayeyya=na lapayeyya lapanaṁ pajaheyya Nd¹ 389); DhA.II,157. ‹-› Infin. lapetave (only in Gāthā language cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 204) Ud.21. -- pp. lapita. -- Caus. II. lapāpeti DhA.II,157. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lapila: {'def': 'see lambila. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lapita: {'def': '[pp. of lapati] talked, uttered, muttered It.98. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lapāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Caus. II. lapāpeti of lap] causing to speak, speaking ThA.78. (Page 581)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lasagata: {'def': '(hattha) at A.II,165 is to be read (with v. l.) as lepagata, i. e. sticky (opp. suddha). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lasati: {'def': '(las+a), 照耀，玩。【过】lasi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[represents las to gleam, shine; sport, play; as well as laṣ to desire, long for. Cp. Lat. lascivus; Gr. lilai/omai; Goth. lustus=E., Ger. lust etc. -- The Dhtp 324 defs. las as “kanti”] to desire, long; to dance, play, sport; to shine; to sound forth. See lāsana, abhilāsa, upaḷāseti, alasa, vilāsa. -- Caus. lāseti to sport, to amuse (oneself) Vin.II,10 (with vādeti, gāyati, naccati). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(las + a), 照耀，玩。【过】 lasi。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lasikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. *lasikā] the fluid which lubricates the joints, synovic fluid Vin.I,202; D.II,293; M.III,90; S.IV,111; Sn.196; J.I,146; Miln.382. In detail at Vism.264, 362; VbhA.247. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】关节骨液。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】关节骨液(synovic fluid)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lasuṇa: {'def': '(梵 lawuna),【中】蒜(garlic，一种鳞茎草木 (Allium sativum))。大蒜具有抗菌、杀虫、解毒、消炎、健胃等功效，大蒜含有杀菌素，对流行性感冒病毒、葡萄球菌、链球菌、脑炎双球菌、伤寒杆菌、痢疾、霍乱、白喉等病菌都有杀灭的功用，大蒜中也含有激发人体吞噬细胞吞噬力的有效成份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】蒜（一种鳞茎草木 (Allium sativum)）。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Lasuna (nt.) [cp. Sk. laśuna] garlic Vin.II,140; IV,258; J.I,474; Vv 43⁶; VvA.186. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lasī: {'def': '【阴】脑髓。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [etym.?] brains J.I,493 (=matthalunga C.)= DhA.I,145. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】脑髓(brains)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Latā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. latā, connected with Lat. lentus flexible; Ohg. lindi soft, E. lithe; also Ohg. lintea lime tree; Gr. e)lάth fir tree] 1. a slender tree, a creeping plant, creeper A.I,202 (māluvā°); Vv 35⁵ (=vallī VvA.162); 47⁴ (kosātakī l.); J.I,464 (rukkha°, here perhaps better “branch”); DhA.I,392 (°pasādhana: see under mahā°); Miln.253, 351; VvA.12 (kappa°); PvA.51, 121; Vism.183 (where the foll. kinds are given: lābu, kumbhaṇḍī, sāmā, kāḷavallī, pūtilatā). --nāga° the iron wood tree: see under nāga; pūti° a sort of creeper (q. v.). On latā in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 130. -- 2. (fig.) an epithet of taṇhā (greed), as much as it strangles its victim Dhs.1059, 1136; Nett 24, 121. -- 3. (fig.) streak, flash, in vijjul-latā flash of lightning J.I,103.

--kamma creeper-work (comb^d with mālā-kamma) Vin.II,117, 152. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】藤蔓，攀缘植物。latākamma,【中】藤编。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】藤蔓，攀缘植物。 ~kamma, 【中】藤编。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lava: {'def': '【阳】一滴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一滴。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. lū] a small particle, a drop VvA.253 (lavaṅka a small mark); Sdhp.105 (°odaka). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lavaka: {'def': '[fr. lū] a cutter, reaper SnA 148 (v. l. lāvaka). See lāvaka. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lavana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lunāti] cutting, reaping Miln.360. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】割谷，收获。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】割谷，收获。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lavaṅga: {'def': '【中】丁香（热带地方的常绿乔木 (Eugeniacaryophyllata)，叶子长椭圆形，花淡红色，果实长球形。花供药用，有健胃驱风作用。种子可以榨丁香油，用作芳香剂）。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】丁香(cloves，热带地方的常绿乔木 (Eugenia caryophyllata)，叶子长椭圆形，花淡红色，果实长球形。花供药用，有健胃驱风作用。种子可以榨丁香油，用作芳香剂)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lavaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. late Vedic lavaṇa, cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 54] salt, lotion Miln.112; Sdhp.158. See loṇa. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】盐。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】盐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lavāpeti: {'def': 'Caus. of lunāti (q. v.). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laya: {'def': '【阳】短暂的时间的衡量。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. laya: see līyati] 1. a brief measure of time, usually comb^d with other expressions denoting a short moment, esp. frequent as khaṇa laya muhutta Vin.I,12; III,92; A.IV,137; cp. Dpvs.I,16 (khaṇe khaṇe laye Buddho sabbalokaṁ avekkhati). -- Vism.136 (īsakam pi layaṁ yantaṁ paggaṇheth’eva mānasaṁ). -- 2. time in music, equal time, rhythm Dāvs.IV,50; VvA.183 (dvādasannaṁ laya-bhedānaṁ vasena pabheda). Laḷati [lal, onomat;. cp. Lat. lallo “lull”; Sk. lalallā; Gr. laλos talkative; lalέw talk; Ger. lallen. The Dhtp distinguishes 2 roots: lal (=icchā) & laḷ (=vilāsa & upasevā)] to dally, sport, sing J.II,121 (ppr. laḷamānā); VvA.41 (laḷantī; with kīḷati), 57 (id.). -- Caus. laḷeti J.I,362 (ppr. lāḷentā); Vism.365; cp. upa° -- pp. laḷita: see pa°. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】短暂的时间的衡量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lañca: {'def': '【阳】贿赂。lañcakhādaka,【形】收受贿赂。lañcadāna,【中】行贿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】贿赂。 ~khādaka, 【形】收受贿赂。 ~dāna, 【中】行贿。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. lañca] a present, a bribe J.I,201; II,186; V,184; VI,408 (gahita, bribes received); DhA.I,269 (°ṁ adāsi); IV,1; PvA.209. The word is a word peculiar to the “Jātaka” literature.

--khādaka “eater of bribes,” one who feeds on bribes J.II,196; V,1. --ggāha taking of bribes J.V,109. --daṇḍaka a staff given as a present (?) J.VI,450 (v. l. volañjanaka°). --dāna gift of bribes, bribery J.III,205. --vittaka one who gets rich through bribes J.I,339. Lañcaka: Hardy in ed. of Netti, p. 278 suggests writing lañjaka & trsl^d “making known,” “exposition” (cp. Sk. lañj to declare], found only at Miln.137 & 217 in cpd. Saṁyutta-nikāya-vara-lañcaka (trlⁿ Rh. D.: “most excellent”); at Miln.242 & 258 in Majjhimanikāya vara°; at Miln.362 in Ekuttara-nikāya-vara°; and at Nett 2 in cpd. nayalañjaka. Trenckner (Miln.ed. p. 424) translates it as “excellent gift (to mankind).” (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lañcana: {'def': 'in “kārāpesi tilañcanaṁ” at Dpvs 20, 10 is not clear. We may have to correct reading into lañchanaṁ or lañchakaṁ. Oldenberg in his trslⁿ (p. 211) leaves the word out and remarks: “Probably this passage refers to the three pupphayāna mentioned in the Mahāvaṁsa (33, 22, where Geiger reads “pupphādhānāni tīṇi,” with trslⁿ “3 stone terraces for offerings of flowers”), though I do not know how to explain or to correct the word used here (tilañcanaṁ).” (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lañcha: {'def': '【阳】 lañchana, 【中】标志，印记，特征。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】。lañchana,【中】标志，印记，特徵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. lañch] a mark, an imprint J.II,425; VbhA.52. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lañchaka: {'def': '[fr. lañcha; doubtful] one who makes marks (expl^d by Cy. as “lakkhaṇa-kāraka”) J.IV,364, 366 (ti°, so expl^d by Cy. v. l. ni°). See nillañchaka & cp. lañcana (ti°). (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】作标记的人，压印者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】作标记的人，压印者。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lañchana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lañch] 1. stamp, mark, imprint VvA.89 (sasa°, of the moon); Dāvs II.23 (pada°). -- 2. the seal (of a letter or edict) SnA 172. -- Cp. lañcana. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lañchati: {'def': '[lañch Dhtp 54 “lakkhaṇe”] to stamp, to seal DhA.I,35 (sāsanaṁ rāja-muddāya lañchanto). -- Caus. lañcheti. -- 1. to seal J.I,452 (spelt lañjetvā); II,326; VI,385; SnA 577 (rāja-muddikāya); DhA.I,21. -- 2. to mark, paint, smear Vin.II,107=266 (mukhaṁ). ‹-› Caus. II. lañchāpeti to have marked or sealed (by king’s command) Vism.38 (“had his seal put to this order”; trsl.). -- Cp. nillaccheti. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lañch记号+a), Lañcheti (lañch记号+e), 作标记，压印，盖章。【过】lañchi, lañchesi。【独】lañchitvā, lañchetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(lanch + a), lañcheti (lanch + e), 作标记，压印，盖章。【过】 lañchi,~chesi。【独】 ~chitvā, ~chetvā。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lañchita: {'def': '[pp. of lañcheti] sealed J.I,227 (pihita-lañchitā vā loha-cātiyo). (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Lañchati’作标记’的【过分】), 已作记号，已盖章。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lañjaka: {'def': '[see lañcaka] in dīpa° stands as equivalent of dīpavaṁsa thus “story of the island” Dpvs 18, 2. Oldenberg (trslⁿ p. 204) translates “the island of Laṅkā.” (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lañjeti: {'def': 'see lañchati and valañjeti. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṅghaka: {'def': '【阳】跳跃者，表演杂技者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】跳跃者，表演杂技者。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. laṅgh] a jumper, tumbler, acrobat J.II,142; Miln.34, 191, 331. f. laṅghikā Vin.IV,285 (with naṭakā & sokajjhāyikā). (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṅghamayā: {'def': '(pl.) at J.V,408 is problematic. We should expect something like laṅghiyo or laṅghimayā in meaning “deer,” as it is comb^d with eneyyaka. The C. reads laṅghimayā (“like deer; jumping”?) & expl^s by nānā-ratana-mayā “made of var. jewels,” rather strange. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṅghana: {'def': '【中】跳跃，单脚跳。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. laṅgh] jumping, hopping J.I,430 (°naṭaka a tumbler, jumper, acrobat, cp. Fick, Soc. Gliederung 188, 190, 192); II,363, 431. Cp. ullaṅghanā, olaṅghanā. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】跳跃，单脚跳。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Laṅghati: {'def': '(laṅgh超越+ṁ-a), 跳过，单脚跳。【过】laṅghi。【独】laṅghitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(lagh + ŋ-a), 跳过，单脚跳。【过】 laṅghi。【独】 ~ghitvā。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[laṅgh, a by-form of lagh, as in laghu (see lahu) light, quick; Idg. *legh & *leṅgh, with meanings of both “quick” & “light” (or “little”) from the movement of jumping. Here belong Gr. elaxuζ little, e]lafrόs quick; Lat. levis (fr. *leghǔis), Goth. leihto= E. light; Ohg. lungar quick, Ger. ge-lingen to succeed. Further Lat. limen threshold. Perhaps also the words for “lungs,” viz. Ger. lunge, E. lights etc. -- The Dhtp 33 defines lagh (laṅgh) by “gati-sosanesu”] 1. to jump over (Acc.) step over, to hop J.III,272; V,472 (laṅghamāno yāti); Miln.85. -- 2. to make light of, disregard, neglect, transgress PvA.15; VvA.138. -- Cp. abhilaṅghati, ullaṅghati. -- Caus. laṅgheti (=laṅghati) to jump over (Acc.), lit. to make jump J.V,472 (vatiṁ); Th.2, 384 (Meruṁ laṅghetuṁ icchasi); Miln.85. -- ger. laṅghayitvā ThA.255, & (poet.) laṅghayitvāna J.I,431 (=attānaṁ laṅghitvā C.); Mhvs 25, 44 (pākāraṁ). ‹-› Cp. olaṅgheti. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṅgheti: {'def': '(lagh + e), 跳过，放出，违背。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 laṅghita。【独】~ghetvā。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(laṅgh超越+e), 跳过，放出，违背。【过】laṅghesi。【过分】laṅghita。【独】laṅghetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laṅghi: {'def': '(Laṅghī) (f.) [fr. laṅgh] 1. a kind of deer (?) J.VI,537. -- 2. doubtful of meaning & origin in phrase laṅghī-pitāmahā at J.II,363=III,226: “whose grandfather was a deer, or a jumper” (?); used in disparagingly addressing a crane. The C. to J.II,363 expl^s rather strangely as follows: laṅghī vuccati ākāse laṅghanato megho “(a) jumping deer is called the cloud because of its jumping in the air,” balākā ca nāma megha-saddena gabbhaṁ gaṇhantī ti “the cranes conceive by the sound of the cloud,” meghasaddo balākānaṁ pitā megho pitāmaho ti “the sound of the cloud is the father of the cranes & the cloud the grandfather. “ (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṅghāpana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. Caus. of laṅgh] making jump, raising, lifting Vism.143 (“launching”). (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṅghāpeti: {'def': '(laṅghati 的【使】)。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐(laṅghati‘跳过’的【使】)令跳过。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laṅghī: {'def': '【阳】跳跃者，门槛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】跳跃者，门槛。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Laṅgula: {'def': '【中】尾。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】尾。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. lāṅgula & lāṅgūla; also the ordinary P. forms naṅgula & naṅguṭṭha, to lag] the tail of an animal Mhvs 6, 6 (lāḷento laṅgulaṁ; v. l. naṅgulaṁ). See also naṅgula & (concerning l›n) landhati (=nandhati); nalāṭa (for laḷāta). (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṅgī: {'def': '【阴】门闩，棒（常用作栅栏，扣栓物）。(p269)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. lag] bolt, bar, barrier, obstruction, only metaphorically with ref. to avijjā M.I,142, 144; Pug.21; Dhs.390; VbhA.141. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】门闩，棒(常用作栅栏，扣栓物)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laṅkā: {'def': 'f. [〃] 楞伽, セイロン島 [= Sihaḷa, Tambapaṇṇi].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Laṅkāra: {'def': 'see lakāra. (Page 579)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṇḍa: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. laṇḍa (dial.). The Dhtm under No. 155 gives a root laḍ in meaning “jigucchana,” i. e. disgust] excrement, dung of animals, dirt; mostly used with ref. to elephants (haṭṭhi°), e. g. at J.II,19; DhA.I,163, 192; IV,156 (here also as assa° horse dung.) Cp. laṇḍikā. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 laṇḍikā, 【阴】（家畜的）粪。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】(家畜的)粪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Laṇḍikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. laṇḍa], only in aja° goat’s dirt, pellet of goat’s dung J.I,419; PvA.283. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṭukikā: {'def': '【阴】印度鹌鹑(quail)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Dimin. fr. laṭvāka; dial.] the Indian quail, Perdix chinensis D.I,91; M.I,449 (l. sakuṇikā); J.III,44, 174 sq. (quoted at SnA 358 & DhA.I,55); V,121; Miln.202; DA.I,257. -- Cp. Cunningham, Bharhut Tope, p. 58. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】印度鹌鹑。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Laṭṭhaka: {'def': '(adj.) [Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Sk. laṭaha, laḍaha, dialectical] beautiful, auspicious, lovely J.III,464, 493; IV,1, 477; DA.I,284. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Laṭṭhi: {'def': 'Laṭṭhikā,【阴】杖，小树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. yaṣṭi, with l for y; also in Prk. see Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 255 & cp. Geiger, P. Gr. § 46². The doublet yaṭṭhi also in Pāli] 1. a staff, stick D.I,105 (patoda° goad), 126 (id.); VvA.64 (id.); J.IV,310 (laṭṭhī hata= laṭṭhiyā hata G.); V,280; Miln.27. -- 2. stick of sugar cane (ucchu°) PvA.257. -- 3. sprout of a plant, offshoot J.III,161 (in simile); usually --°, as in aṅga° sprout ThA.226; dālika° of the d. creeper Th.2, 297; beḷuva° of the Vilva tree KhA 118; sala° of the Sal tree A.II,200. Found also in names of places, as Laṭṭhivana (J.I,83 etc.).

--madhu(ka) “cane-honey,” i. e. liquorice J.IV,537; DhA.IV,171 (°ka). (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'laṭṭhikā, 【阴】杖，小树。(p270)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Laṭṭhikā: {'def': '(f.)=laṭṭhi, only in Npl. as --° (cp. laṭṭhi 3), e. g. Amba° the grove of mango sprouts DA.I,41. (Page 580)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lehati: {'def': '﹐舔(to lick)。【过】lehayiṁsu(palahiṁsu)。grd. lehanīya。ger. lehitvā。见Lihati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see lihati. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lekha: {'def': '[fr. likh, cp. Sk. lekha & lekhā] 1. writing, inscription, letter, epistle J.VI,595 (silā° inscription on rock); Mhvs 5, 177 (lekhe sutvā); 27, 6; 33, 40 (°ṁ vissajjayi); Dāvs 5, 67 (cāritta°); Miln.42; SnA 164 (°vācāka reciting), 577. -- 2. chips, shavings Vin.II,110 (v. l. likha). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lekhaka: {'def': '【阳】书记，文书，作家。 ~khikā, 【阴】女文书。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. lekha] one who knows the art of writing, a scribe, secretary Vin.IV,8 (as a profession); IV,10 (=muddikā & gaṇakā, pl.); Miln.42. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】书记，文书，作家。lekhikā,【阴】女文书。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lekhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. likh] scratching, drawing, writing Dhtp 467. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 lekhā, 【阴】写作，信函，碑铭。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】lekhā,【阴】写作，信函，碑铭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lekhanī: {'def': '【阴】钢笔。lekhanīmukha,【中】鹅管笔的尖端，钢笔尖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】钢笔。 ~mukha, 【中】鹅管笔的尖端，钢笔尖。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lekhaṇī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. likh; cp. Epic Sk. lekhaṇī stencil Mbh 1, 78] an instrument for scratching lines or writing, a stencil, pencil A.II,200; J.I,230. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lekheita: {'def': '(pp. of lekheti),【过分】画(drawn (of lines), pencilled)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lekheti: {'def': '[Caus. of likhati or denom. of lekha] to (make a) scratch J.IV, 402. -- pp. lekhita. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lekhita: {'def': '[pp. of lekheti] drawn (of lines), pencilled Th.2, 256. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lekhā: {'def': '【阴】诗句，写作的艺术。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. likh; Vedic lekhā. See also rekhā & lekha] 1. streak, line VvA.277 (=rāji); canda° crescent moon [cp. Epic candralekhā Mbh 3, 1831] Vism.168; DhsA.151. -- 2. a scratch, line A.I,283; Pug.32; J.VI,56 (lekhaṁ kaḍḍhati). -- 3. writing, inscription, letter Vin.III,76 (°ṁ chindati destroy the letter); J.I,451 (on a phalaka); Miln.349 (°ācariya teacher of writing); PvA.20 (°paṇṇa, letter so read for likhā°). -- 4. the art of writing or drawing [=lipi Hemacandra], writing as an art. It is classed as a respectable (ukkaṭṭha) profession (sippa) Vin.IV,7; and mentioned by the side of muddā and gaṇanā Vin.IV,7, 128=I.77; cp. Vin.IV,305. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】诗句，写作的艺术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lepa: {'def': '【阳】涂层，抹灰泥。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. lip, see limpati; cp. Classic Sk. lepa stain, dirt] 1. smearing, plastering, coating over Vin.IV,303 (bāhira°); J.II,25 (mattikā°). -- 2. (fig.) plaster, i. e. that which sticks, affection, attachment, etc., in taṇhā° the stain of craving, & diṭṭhi° of speculation Nd¹ 55; Nd² 271^III, -- Note. lasagata at A.II,165 read with v. l. as lepa-gata, i. e. sticky. -- Cp. ā°, pa° (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】涂层，抹灰泥。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lepana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lip] smearing, plastering, anointing Vin.II,172 (kuḍḍa°); A.IV,107 (vāsana°), 111 (id.); J.II,117. Cp. abhi°, ā°, pa° (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】涂沫，涂层。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】涂沬，涂层。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lepeti: {'def': '(lip + e), 涂以灰泥，涂上，将（黏性或油污物质）涂在…。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 lepita, litta。【现分】 lepenta。【独】 lepetvā。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lip+e), 涂以灰泥，涂上，将(黏性或油污物质)涂在…。【过】lepesi。【过分】lepita, litta。【现分】lepenta。【独】lepetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see limpati. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lesa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. leśa particle; as Kern, Toev. s. v. points out, it occurs in Sk. also in the P. meaning at Mbh V,33, 5 although this is not given in BR. -- As “particle” only at Dhtp 444 in defⁿ of lisati] sham, pretext, trick Vin.III,169 (where ten lesas are enum^d, viz. jāti°, nāma°, gotta°, linga°, āpatti°, patta°, cīvara°, upajjhāya°, ācariya°, senāsana°); J.II,11; VI,402. --lesa-kappa pretext Vin.II,166; Vv 84⁴³ (=kappiya-lesa VvA.348); Th.1, 941; DA.I,103. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】琐事，藉口，诡计。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】琐事，藉口，诡计。lesamatta, 【过分】已沉浸於琐事。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Leyya: {'def': '【形】适合被舔或啜饮的。【中】黏液的食物。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. nt.) [grd. of lih: see lihati] to be licked or sipped; nt. mucilaginous food (opp. peyya liquid) A.IV,394 (+peyya); Miln.2 (id.). (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】适合被舔或啜饮的。【中】黏液的食物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Leḍḍu: {'def': '【阳】土块。 ~pita, 【阳】掷石所落之所（长度，即：由一个中等男子，站在一处所掷出的石子所落之处的距离）。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[dial. Sk. leṣṭu›*leṭṭhu›*leṭṭu›leḍḍu; also Prk. leḍu & leṭṭhu: Pischel, § 304; cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 62] a clod of earth S.V,146=J.II,59 (°ṭṭhāna); J.I,19, 175; III,16; VI,405; Miln.255; SnA 222 (ākāse khitta, in simile); Vism.28 (trslⁿ “stone”), 360 (°khaṇḍ’ādīni), 366 (containing gold), 419; VbhA.66 (°khaṇḍā); VvA.141; PvA.284. -- The throwing of clods (stones?) is a standing item in the infliction of punishments, where it is grouped with daṇḍa (stick) and sattha (sword), or as leḍḍu-daṇḍ’ādi, e. g. at M.I,123; D.II,336, 338 (v. l. leṇḍu); J.II,77; III,16; VI,350; Vism.419; DhA.I,399 (v. l. leṇḍu); III,41; IV,77; VvA.141. -- Note. leḍḍūpaka in cuṇṇaṁ vā telaṁ vā leḍḍūpakena etc. at DhsA.115 read as vālaṇḍupakena, as at Vism.142.

--pāta “throw of a clod,” a certain measure of (not too far) a distance Vin.IV,40; Vism.72; DhsA.315 (trslⁿ “a stone’s throw”). (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】土块。leḍḍupita,【阳】掷石所落之所(长度，即：由一个中等男子，站在一处所掷出的石子所落之处的距离)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Leḍḍuka: {'def': '=leḍḍu; Vism.28. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Leṇa: {'def': '【中】安全，洞穴，石室。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】安全，洞穴，石室。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& lena) (nt.) [*Sk. layana, fr. lī in meaning “to hide,” cp. Prk. leṇa] 1. a cave (in a rock), a mountain cave, used by ascetics (or bhikkhus) as a hermitage or place of shelter, a rock cell. Often enum^d with kuṭi & guhā, e. g. Vin.IV,48; Miln.151; Vbh.251 (n.). At Vin.II,146 it is given as collective name for 5 kinds of hermitages, viz. vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, hammiya, guhā. The explⁿ of leṇa at VbhA.366 runs as follows: “pabbataṁ khaṇitvā vā pabbhārassa appahonakaṭṭhāne kuḍḍaṁ uṭṭhāpetvā vā katasenāsanaṁ,” i. e. opportunity for sitting & lying made by digging (a cave) in a mountain or by erecting a wall where the cave is insufficient (so as to make the rest of it habitable). Cp. Vin.I,206=III,248 (pabbhāraṁ sodhāpeti leṇaṁ kattukāmo) Mhvs 16, 12; 28, 31 sq. (n); Miln.200 (mahā°). -- 2. refuge, shelter, (fig.) salvation (sometimes in sense of nibbāna). In this meaning often comb^d with tāṇa & saraṇa, e. g. at D.I,95; S.IV,315 (maṁ-leṇa refuge with me;+maṁtāṇa); IV,372 (=nibbāna); A.I,155 sq. (n); J.II,253; DA.I,232. Cp. Vin.III,155. leṇ’atthaṁ for refuge Vin.II,164 (n); J.I,94. --aleṇa without a refuge Ps.I,127; II,238; Pv.II,2⁵ (=asaraṇa PvA.80).

--gavesin seeking shelter or refuge J.II,407=IV.346. --guhā a mountain cave J.III,511. --dvāra the door of the (rock) hermitage Vism.38; DhA.III,39. --pabbhāra “cave-slope,” cave in a mountain DhA.IV,170. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Licchavi: {'def': 'm. 離車族 [ワッジー国の種族名, 首都は Vesālī].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Lihati: {'def': '(lih舔+a)(Sk. leḍhi or līḍhe, also lihati), 舔(to lick)。【过】lihi。【独】lihitvā。【现分】lihamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(lih + a), 舔。【过】 lihi。【独】 lihitvā。【现分】 lihamāna。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[lih, Sk. leḍhi or līḍhe, also lihati. Cp. Lat. lingo, Gr. lei/xw; Goth. bilaigōn, Ags. liccian=E. lick, Ger. lecken. -- The Dhtp 335 expl^s lih by “assādane,” i. e. taste] to lick; pres. lehati J.II,44; aor. lehayiṁsu PvA.198 (v. l. for palahiṁsu). Cp. parilehisaṁ Vv 81²¹; VvA.316; ger. lehitvā DA.I,136 (sarīraṁ); VvA.314. ‹-› pp. līḷha (?). Cp. leyya. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Likhana: {'def': '【中】写作，刻纹。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】写作，刻纹。likhanakāle, 捏造(土块)时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. late Sk. likhana; fr. likh] scratching, cutting, writing J.V,59 (a golden tablet for writing on). Cp. ullikhana. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Likhati: {'def': '(likh + a), 写，铭刻，雕刻，乱写。【过】 likhi。【过分】 likhita。【现分】 likhanta。【独】 likhitvā。【不】 likhituŋ。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(likh刻+a), 写，铭刻，雕刻，乱写。【过】likhi。【过分】likhita。【现分】likhanta。【独】likhitvā。【不】likhituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': ' [likh; Vedic likhati, also rikh in Ved. ārikhati (R.V, VI,53, 7), cp. with palatal riśati, liśati. Connected with Gr. e)rei/kw to tear; Lith. rë̃kti to cut bread, to plough; Ohg. rīga=Ags. rāw=E. row. -- Dhtp 467 simply expl^s by “lekhane”] 1. to scratch; to cut, carve; write, inscribe M.I,127 (rūpāni); J.II,372 (suvaṇṇa-patte); IV,257 (id.), 488, 489 (jāti-hingulakena); DhA.I,182; PvA.145 (nāmaṁ likhi wrote his name). --paṇṇaṁ l. to write a letter J.II,174; VI,369 (paṇṇe on a leaf). -- 2. to shave (off), plane Vin.II,112 (inf. likhituṁ). -- pp. likhita. -- Cp. vi.° -- Caus. I. lekheti (q. v.). Caus. II. likhāpeti to cause to be cut or carved [cp. BSk. likhāpayati Divy 547] Vin.II,110; SnA 577; to cause to be written Miln.42. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Likhita: {'def': '[pp. of likhati] 1. carved, cut, worked (in ivory etc.), in cpd. saṅkha° brahmacariya the moral life, like a polished shell D.I,63; S.II,219, expl^d at DA.I,181 as “likhita-saṅkha-sadisa dhota-saṅkha-sappaṭibhāga.”‹-› 2. written, inscribed J.IV,7 (likhitāni akkharāni); Miln.42 (lekha l.). -- 3. made smooth, shaved J.VI,482 (cāpa). -- 4. marked, proscribed, made an outlaw Vin.I,75. ‹-› Cp. ullikhita. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Likhitaka: {'def': '【阳】已经被规定的人，丧失公权者。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [likhita+qualifying ending ka] one who has been proscribed, an outlaw Vin.I,75 (cora). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】已经被规定的人，丧失公权者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Likhā: {'def': 'in likhā-paṇṇa at PvA.20 is faulty for lekhā° (lekha°) letter, cp. lekha-pattra letter Mālatīm 172, 7. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Likhāpeti: {'def': '(likhati 的【使】), 令人写。【过】likhāpesi。【独】likhāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(likhati 的【使】), 令人写。【过】 ~esi。【独】 ~petvā。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Likkhā: {'def': '(f.) [*Sk. likṣā egg of a louse, as measure equal to 8 trasareṇu (BR.). -- Connected with Lat. ricinus a kind of vermin (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.)] a kind of measure VbhA.343 (36 rattareṇus equal to one likkhā, 7 likkhās equal to 1 ūkā); KhA 43 (°matta). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】虮子（虱子的卵），虮（是长度的一个单位）。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵liksā),【阴】虮子(an egg of a louse蝨子的卵)，虮(是长度的一个单位)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Likuca: {'def': '【阳】面包果（见 Labuja）。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】面包果(bread-fruit tree，见 Labuja)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Limpana: {'def': '【中】污点。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lip] soiling, smearing Dhtp 385. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】污点。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Limpati: {'def': '(lip + ŋ-a), 涂污，沾染，涂油。【过】 limpi。【过分】 litta。【独】limpitvā。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Lippati (lip涂+ṁ-a), 涂污，沾染，涂油(to smear, plaster, stain)。【过】limpi。【过分】litta。【独】limpitvā。Pass. lippati to be soiled (by), to get stained (in character)。alippamāna ppr.。pp. litta: see ava°, ul°, vi.° -- Cp. also ālimpeti, palimpeti, vilimpati. -- Caus. I. lepeti to cause to be plastered J.VI,432. -- Caus. II. limpāpeti to cause to be plastered or anointed', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': ' [lip, cp. repa stain, lepa ointment, stain; Gr. li/pos grease, fat, liparόs fat, a)lei/fw to anoint; Lat. lippus; Lith. limpû to stick, Goth. bi-leiban, Ohg. bilīban to stay behind, to stay, E. leave & live, Ger. leben. The Dhtp (385) simply expl^s by “limpana”] to smear, plaster, stain; usually in pass. (or med.) sense “to get soiled, to dirty oneself” Th.2, 388; PvA.215. Doubtful in Sn.passages, where both limpati & lippati are found as readings, e. g. Sn.778 in Text lippati, but Niddesa reading limpati (Nd¹ 55); Sn.811 lipp°, Nd¹ 133 limp°; Sn.1040, 1042 lipp°, Nd² 549 limp.° -- Pass. lippati to be soiled (by), to get stained (in character) Sn.250, 547, 625, 778, 913, 1040; cp. Sn.71 (alippamāna ppr.). -- pp. litta: see ava°, ul°, vi.° -- Cp. also ālimpeti, palimpeti, vilimpati. -- Caus. I. lepeti to cause to be plastered J.VI,432. -- Caus. II. limpāpeti to cause to be plastered or anointed Mhvs 34, 42 (cetiyaṁ °āpetvāna). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Limpeti: {'def': '(lip + e), 涂油，涂污，涂以灰泥。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 limpita。【现分】 limpenta。【独】 ~petvā。【使】 limpāpeti。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lip涂+e), 涂油，涂污，涂以灰泥。【过】limpesi。【过分】limpita。【现分】limpenta。【独】limpetvā。【使】limpāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lipi: {'def': '【阴】写作，信函。 ~kāra, 【阳】作家，书记，文书。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. lip; late Sk. lipi),【阴】写作，信函(the alphabet; a letter of the alphabet; writing)。lipikāra,【阳】作家，书记，文书。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. lip; late Sk. lipi] the alphabet; a letter of the alphabet; writing Miln.79. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lisati: {'def': '[cp. dial. Sk. liśate=Vedic riśate] to break off, tear off, pull; only at Dhtp 444 expl^d by “lesa.” (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Litta: {'def': '(limpati 的【过分】)。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(limpati的【过分】) 涂油，涂污，涂以灰泥。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Liṅga: {'def': '【中】告示，标志，特徵，特色，(男性)生殖器官(DhsA.#632：‘liṅgan’ti saṇṭhānaṁ.)，〔语法〕词性。liṅgavipallāsa,【阳】liṅgaparivattana,【中】性或性别的变化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】告示，标志，特征，特色，生殖器官，〔语法〕词性。 ~vipallāsa, 【阳】 ~parivattana, 【中】性或性别的变化。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. liṅg; late Vedic & (pre-eminently) Class. Sk. linga] 1. characteristic, sign, attribute, mark, feature M.I,360; S.V,278; Sn.601 sq. (=saṇṭhāna SnA 464); Vin.IV,7 (two: hīna & ukkaṭṭha); J.I,18; IV,114 (gihi°), 130; Miln.133 (sāsana°), 162 (dve samaṇassa lingāni), 405 (lingato ca nimittato ca etc.); Vism.184; DhsA.64 (=saṇṭhāna Tīkā: Expos. 86). -- 2. mark of sex, sexual characteristic, pudendum (male as well as female, as neither m. nor f.) Vin.III,35 (purisa°); J.V,197 (°saṇṭhāna); KhA 110 (itthi°); SnA 48 (°sampatti), 51 (id.), 300 (itthi°); DhsA.321 sq. (itthi°). -- 3. (in grammar) mark of sex, (characteristic) ending, gender SnA 397. °vipallāsa change or substitution of gender PvA.7, 33, 58, 87, 157. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Liṅgeti: {'def': '[denom. fr. liṅg] 1. to embrace, in poet. ger. liṅgiya (as if fr. lingati) Th.2, 398 (=ālingetvā ThA.260). See ā°. -- 2. to characterize: see ul°. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Liṅgika: {'def': '【形】属于性或生殖器官的。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】性或生殖器官的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. linga] having or being a characteristic Vism.210 (of nāma); KhA 107 (id.). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Liṅgāla: {'def': '[cp. Sk. lingālikā a kind of mouse] antelope (?) Pgdp 10. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lobha: {'def': '【阳】贪欲，妄羡。 ~nīya, 【形】被妄想的，令人想要的。 ~mūlaka,【形】有贪欲为其根的。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic & Epic Sk. lobha; fr. lubh: see lubbhati] covetousness, greed. Defined at Vism.468 as “lubbhanti tena, sayaṁ vā lubbhati, lubbhana-mattam eva vā taṁ,” with several comparisons following. ‹-› Often found in triad of lobha, dosa, moha (greed, anger, bewilderment, forming the three principles of demerit: see kusala-mūla), e. g. at A.IV,96; It.83, 84; Vism.116; Dukp 9, 18 sq. See dosa & moha. -- D.III,214, 275; S.I,16, 43, 63, 123 (bhava°); V,88; A.I,64 (°kkhaya), 160 (visama°), cp. D.III,70 sq.; II,67; Sn.367, 371, 537 (°kodha), 663, 706, 864, 941 (°pāpa); Nd¹ 15, 16, 261; J.IV,11 (kodha, dosa, l.); Dhs.982, 1059; Vbh.208, 341, 381, 402; Nett 13, 27; Vism.103; VbhA.18; PvA.7, 13, 17, 89 (+dosa), 102; VvA.14; Sdhp.52 (°moha), 266. --alobha disinterestedness D.III,214; Dhs.32.

--dhammā (pl.) affection of greed, things belonging to greed; (adj.) (of) greedy character M.I,91; III,37; D.I,224, 230; S.IV,111; A.III,350; J.IV,11. --mūla the root of greed Vism.454 (eightfold; with dosa-mūla & moha-mūla). (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹lubh执取),【阳】贪欲(greed)，妄羡(covetousness)。SA.3.2./I,137.︰lubbhanalakkhaṇo lobho, dussanalakkhaṇo doso, muyhanalakkhaṇo mohoti.(贪欲相，称为贪欲；忿怒相，称为瞋；糊涂相，称为痴。) lobhanīya,【形】被妄想的，令人想要的。lobhamūlaka,【形】有贪欲为其根的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lobhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lobha] being greedy Th.2, 343 (=lobh’uppāda ThA.240). (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lobhaniya: {'def': '(Lobhanīya, Lobhaneyya) (adj.) [grd. formation fr. lobha] 1. belonging to greed “of the nature of greed” causing greed It.84 (°eyya). See rajaniya. -- 2. desirable Miln.361 (paduma). (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Locaka: {'def': '【无】拉出者，连根拔起的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. Loc. Caus. of luñc; cp. Sk. luñcaka] one who pulls out D.I,167 (kesa-massu°, habit of cert. ascetics); M.I,308 (id.). (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】拉出者，连根拔起的人。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Locana: {'def': '【中】眼睛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. Loc. Caus. of luñcati] pulling, tearing out D.I,167 (kesa-massu°); A.I,296; Pug.55. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [fr. loc or lok to see; Dhtp 532 & Dhtm 766: loc= dassana] the eye; adj. (-°) having eyes. (of . . .) Pv.I,11⁵ (miga-manda°); PvA.57, 90 (pingala°). (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】眼睛。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Loceti: {'def': 'see luñcati. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lodda: {'def': '[cp. *Sk. rodhra; on sound changes see Geiger, P.Gr. 44, 62²] N. of a tree J.V,405; VI,497. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Loha: {'def': '【中】金属，铜。 ~kaṭāha, 【阳】铜容器。 ~kāra, 【阳】铜匠，铜器制造人。 ~kumbhī, 【阴】铜锅。 ~guḷa, ~piṇḍa, 【阳】金属块。 ~jāla,【中】铜网。 ~thālaka, 【阳】铜碟子，铜碗。 ~pāsāda, 【阳】铜殿（在阿奴罗富罗 (Anuradhapura) 皇宫佛殿的名字，布满铜瓦）。 ~bhaṇḍa,【中】铜器。 ~maya, 【形】铜制的。 ~māsaka, 【阳】铜币。 ~salakā,【阴】铜线，铜针。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Cp. Vedic loha, of Idg. *(e)reudh “red”; see also rohita & lohita] metal, esp. copper, brass or bronze. It is often used as a general term & the individual application is not always sharply defined. Its comprehensiveness is evident from the classification of loha at VbhA.63, where it is said lohan ti jātilohaṁ, vijāti°, kittima°, pisāca° or natural metal, produced metal, artificial (i. e. alloys), & metal from the Pisāca district. Each is subdivided as follows: jāti°=ayo, sajjhaṁ, suvaṇṇaṁ, tipu, sīsaṁ, tambalohaṁ, vekantakalohaṁ; vijāti°=nāga-nāsika°; kittima°=kaṁsalohaṁ, vaṭṭa°, ārakūṭaṁ; pisāca°=morakkhakaṁ, puthukaṁ, malinakaṁ, capalakaṁ, selakaṁ, āṭakaṁ, bhallakaṁ, dūsilohan. The description ends “Tesu pañca jātilohāni pāḷiyaṁ visuṁ vuttān’eva (i. e. the first category are severally spoken of in the Canon). Tambalohaṁ vekantakan ti imehi pana dvīhi jātilohehi saddhiṁ sesaṁ sabbam pi idha lohan ti veditabbaṁ.” -- On loha in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131. Cp. A.III,16=S.V,92 (five alloys of gold: ayo, loha, tipu, sīsaṁ, sajjhaṁ); J.V,45 (asi°); Miln.161 (suvaṇṇam pi jātivantaṁ lohena bhijjati); PvA.44, 95 (tamba°=loha), 221 (tatta-loha-secanaṁ pouring out of boiling metal, one of the five ordeals in Niraya).

--kaṭāha a copper (brass) receptacle Vin.II,170. --kāra a metal worker, coppersmith, blacksmith Miln.331. --kumbhī an iron cauldron Vin.II,170. Also N. of a purgatory J.III,22, 43; IV,493; V,268; SnA 59, 480; Sdhp.195. --guḷa an iron (or metal) ball A.IV,131; Dh.371 (mā °ṁ gilī pamatto; cp. DhA.IV,109). --jāla a copper (i. e. wire) netting PvA.153. --thālaka a copper bowl Nd¹ 226. --thāli a bronze kettle DhA.I,126. --pāsāda “copper terrace,” brazen palace, N. of a famous monastery at Anurādhapura in Ceylon Vism.97; DA.I,131; Mhvs passim. --piṇḍa an iron ball SnA 225. --bhaṇḍa copper (brass) ware Vin.II,135. --maya made of copper, brazen Sn.670; Pv.II,6⁴. --māsa a copper bean Nd¹ 448 (suvaṇṇa-channa). --māsaka a small copper coin KhA 37 (jatu-māsaka, dāru-māsaka+); DhsA.318. --rūpa a bronze statue Mhvs 36, 31. --salākā a bronze gong-stick Vism.283. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】金属，铜。lohakaṭāha,【阳】铜容器。lohakāra,【阳】铜匠，铜器制造人。lohakumbhī,【阴】铜锅。lohaguḷa, lohapiṇḍa,【阳】金属块。lohajāla,【中】铜网。lohathālaka,【阳】铜碟子，铜碗。lohapāsāda,【阳】铜殿 (在阿奴罗富罗 (Anuradhapura) 皇宫佛殿的名字，布满铜瓦)。lohabhaṇḍa,【中】铜器。lohamaya,【形】铜制的。lohamāsaka,【阳】铜币。lohasalakā,【阴】铜线，铜针。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lohatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. loha] being a metal, in (suvaṇṇassa) aggalohatā the fact of gold being the best metal VvA.13. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lohita: {'def': '【中】血。【形】红色的。 ~ka, 【形】红色的。 ~kkha, 【形】有红眼睛的。 ~candana, 【中】紫檀（见 Mañjiṭṭhā）。 ~pakkhandikā, 【阴】赤痢。 ~bhakkha, 【形】吸血的。 ~tuppādaka, 【阳】使（佛陀）淤血。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】血。【形】红色的。lohitaka,【形】红色的。lohitakasiṇa﹐红遍。lohitakkha,【形】有红眼睛的。lohitacandana,【中】紫檀(见 Mañjiṭṭhā)(ye keci sāragandhā, lohitacandanaṁ tesaṁ aggamakkhāyati.一切树香中，赤栴檀香为其最上)。lohitapakkhandikā,【阴】赤痢。lohitabhakkha,【形】吸血的。lohitatuppādaka,【阳】使(佛陀)淤血。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [cp. Vedic lohita & rohita; see also P. rohita “red”] 1. (adj.) red: rarely by itself (e. g. M.II,17), usually in cpds. e. g. °abhijāti the red species (q. v.) A.III,383; °kasiṇa the artifice of red D.III,268; A.I,41; Dhs.203; Vism.173; °candana red sandal (unguent) Miln.191. Otherwise rohita. -- 2. (nt.) blood; described in detail as one of the 32 ākāras at KhA 54 sq.; Vism.261, 360; VbhA.245. -- Vin.I,203 (āmaka°), 205 (°ṁ mocetuṁ); A.IV,135 (saṭṭhi-mattānaṁ bhikkhūnaṁ uṇhaṁ l. mukhato uggañchi; cp. the similar passage at Miln.165); Sn.433; Pv.I,6⁷; I,9¹ (expl^d as ruhira PvA.44); Vism.261 (two kinds; sannicita° and saṁsaraṇa°), 409 (the colour of the heartblood in relation to states of mind); VbhA.66; PvA.56, 78, 110.

--akkha having red (blood-shot) eyes (of snakes & yakkhas) Vv 52² (cp. VvA.224: ratta-nayanā; yakkhānaṁ hi nettāni ati-lohitāni honti); J.VI,180. --uppāda (the crime of) wounding A Tathāgata, one of the anantariya-kammas VbhA.427; cp. Tathāgatassa lohitaṁ uppādeti Miln.214. --uppādaka one who sheds the blood of an Arahant Vin.I,89, 136, 320; V,222. --kumbhi a receptacle for blood Ud.17 (with ref. to the womb). --doṇi a bloody trough Vism.358; VbhA.62. --pakkhandikā (or °pakkhandik’ābādha) bloody diarrhœa, dysentery M.I,316; D.II,127; Ud.82; J.II,213; Miln.134, 175; DhA.III,269. --homa a sacrifice of blood D.I,9; DA.I,93. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lohitaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lohita] 1. red M.II,14; A.IV,306, 349; Ap. 1; Dhs.247, 617. --°upadhāna a red pillow D.I,7; A.I,137; III,50; IV,94, 231, 394; °sāli red rice Miln.252. -- 2. bloody Pv.I,7⁸ (pūti° gabbha); Vism.179, 194. (Page 590)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lohitaṅka: {'def': '【阳】红宝石。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[lohita+aṅka] a ruby A.IV,199, 203; Ap 2; Vv 36³; VvA.304. See masāragalla for further refs. ‹-› Note. The word is not found in Vedic and Class. Sk.; a later term for “ruby” is lohitaka. In the older language lohitāṅga denotes the planet Mars. (Page 590)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】红宝石(ruby)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Loka: {'def': '[cp. Vedic loka in its oldest meaning “space, open space.” For etym. see rocati. To the etym. feeling of the Pāli hearer loka is closely related in quality to ruppati (as in pop. etym. of rūpa) and rujati. As regards the latter the etym. runs “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati” S.IV,52, cp. Nd² 550, and loka=lujjana DhsA.47, 308: see lujjana. The Dhtp 531 gives root lok (loc) in sense of dassana] world, primarily “visible world,” then in general as “space or sphere of creation,” with var. degrees of substantiality. Often (unspecified) in the comprehensive sense of “universe.” Sometimes the term is applied collectively to the creatures inhabiting this or var. other worlds, thus, “man, mankind, people, beings.” -- Loka is not a fixed & def. term. It comprises immateriality as well as materiality and emphasizes either one or the other meaning according to the view applied to the object or category in question. Thus a trslⁿ of “sphere, plane, division, order” interchanges with “world.” Whenever the spatial element prevails we speak of its “regional” meaning as contrasted with “applied” meaning. The fundamental notion however is that of substantiality, to which is closely related the specific Buddhist notion of impermanence (loka=lujjati). -- 1. Universe: the distinctions between the universe (cp. cakkavāḷa) as a larger whole and the world as a smaller unit are fluctuating & not definite. A somewhat wider sphere is perhaps indicated by sabba-loka (e. g. S.I,12; IV,127, 312; V,132; It.122; Mhvs 1, 44; cp. sabbāvanta loka D.I,251; III,224), otherwise even the smaller loka comprises var. realms of creation. Another larger division is that of loka as sadevaka, samāraka, sabrahmaka, or the world with its devas, its Māra and its Brahmā, e. g. S.I,160, 168, 207; II,170; III,28, 59; IV,158; V,204; A.I,259 sq.; II,24 sq.; III,341; IV,56, 173; V,50; It.121; Nd¹ 447 (on Sn.956), to which is usually added sassamaṇa-brāhmaṇī pajā (e. g. D.I,250, see loci s. v. pajā). With this cp. Dh.45, where the divisions are paṭhavī, Yamaloka, sadevaka (loka), which are expl^d at DhA.I,334 by paṭhavī=attabhāva; Yamaloka=catubbidha apāyaloka; sadevaka=manussaloka devalokena saddhiṁ. -- The universe has its evolutional periods: saṁvaṭṭati and vivaṭṭati D.II,109 sq. The Buddha has mastered it by his enlightenment: loko Tathāgatena abhisambuddho It.121. On loka, lokadhātu (=cosmos) and cakkavāḷa cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie p. 180, 181. ‹-› 2. Regional meaning. -- (a) in general. Referring to this world, the character of evanescence is inherent in it; referring to the universe in a wider sense, it implies infinity, though not in definite terms. There is mention of the different metaphysical theories as regards cosmogony at many places of the Canon. The antânantikā (contending for the finitude or otherwise of the world) are mentioned as a sect at D.I,22 sq. Discus‹-› sions as to whether loka is sassata or antavā are found e. g. at M.I,426, 484; II,233; S.III,182, 204; IV,286 sq.; A.II,41; V,31, 186 sq.; Ps.I,123, 151 sq.; Vbh.340; Dhs.1117. Views on consistency of the world (eternal or finite; created or evolved etc.) at D.III,137; cp. S.II,19 sq. Cp. also the long and interesting discussion of loka as suñña at S.IV,54 sq.; Ps.II,177 sq.; Nd² 680; -- as well as M.II,68 (upanīyati loko addhuvo, and “attāṇo loko, assakoloko” etc.); “lokassa anto” is lit. unattainable: A.II,50=S.I,62; IV,93; but the Arahant is “lok’antagū,” cp. A.IV,430. -- As regards their order in space (or “plane”) there are var. groupings of var. worlds, the evidently popular one being that the world of the devas is above and the nirayas below the world of man (which is “tiriyaṁ vâpi majjhe”): Nd² 550. The world of men is as ayaṁ loko contrasted with the beyond, or paro loko: D.III,181; S.IV,348 sq.; A.I,269; IV,226; Sn.779 (n’āsiṁsati lokaṁ imaṁ parañ ca); or as idhaloka D.III,105. The defⁿ of ayaṁ loko at Nd¹ 60 is given as: sak’attabhāva, saka-rūpa-vedanā etc., ajjhatt’āyatanāni, manussa-loka, kāmadhātu; with which is contrasted paro loko as: parattabhāva, para-rūpavedanā, bāhir’āyatanāni, devaloka, rūpa- & arūpadhātu. -- The rise and decay of this world is referred to as samudaya and atthaṅgama at S.II,73; III,135; IV,86; A.V,107. -- Cp. D.III,33 (attā ca loko ca); Mhvs 1, 5 (lokaṁ dukkhā pamocetuṁ); 28, 4 (loko ‘yaṁ pīḷito); PvA.1 (vijjā-caraṇa-sampannaṁ yena nīyanti lokato). -- Other divisions of var. kinds of “planes” are e. g. deva° A.I,115, 153; III,414 sq.; Brahma° Vbh.421; Mhvs 19, 45; Yama° Dh.44; S.I,34; nara° Mhvs 5, 282. See also each sep. head-word, also peta° & manussa°. ‹-› The division at Nd¹ 550 is as follows: niraya°, tiracchāna°, pittivisaya°, manussa°, deva° (=material); upon which follow khandha°, dhātu°, āyatana° (=immaterial). Similarly at Nd¹ 29, where apāya° takes the place of niraya°, tiracchāna°, pittivisaya°. -- Another threefold division is saṅkhāra°, satta°, okāsa° at Vism.204, with expl^ns: “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā” ti= saṅkhāraloka; “sassato loko ti vā asassato loko” ti= sattaloka; “yāvatā candima-suriyā pariharanti disā ‘bhanti virocamānā” etc. (=M.I,328; A.I,227; cp. J.I,132) =okāsaloka. The same explⁿ in detail at SnA 442. -- Another as kāma°, rūpa°, arūpa°: see under rūpa; another as kilesa°, bhava°, indriya° at Nett 11, 19. Cp. saṅkhāra-loka VbhA.456; dasa lokadhātuyo (see below) S.I,26. -- 3. Ordinary & applied meaning. -- (a) division of the world, worldly things S.I,1, 24 (loke visattikā attachment to this world; opp. sabba-loke anabhirati S.V,132). --loke in this world, among men, here D.III,196 (ye nibbutā loke); It.78 (loke uppajjati); DA.I,173 (id.); Vbh.101 (yaṁ loke piya-rūpaṁ etc.); Pv.II,1¹³ (=idaṁ C.); KhA 15, 215. See also the diff. def^ns of loke at Nd² 552. -- loka collectively “one, man”: kicchaṁ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca, etc. D.II,30. Also “people”: Laṅka-loka people of Ceylon Mhvs 19, 85; cp. jana in similar meaning. Derived from this meaning is the use in cpds. (°-) as “usual, every day, popular, common”: see e. g. °āyata, °vajja, °vohāra. -- (b) “thing of the world,” material element, physical or worldly quality, sphere or category (of “materiality”). This category of loka is referred to at Vbh.193, which is expl^d at VbhA.220 as follows: “ettha yo ayaṁ ajjhatt’ādi bhedo kāyo pariggahīto, so eva idha-loko nāma.” In this sense 13 groups are classified according to the number of constituents in each group (1--12 and No. 18); they are given at Nd² 551 (under lokantagū Sn.1133) as follows: (1) bhavaloka; (2) sampatti bhavaloka, vipatti bhavaloka; (3) vedanā; (4) āhārā; (5) upādāna-kkhandhā; (6) ajjhattikāni āyatanāni (their rise & decay as “lokassa samudaya & atthaṅgama” at S.IV,87); (7) viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo; (8) loka-dhammā; (9) satt’āvāsā; (10) upakkilesā; (11) kāmabhavā; (12) āyatanāni; (18) dhātuyo. They are repeated at Ps.I,122=174, with (1) as “sabbe sattā āhāra-ṭṭhitikā; (2) nāmañ ca rūpañ ca; and the remainder the same. Also at Vism.205 and at SnA 442 as at Ps.I,122. Cp. the similar view at S.IV,95: one perceives the world (“materiality”: loka-saññin and loka-mānin, proud of the world) with the six senses. This is called the “loka” in the logic (vinaya) of the ariyā. -- A few similes with loka see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

--akkhāyikā (f., scil. kathā) talk or speculation about (origin etc. of) the world, popular philosophy (see lokāyata and cp. Dialogues I.14) Vin.I,188; D.I,8; M.I,513; Miln.316; DA.I,90. --agga chief of the world. Ep. of the Buddha ThA.69 (Ap. V,11). --anta the end (spatial) of the world A.II,49 (na ca appatvā lokantaṁ dukkhā atthi pamocanaṁ). --antagū one who has reached the end of the world (and of all things worldly), Ep. of an Arahant A.II,6, 49 sq.; It.115, Sn.1133; Nd² 551. --antara the space between the single worlds J.I,44 (V.253: Avīcimhi na uppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu ca). --antarika (scil. Niraya) a group of Nirayas or Purgatories situated in the lokantara (i. e. cakkavāl, antaresu J.I,76), 8,000 yojanas in extent, pitch dark, which were filled with light when Gotama became the Buddha J.I,76; VbhA.4; Vism.207 (lokantariya°); SnA 59 (°vāsa life in the l. niraya); cp. BSk. lokântarikā Divy 204 (andhās tamaso ‘ndhakāra-tamisrā). --âdhipa lord or ruler of the world A.I,150. --âdhipateyya “rule of the world,” dependence on public opinion, influence of material things on man, one of the 3 ādhipateyyas (atta°, loka°, dhamma°) D.III,220; Vism.14. --ânukampā sympathy with the world of men [cp. BSk. lokânugraha Divy 124 sq.] D.III,211; It.79. --āmisa worldly gain, bait of the flesh M.I,156; II,253; Th.2, 356. --āyata what pertains to the ordinary view (of the world), common or popular philosophy, or as Rhys Davids (Dial. I.171) puts it: “name of a branch of Brahman learning, probably Nature-lore”; later worked into a quâsi system of “casuistry, sophistry.” Franke, Dīgha trslⁿ 19, trsl^s as “logisch beweisende Naturerklärung” (see the long note on this page, and cp. Dial. I.166--172 for detail of lokāyata). It is much the same as lok-akkhāy(ika) or popular philosophy. ‹-› D.I,11, 88; Vin.II,139; Sn.p. 105 (=vitaṇḍa-vādasattha SnA 447, as at DA.I,247); Miln.4, 10, 178; A.I,163, 166; III,223. Cp. BSk. lokāyata Divy 630, 633, and lokāyatika ibid. 619. See also Kern’s remarks at Toev. s. v. --āyatika (brāhmaṇa) one who holds the view of lokāyata or popular philosophy S.II,77 (trslⁿ K.S. 53: a Brahmin “wise in world-lore”); Miln.178; J.VI,486 (na seve lokāyatikaṁ; expl^d as “anatthanissitaṁ . . . vitaṇḍa-sallāpaṁ lokāyatika-vādaṁ na seveyya,” thus more like “sophistry” or casuistry). --issara lord of the world Sdhp.348. --uttara see under lokiya. --cintā thinking about the world, worldphilosophy or speculation S.V,447; A.II,80 (as one of the 4 acinteyyāni or thoughts not to be thought out: buddha-visaya, jhāna-visaya, kamma-vipāka, l-c.). Cp. BSk. laukika citta Divy 63, 77 etc. --dhammā (pl.) common practice, things of the world, worldly conditions S.III,139 sq.; Sn.268 (explⁿ loke dhammā; yāva lokappavatti tāva-anivattikā dhammā ti vuttaṁ hoti KhA 153, cp. J.III,468); Miln.146. Usually comprising a set of eight, viz. lābha, alābha, yaso, ayaso, nindā, pasaṁsā, sukhaṁ, dukkhaṁ D.III,260; A.IV,156 sq.; V,53; Nd² 55; Ps.I,22, 122; Vbh.387; Nett 162; DhA.II,157. --dhātu constituent or unit of the Universe, “world-element”; a world, sphere; another name for cakkavāla. Dasa-sahassi-lokadhātu the system of the 10,000 worlds Vin.I,12; A.I,227. -- D.III,114; Pv.II,9⁶¹; Kvu 476; Vism.206 sq.; Vbh.336; Nd¹ 356 (with the stages from one to fifty lokadhātu’s, upon which follow: sahassī cūḷanikā l-dh.; dvisahassī majjhimikā; tisahassī; mahāsahassī); J.I,63, 212; Miln.237; VbhA.430, 436. See also cūḷanikā. --nātha saviour of the world, Ep. of the Buddha Sn.995; Vism.201, 234; VvA.165; PvA.42, 287. --nāyaka guide or leader of the world (said of the Buddha) Sn.991; Ap 20; Mhvs 7, 1; Miln.222. --nirodha destruction of the world It.121 (opp. °samudaya). --pāla (°devatā) guardian (governor) of the world, which are usually sepcified as four, viz. Kuvera (=Vessavaṇa), Dhataraṭṭha, Virūpakkha, Virūḷhaka, alias the 4 mahārājāno Pv.I,4²; J.I,48 (announce the future birth of a Buddha). --byūha “world-array,” pl. byūhā (devā) N. of a class of devas J.I,47; Vism.415 (kāmâvacara-deva’s). --mariyādā the boundary of the world VvA.72. --vajja common sins Miln.266; KhA 190. --vaṭṭa “world-round,” i. e. saṁsāra (opp. vivaṭṭa =nibbāna) Nett 113, 119. See also vaṭṭa. --vidu knowing the universe, Lp. of the Buddha D.III,76; S.I,62; V,197, 343; A.II,48; Sn.p. 103; Vv 34²⁶; Pug.57; expl^d in full at SnA 442 and Vism.204 sq. --vivaraṇa unveiling of the universe, apocalypse, revelation Vism.392 (when humans see the devas etc.). --vohāra common or general distinction, popular logic, ordinary way of speaking SnA 383, 466; VbhA.164. (Page 586)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】世界，世界的居民。S.35.82.：Lujjatī’ti kho, bhikkhu, tasmā lokoti vuccati.(比丘，‘崩溃’是故称为世间。) S.35.68.：natthi cakkhu, natthi rūpā, natthi cakkhuviññāṇaṁ, natthi cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbā dhammā, natthi tattha loko vā lokapaññatti (无眼(等)，无色(等)，无眼识(等)，无眼识所识知之法(等)，则无世间或世间之概念。) lokagga,【阳】世界的领袖。lokanāyaka, lokanātha,【阳】世界的统治者。lokanta,【阳】世界的结束。lokantagū,【阳】已经达到世界(以及所有世俗事物)的尾端的人。lokantara,【中】不同的世界，在世界之间的空间。lokantarika,【形】位於世界之间的。lokanirodha,【阳】世界的破坏。lokapāla,【阳】世界的护卫者。lokavajja,【中】世界的罪(共同的罪)。lokavivaraṇa,【中】宇宙的揭开。lokavohāra,【阳】通俗说法。lokādhipacca,【中】世界的支配。lokanukampā,【阴】对人类世界的同情。lokāyatika,【形】持有自然学主义的人，虚无主义者。lokapāladhamma﹐护世之法(指：惭愧：hirottappa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】世界，世界的居民。 ~gga,【阳】世界的领袖。 ~nāyaka, ~nātha,【阳】世界的统治者。 ~nta, 【阳】世界的结束。 ~ntagū, 【阳】已经达到世界（以及所有世俗事物）的尾端的人。 ~ntara, 【中】不同的世界，在世界之间的空间。 ~ntarika, 【形】位于世界之间的。 ~nirodha, 【阳】世界的破坏。 ~pāla, 【阳】世界的护卫者。 ~vajja, 【中】世界的罪（共同的罪）。 ~vivaraṇa, 【中】宇宙的揭开。 ~vohāra, 【阳】普通的说话方法。 ~ādhipacca, 【中】世界的支配。 ~anukampā, 【阴】对人类世界的同情。 ~āyatika, 【形】持有自然学主义的人，虚无主义者。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Loka-dhamma: {'def': '世(间)法', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Lokadhamma: {'def': '(八)世法(八风)(aṭṭha lokadhammā︰得lābho(or hita利益)、不得(=失)alābho(or ahita无利益)、名声yaso、恶名声ayaso、诽谤nindā、称誉pasaṁsā、乐sukhaṁ、苦dukkhaṁ。得lābho、不得(失)alābho—当修慈波罗蜜。名声、恶名声、诽谤、称誉—当修忍耐波罗蜜。乐、苦—当修舍波罗蜜。(cf. 《佛种姓经》Bu.pg.2.317-9)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lokavidū: {'def': '世间解', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Lokesa: {'def': '【阳】梵天王，造物主。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】梵天王，造物主。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lokika: {'def': 'lokiya,【形】世间的，平凡的。lokacitta【中】世间心(包括欲界心kāmāvacara citta、色界心rūpāvacara citta、无色界心arūpāvacara citta)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'lokiya, 【形】世间的，平凡的。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lokiya: {'def': '(& lokiyika) (adj.) [fr. loka; cp. Vedic laukika in meaning “worldly, usual”] 1. (ordinarily) “belonging to the world,” i. e. -- (a) world-wide, covering the whole world, famed, widely known Th.1, 554; J.VI,198. ‹-› (b) (-°) belonging to the world of, an inhabitant of (as lokika) Pv.I,6² (Yama°). -- (c) common, general, worldly Vism.89 (samādhi); DhA.IV,3 (°mahājana) PvA.131 (°parikkhaka), 207 (sukha), 220 (°sabhāva). See also below 3. -- 2. (special meaning) worldly, mundane, when opposed to lokuttara. The term lokuttara has two meanings- viz. (a) in ordinary sense: the highest of the world, best, sublime (like lokagga, etc.), often applied to Arahantship, e. g. lokuttaradāyajja inheritance of Arahantship J.I,91; DhA.I,117; ideal: lokuttara dhamma (like parama dhamma) the ideal state, viz. Nibbāna M.II,181; pl. l. dhammā M.III,115. -- (b) (in later canonical literature) beyond these worlds, supra-mundane, transcendental, spiritual. In this meaning it is applied to the group of nava lokuttarā dhammā (viz. the 4 stages of the Path: sotāpatti etc., with the 4 phala’s, and the addition of nibbāna), e. g. Dhs.1094. Mrs. Rh. D. tries to compromise between the two meanings by giving lokuttara the trslⁿ “engaged upon the higher ideal” (Dhs. tsrl. Introd. p. 98), since meaning (b) has too much of a one-sided philosophical appearance. On term cp. Cpd. 91³. -- 3. lokiya (in meaning “mundane”) is contrasted with lokuttara (“transcendental”) at many passages of the Abhidhamma, e. g. at Ps.II,166; Dhs. 505, 1093, 1446; Vbh.17 sq., 93, 106, 128, 229 sq., 271, 322; Kvu 222, 515, 602; Pug.62; Tikp 41 sq., 52 sq., 275; Dukp 304, 324; Nett 10, 54, 67, 77, 111, 161 sq., 189 sq.; Miln.236, 294 (lokika), 390; Vism.10, 85, 438; DA.I,331; DhsA.47 sq., 213; VbhA.128, 373; DhA.I,76 (lokika); II,150; III,272; IV,35. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lokuttara: {'def': '(loka+uttara)【形】超凡的，超出人类经验的，出世间(《摄阿毘达摩义论》Ch.3.62.Lokuttaracittāni nibbānārammaṇānīti.诸出世间心以涅盘为所缘)(CSCD)。DA.2./I,232.︰Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṁ, sabbadukkhakkhayo ānisaṁsaphalaṁ.(此中，出世间归依以四沙门果为异熟果，灭尽一切苦的利益果。) 「涅盘」非名法非色法，但是能为「出世间心」所取。能取涅盘的「出世间心」，依禅那的层次含摄1心、33~36心所。无余涅盘则没有出世间心(能取)，也没有「涅盘」(对象)。圣果(=果心，果定速行心)是名法。 Vibhv.p.59.：Upādānakkhandhasaṅkhātalokato uttarati anāsavabhāvenāti lokuttaraṁ, maggacittaṁ. Phalacittaṁ pana tato uttiṇṇanti lokuttaraṁ. Ubhayampi vā saha nibbānena lokato uttaraṁ adhikaṁ yathāvuttaguṇavasenevāti lokuttaraṁ.(渡过取蕴的世间，成为无漏的状态，为‘出世间道心’。然而，从此越过，为‘出世间果心’。两者同样是渡过世间之涅盘，如上所说，处於无上的、优胜的功德，为‘出世间’。) loc﹐【字根VII.】见(to see)。cp.(梵loc)考虑(see consider)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】超凡的，超出人类经验的。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '出世(间)的', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Lokāyata: {'def': 'm. [〃] 順世外道, 路伽耶陀, 唯物論者, 世間論. -sippa 順世術.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Lola: {'def': '【形】贪婪的，反复无常的。lolatā,【阴】渴望，贪欲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】贪婪的，反复无常的。 ~tā, 【阴】渴望，贪欲。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Loḷa) (adj.) [fr. luḷ: see luḷati; cp. Epic & Classic Sk. lola] wavering, unsteady, agitated; longing, eager, greedy S.IV,111; Sn.22, 922; J.I,49 (Buddha-mātā lolā na hoti), 111, 210, 339 (dhana-loḷa); II,319 (°manussa); III,7; Pug.65; Nd¹ 366; Dāvs.IV,44; Miln.300. --alola not greedy, not distracted (by desire), self-controlled S.V,148; Sn.65.

--bhava greediness, covetousness ThA.16. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lolatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. lola] longing, eagerness, greed Miln.93; SnA 35 (āhāra°). (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Loleti: {'def': '[Caus. fr. luḷ, see luḷati] to make shake or unsteady A.III,188 (khobheti+). -- pp. lolita. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lul + e), 激起，摇动，搅动。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lul+e), 激起，摇动，搅动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lolita: {'def': '[pp. of loleti] agitated, shaken Th.2, 373 (=ālolita ThA.252). (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lolupa: {'def': '【形】妄羡的，贪婪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】妄羡的，贪婪的。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lup, a base of lumpati but influenced by lubh, probably also by lola. See lumpati] covetous, greedy, self-indulgent Dāvs II.73. a° not greedy, temperate Sn.165. Cp. nil°. -- f. lolupā as N. of a plant at J.VI,537. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Loluppa: {'def': '【中】贪欲。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】贪欲。=loluppāyanā & loluppāyitattaṁ ( Dhs 1059, 1136.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. lolupa] greediness, covetousness, self-indulgence, desire; in the language of the Abhidhamma often syn. with jappā or taṇhā. At DhsA.365 loluppa is treated as an adj. & expl^d at “punappuna visaye lumpati ākaḍḍhatī ti,” i. e. one who tears again & again at the object (or as Expos. II.470: repeated plundering, hauling along in the fields of sense). -- J.I,340, 429; DhsA.365; Vism.61; & with exegetical synonyms loluppāyanā & loluppāyitattaṁ at Dhs.1059, 1136. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Loma: {'def': '【中】(体)毛。lomakūpa,【阳】毛孔。lomahaṭṭha,【形】毛发竖立的。lomahaṁsa,【阳】lomahaṁsana,【中】毛骨悚然。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic roman. The (restituted) late P. form roma only at J.V,430; Abhp 175, 259; Sdhp.119] the hair of the body (whereas kesa is the hair of the head only) D.II,18 (ekeka°, uddhagga°, in characteristics of a Mahāpurisa); S.II,257 (asi°, usu°, satti° etc.); A.II,114; Vin.III,106 (usu° etc.); Sn.385; J.I,273 (khaggo lomesu allīyi); VbhA.57; DhA.I,126; II,17 (°gaṇanā); ThA.199; VvA.324 (sūkara°); PvA.152, 157; Sdhp.104. A detailed description of loma as one of the 32 ākāras of the body (Kh III,; pl. lomā) is found at Vism.250, 353; VbhA.233; KhA 42, 43. --aloma hairless J.VI,457; puthu° having broad hair or fins, name of a fish J.IV,466; Vv 44¹¹. haṭṭha° with hairs erect, excited Mhvs 15, 33. -- On loma in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 131. --lomaṁ pāteti to let one’s hair drop, as a sign of subduedness or modesty, opp. to horripilation [pāteti formed fr. pat after wrong etym. of panna in panna-loma “with drooping hairs,” which was taken as a by-form of patita: see panna-loma]: Vin.II,5 (=pannalomo hoti C.); III,183; M.I,442. ‹-› Cp. anu°, paṭi°, vi°.

--kūpa a pore of the skin J.I,67; KhA 51, 63; SnA 155 (where given as 99,000) Vism.195 (id.). --padmaka a kind of plant J.VI,497 (reading uncertain; v. l. lodda°). --sundarī (f.) beautiful with hairs (on her body) J.V,424 (Kuraṅgavī l.; expl^d on p. 430 as “roma-rājiyā maṇḍita udarā”). --haṁsa horripilation, excitement with fear or wonder, thrill D.I,49; A.IV,311 sq. (sa°); Sn.270; Vbh.367; Miln.22; Vism.143; DA.I,150. --haṁsana causing horripilation, astounding, stupendous Sn.681; J.IV,355 (abbhuta+); Pv III,9³; IV,3⁵; Miln.1; Mhvs 17, 55 (abbhuta+). --haṭṭha having the hair standing on end, horrified, thunderstruck, astounded D.I,95; S.V,270; Sn.p. 15; Miln.23; SnA 155; cp. haṭṭha-loma above. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】（体）毛。 ~kūpa, 【阳】毛孔。 ~haṭṭha, 【形】毛发竖立的。 ~haŋsa, 【阳】 ~haŋsana, 【中】毛骨悚然。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lomaka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. loma] having hair, in cpd. caturaṅga° having fourfold hair (i. e. on the diff. parts of the body?) Vin.IV,173. It may refer to the 5 dermatoid constituents of the body (see pañcaka) & thus be characteristic of outward appearance. We do not exactly see how the term caturaṅga is used here. -- Cp. anulomika. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lomasa: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic romaśa] hairy, covered with hair, downy, soft M.I,305; Pv.I,9². At J.IV,296 lomasā is expl^d as pakkhino, i. e. birds; reading however doubtful (vv. ll. lomahaṁsa & lomassā). (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】多毛的，被毛复盖的。 ~pāṇaka, 【阳】毛虫。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】多毛的，被毛复盖的。lomasapāṇaka,【阳】毛虫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lomin: {'def': '(-°) (‹loma),【形】有发的(having hair, in cpds. ekantalomi & uddhalomi)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. loma] having hair, in cpds. ekanta° & uddha°, of (couch-) covers or (bed) spreads: being made of hair altogether or having hair only on top Vin.I,192=II.163; D.I,7; cp. DA.I,87. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lopa: {'def': '【阳】元音省略，切断。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】母音省略，切断。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. lup: see lumpati] taking away, cutting off; as tt. g. apocope, elision (of the final letter) VbhA.164 (sabba-loka-vohāra°); SnA 12, 303, 508; VvA.79; often in anunāsika° dropping of (final) ṁ SnA 410; VvA.154, 275. At S.V,342 read piṇḍiy ‘ālopena for piṇḍiyā lopena. -- Cp. ālopa, nillopa, vilopa, vilopiya. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Loḷī: {'def': 'see āloḷi. (Page 589)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Loṇa: {'def': '【中】盐。【形】咸味浓的。loṇakāra,【阳】采盐者。loṇadhūpana,【中】加盐作调味料。loṇaphala,【中】loṇasakkharā,【阴】盐的结晶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】盐。【形】咸味浓的。 ~kāra, 【阳】采盐者。 ~dhūpana, 【中】加盐作调味料。 ~phala, 【中】 ~sakkharā, 【阴】盐的结晶。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. lavaṇa, for which see also lavaṇa. The Prk. form is loṇa] salt; as adj., salty, of salt, alkaline. -- Vin.I,202 (loṇāni bhesajjāni alkaline medicine, among which are given sāmuddaṁ kāḷaloṇaṁ sindhavaṁ ubbhidaṁ bilaṁ as var. kinds of salt), 220=243 (as flavouring, with tela, taṇḍula & khādaniya); A.I,210, 250; IV,108; Miln.63; DhA.IV,176 (in simile see below); VvA.98, 100, 184 (aloṇa sukkha-kummāsa, unsalted). On loṇa in similes cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 131.

--ambila acid and salt J.I,505; II,171, 394. --odaka salt water J.VI,37; VvA.99 (°udaka). --kāra salt-maker Vin.I,350 (°gāma); A.II,182 (°dāraka); J.VI,206 (kara); Miln.331. --ghaṭa a pitcher with salt S.II,276. See also App. to KhA 68 (in Sn.Index 870, 871) on Vism.passage with loṇaghaṭaka. --dhūpana salt-spicing VbhA.311 (viya sabba vyañjanesu; i. e. the strongest among all flavourings). --phala a crystal of (natural) salt [phala for phaṭa=*sphaṭa, cp. phalaka] A.I,250 (in simile). --rasa alkaline taste A.IV,199, 203. --sakkhara a salt crystal (cp. °phala), a (solid) piece of (natural) salt S.II,276 (in simile, cp. A.I,250); SnA 222 (aggimhi pakkhitta l-s., in the same simile at DhA.IV,176: uddhane pakkhitta-loṇa). --sakkharikā a piece of salt-crystal, used as a caustic for healing wounds Vin.I,206. --sovīraka salted sour gruel Vin.I,210; VvA.99. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Loṇasovīraka: {'def': '咸酸酱。一种由百味腌制的药(sabbarasābhisaṅkhataṁ ekaṁ bhesajjaṁ)。据说在腌制时，把诃子、山楂、川楝等药材，米谷等各种粮食，芭蕉等各种果实，笋、鱼、肉片等各种食物，加上蜂蜜、糖、岩盐、盐等，装入缸中密封后放置经一年、两年或三年，腌制成呈蒲桃汁顔色的酱。食之可治疗风病、咳嗽、麻风、黄疸、痔瘻等病。比库在饭后也可食用这种酱。有病者可直接吃，无病者可掺水后饮用。(Sp.pārā.192.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Loṇika: {'def': '& Loṇiya (adj.) [fr. loṇa] salty, alkaline Dhs.629. --loṇiya-teliya prepared with salt & oil J.III,522; IV,71. --aloṇika unsalted 42⁶ (°aka); VvA.184; J.I,228; III,409. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】硷性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】碱性。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Loṇī: {'def': '【阴】盐田，盐水湖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】盐田，盐水湖。(p274)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Loṭana: {'def': '(nt.) [luṭ, cp. *Sk. lolana & viloḷana] shaking, upsetting Dhtm 117. Cp. vi°. (Page 588)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lubbhana: {'def': '【中】贪欲。SA.3.2./I,137.︰lubbhanalakkhaṇo lobho.(贪欲相，称为‘贪欲’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】贪欲。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lubh] being greedy, greediness, a scholastic word, only found in exegesis of word lobha, e. g. at Dhs.32 (where also the enlarged abstr. formation lubbhitatta) & Vism.465, 468 (lubbhana-mattaṁ lobha). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lubbhati: {'def': '(lubh+ya), 贪婪，妄想。【过】lubbhi。【过分】luddha。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic lubhyate, lubh, cp. Lat. lubet & libet it pleases, libido longing; Goth. liufs=Ger. lieb & lob; E. love, etc. -- Dhtp 434: lobhe] to be lustful or greedy, to covet, long for, desire It.84 (lobhaneyye na lubbhati); Vism.465, 468. -- ger. lubbha (?) in olubbha is to be referred to lamb rather than lubh. A grd. formation in lobhaneyya or lobhanīya (q. v.). -- pp. luddha. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lubh + ya), 贪婪，妄想。【过】 lubbhi。【过分】 luddha。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ludda: {'def': '【形】凶猛的，残酷的。【阳】猎人，管猎犬者。luddaka,【阳】猎人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】凶猛的，残酷的。【阳】猎人，管猎犬者。 ~ka, 【阳】猎人。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [the usual P. form of rudda, corresponding to Sk. raudra] 1. fierce, terrible; cruel, gruesome S.I,143; A.II,174 (pāpa, l., kibbisa); V,149; Pug.56; Vv 84⁵ (=dāruṇā pisāc’--ādino VvA.335); J.V,243 (ṭhānaṁ= niraya); Sdhp.286. The spelling ludra occurs at J.IV,46=VI,306, which is ludda at J.V,146. -- 2. a hunter, sportsman Sn.247 (dussīla°; SnA 289: luddā ca kurūra-kammantā lohita-pāṇitāya, macchaghātakamigabandhaka-sākuṇik’ādayo idha adhippetā); Vv 63¹; J.II,154 (°putta=luddaka); III,432 (Bharata by name); Pug.56 (māgavika, sākuṇika, l., macchaghātaka etc.; expl^d by dāruṇa kakkhaḷa at Pug.A 233); Vism.245= VbhA.259; VbhA.228. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Luddaka: {'def': '=ludda 2, i. e. hunter Vin.I,220; J.IV,416; Pv III,7² (miga°; expl^d as “dāruṇa” PvA.206); Miln.222; VbhA.266 (miga°, in simile); PvA.34, 168. Cp. Fick, Sociale Gliederung 143, 207. Note. The expression sunakha-luddako at DhsA.273 is not quite clear (“doghunter”?). It applies to a female & Maung Tin (Expositor II.361) reads “luddhikā” (sic), with trslⁿ “dog-mistress,” remarking that Pyī reads luddako “hunter-dog” (?). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Luddha: {'def': '(lubbhati 的【过分】), 已贪婪，已贪图。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lubbhati 的【过分】), 已贪婪，已贪图。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of lubbhati] greedy, covetous A.III,433 (with pharusa-vāca & samphappalāpin); It.84; Miln.92 (duṭṭha, mūḷha, l.); J.I,124. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lugga: {'def': '[pp. of rujati; corresponding to Sk. rugṇa] broken (up), rugged (of a path) Miln.217, 218. Cp. vi°. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lujjana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lujjati; a word peculiar to Pali dogmatics] breaking up, crumbling away, dissolution DhsA.47 (in etym. of loka=lujjana-palujjan’aṭṭhena vaṭṭaṁ), 308 (id.); Vism.427 (id.). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】碎片，解散。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】碎片(breaking up, crumbling away)，解散(dissolution)。Lokadhammoti lujjanasabhāvadhammo.(世法：解散的自然的原则。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lujjati: {'def': '(luj + ya), 瓦解，崩溃。【过】 lujji。【过分】 lugga。【独】 lujjitvā。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(luj+ya), 瓦解，崩溃。【过】lujji。【过分】lugga。【独】lujjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Pass. of ruj, corresponding to Sk. rujyate. Dhtp 400 gives luj as sep. root with meaning vināsa. See rujati] to be broken up, to break (up), to be destroyed; to go asunder, to fall apart A.I,283=Pug.32 (here equal to “be wiped out,” but it is unnecessary to assume, as Kern, Toev. s. v. lujjati does, a by-form of luc, luñcati. The Pug.C. 215 expl^s by “nassati”); Vin.I,297; II,123; S.IV,52 (in etymologizing interpretation of loka: “lujjati kho loko ti vuccati”; quoted at Nd² 550 on Sn.1119); Th.1, 929. -- Cp. olujjati, palujjati. -- pp. lugga. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lumbinī: {'def': 'f. 藍毘尼, ルンビニー [釈尊が降誕された林園].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（城市名）伦比尼，（古音译：）蓝毗尼', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Lumpana: {'def': '【中】抢劫，吃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】抢劫，吃。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lumpati: {'def': '(lup+ṁ-a), 抢夺，吃。【过】lumpi。【过分】lumpita。【独】lumpitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': ' [lup, Epic Sk. lumpati, found also as rup in Pali: see ruppati. Connected with Lat. lugeo to be sorry (cp. rujati, roga; Gr. lu/ph sorrow) and rumpo to break. Def^ns at Dhtp 386 & 433 (chedana) and at Dhtm 618 & 669 (cheda, vināsa)] to break, harm, injure; to attack, plunder; with a strong touch of affection (sympathy or desire) lubh in it [cp. lup: Gr. lu/ph; ruj: roga], which is still more evident in Intens. loluppa (q. v.). -- DhsA.365 (in explⁿ of loluppa). -- pp. lutta. -- Cp. ullumpana, ullopa, lopa, vilumpati, vilopa. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lup + ŋ-a), 抢夺，吃。【过】 lumpi。【过分】 lumpita。【独】~pitvā。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lunana: {'def': '(nt.) [for lūna(na), cp. lavana] cutting, severing SnA 148 (niddānan ti chedanaṁ lunanaṁ uppāṭanaṁ). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Luniti: {'def': '(lu+nā), 切断，割草，收获。【过】luni。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(lu + nā), 切断，割草，收获。【过】 luni。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lunāti: {'def': ' [lū, given as lu at Dhtp 504 (“chedana”) & Dhtm 728 (“paccheda”). For etym. cp. Gr. lu/w to loosen, Lat. luo to pay a fine, Goth. fraliusan to lose; Ger. los, E. lose & loose] to cut, cut off, mow, reap Miln.33 (yavalāvakā yavaṁ lunanti); DhsA.39. -- pp. lūna (& luta). -- Caus I. lāvayati Mhvs 10, 30; Caus. II. lavāpeti to cause to mow Vin.II,180. -- A Pass. lūyati [fr. lu] is found at D.I,141 (aor. lūyiṁsu) and at corresponding passage Pug.56 (imper. lūyantu, where dubbā is to be corrected to dabbhā). -- See lava, lavaka, lavana, lāyati, lavati. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Luta: {'def': '(luniti 的【过分】), 已割草。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(luniti 的【过分】), 已割草。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'seems to be a legitimate spelling representing either lutta or lūna, in meaning “cut, cut off” [cp. lu for lū under lunāti]. Thus at S.I,5 (nalo va harito luto)= 126=J.VI,25; and at Sn.532 (lutāni bandhanāni; vv. ll. lūtāni & lunāni; expl^d as “chinnāni padālitāni” at SnA 432). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lutta: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. lupta; pp. of lumpati] broken, cut off; as t. t. in grammar “elided” VvA.13 (of ca), 111 (of iti), 122 (id.). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lopeti 的【过分】), 已切断，已省略，已掠夺。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lopeti 的【过分】), 已切断，已省略，已掠夺。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Luñcati: {'def': '[Vedic luñcati, luc or luñc, to Lat. runco to pull up weeds; Gr. r(ukάnh plane. The Dhtp 43 expl^s by apanayana] to pull out, pluck (a bird), tear, peel J.I,244, 476; II,97, 363; III,314; IV,191; V,463; Mhvs 23, 46 (aor. aluñci); 28, 26 (ger. luñcitvā); Vism.248 (kese). -- Caus. II. luñcāpeti DhA.II,53 (kese), and loceti Th.1, 283 (kesamassuṁ alocayiṁ). -- pp. luñcita. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(luñc+a), 拉出，连根拔起。【过】luñci。【过分】luñcita。【独】luñcitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(luñc + a), 拉出，连根拔起。【过】 luñci。【过分】 luñcita。【独】~citvā。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Luñcita: {'def': '[pp. of luñcati] plucked, pulled Miln.240 (i. e. combed, of wool; Rh. D. trsl^s “pressed”; Nyānatiloka “cut”); PvA.47 (vilūna-kesa+). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Luḷati: {'def': '& Luṭati [cp. Ep. Sk. loṭh to move & dial. luḍ, loḍayati, to stir, agitate, which is a by-form of lul, lolati to move, Caus. lolayati to set in motion. Etym. connected with Slavonic ljuljati to rock, Ags. l&amacremacr;l a (flexible) rod, rood; root due to onomat. formation. ‹-› Another form is luṭhati. The Dhtm (117) expl^s luṭ by “loṭane” (cp. viloṭana & viloḷana), and luḷ (510) by “manthane”] to stir, shake, agitate, upset; intrs. to be in motion, to be stirred Miln.259 (calati khubbhati l. āvilati). -- pp. luḷita. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Luḷita: {'def': '【过分】已激起，已扰乱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of luḷati] stirred, moved, disturbed; lively; turbid (of water) S.V,123=A.III,233; (udapatta āvila l.); D.II,128=Ud.83 (udakaṁ parittaṁ luḷitaṁ āvilaṁ); J.VI,63; Nd¹ 488 (āvila+); Miln.35, 177, 220 (°citta), 383 (a°); DhsA.328 (indriyāni paripakkāni alulitāni avisadāni). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已激起，已扰乱。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Luṭhati: {'def': '[cp. later Sk. luṭhati to plunder, which is one of the dial. variants luṭh, lunṭh, loṭh of lul to shake. The Dhtp (474) & Dhtm (136) both give ruṭh & luṭh with meaning “upaghāte”] to rob, plunder. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lābha: {'def': '【阳】得到，获得。 ~kamyatā, 【阴】对增益的渴求。 ~gga, 【阳】最高的增益。 ~macchariya, 【中】利得悭（增益的自私）。~sakkāra, 【阳】增益和光荣。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】得到，获得。lābhakamyatā,【阴】对增益的渴求。lābhagga,【阳】最高的增益。lābhamacchariya,【中】利得悭(增益的自私)。lābhasakkāra,【阳】增益和光荣。nikāmalābhī hoti akicchalābhī akasiralābhī﹐随愿而得，不劳而得，不苦而得。lābhena lābhaṁ﹐以利求利(=以施求施)(邪命之一种)。A.1.20./I,38.︰“Addhamidaṁ bhikkhave, lābhānaṁ yadidaṁ āraññikattaṁ…pe… piṇḍapātikattaṁ… paṁsukūlikattaṁ… tecīvarikattaṁ… dhammakathikattaṁ… vinayadharattaṁ… bāhusaccaṁ… thāvareyyaṁ… ākappasampadā… parivārasampadā… mahāparivāratā… kolaputti… vaṇṇapokkharatā… kalyāṇavākkaraṇatā… appicchatā… appābādhatā”ti.(诸比丘！此世有多利的，即是：住旷野、行托钵、披粪扫衣、持三衣、能说法、好持律、须多闻、作长老、好行为、服装整齐、随从多、做善男子，容貌美、言语和雅、少欲、无病。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. labh] receiving, getting, acquisition, gain, possession; pl. possessions D.I,8; II,58, 61; M.I,508 (ārogya-paramā lābhā); III,39; A.I,74; IV,157 sq., 160 (lābhena abhibhūto pariyādinnacitto Devadatto, cp. J.I,185 sq.); Sn.31, 438, 828, 854, 1014, 1046 (cp. Nd² 548); It.67 (vitta°); J.III,516 (yasa°, dhana°); Vism.93, 136 (°ṁ labhati), 150 (°assa bhāgin getting riches); PvA.113, 280. -- A Dat. sg. lābhā (for lābhāya) is used adverbially with foll. genitive in meaning of “for my (our) gain,” “it is profitable,” “good for me that” etc.; e. g. Miln.17 (lābhā no tāta, suladdhaṁ no tāta), 232 (lābhā vata tāsaṁ devatānaṁ); A.III,313 (lābhā vata me suladdhaṁ vata me), expl^d at Vism.223; DhA.I,98 (lābhā vata me, elliptically); II,95 (l. vata no ye mayaṁ . . . upaṭṭhahimha).

--agga highest gain J.III,125; Miln.21. --āsā desire for gain A.I,86. --kamyā (Abl. out of desire for gain Sn.854, 929 (=lābha-hetu Nd¹ 389). --taṇhā craving for possession DhA.IV,38. --macchariya selfishness in acquisitions A.III,273; D.III,234; Pug.19, 23; Dhs.1122. --mada pride of gain VbhA.466. --sakkāra gain and honour, usually comb^d with °siloka fame; the two first e. g. at Vin.II,196; It.73; J.I,185, 186; V,75; the three comb^d e. g. at M.I,192; S.II,227, 237; A.II,73; III,343 sq., 377; Vbh.352 sq.; lābha-siloka alone at Vism.67. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lābhaka: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. lābha] one who receives; reception; a° not getting, non-receiving Vin.III,77. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lābhin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. labha] receiving, getting, having, possessed of M.III,39 (as n. “a receiver, recipient”); A.I,24; II,85; IV,400; Pug.51; Vbh.332 (nikāma°); J.I,140. -- 2. one who has intuition either in reasoning (or logical argument) or psychically, and who may therefore take certain premises for granted (opp. alābhin a denier) DA.I,106, 120. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lābhā: {'def': '【无】那是有利润的，那是一个增益。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see under lābha. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】那是有利润的，那是一个增益。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lābhālābha: {'def': '(lābha+alābha)﹐【阳】得与不得(失)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lābhī: {'def': '【阳】得到很多的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】得到很多的人。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lābu: {'def': '(f.) & Lābuka=lāpu (alābu) gourd or pumpkin, often used as receptacle J.I,158 (°ka), 411 (°kumbhaṇḍa vesseḷ made of the gourd); V,37 (°ka), 155 (addha-lābu-samā thanā); DhA.II,59 (°ka); SnA 227 (lābumhi catumadhuraṁ pūretukāmo).

--kaṭāha a gourd as receptacle Vism.255, 359; VbhA.63. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāja: {'def': '& Lājā (f.) [cp. Vedic lāja: Zimmer, Altind. Leben 269] 1. fried grain, parched corn: occurring only in combⁿ madhu-lāja fried grain with honey, sweet corn J.III,538; IV,214, 281. -- 2. the flower of Dalbergia arborea, used for scattering in bunches (with other flowers making 5 kinds or colours) as a sign of welcome & greeting, usually in phrase lāja-pañcamāni pupphāni (“a cluster of flowers with lāja as the fifth”) DhA.I,112; VvA.31; J.I,55 (°pañcamakāni p.); cp. J.II,240 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-maṇḍita-talā); VI,42 (vippakiṇṇa-lāja-kusuma-vāsa-dhūp’andhakāra); DhA.I,140 (vippakiṇṇa-valikaṁ pañcavaṇṇa-kusuma-lāja-puṇṇaghaṭa-paṭimaṇḍita). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 炒过的玉黍蜀。2. 印度黄檀（一种东印度群岛乔木 (Dalbergia sissoo)，其叶用作饲料）。 ~pañcamaka,【形】以炒过的玉黍蜀为第五个的。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.炒过的玉黍蜀。2.印度黄檀(一种东印度群岛乔木 (Dalbergia sissoo)，其叶用作饲料)。lājapañcamaka,【形】以炒过的玉黍蜀为第五个的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lājeti: {'def': '[fr. lāja] to fry or have fried J.VI,341 (v. l. lañc°, lañj°), 385 (lañchetvā; v. l. lañci°, lañje°). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lākhā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. dākṣā] lac; lac-dye; enum^d with other colourings at M.I,127=S.II,101=A.III,230. -- SnA 577; Vism.261 (as colour of blood).

--ācariya expert in lac-dyeing SnA 577. --guḷaka a ball of lac SnA 80. --goḷaka id. SnA 577. --tamba copper coloured with lac Th.2, 440 (=lākhā-rasarattehi viya tambehi lomehi samannāgata ThA.270). --rasa essence of lac, used for dyeing; lac-colouring J.V,215 (°ratta-succhavi); VI,269 (id.); KhA 62, 63; ThA.270. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】紫胶(lac)，封闭腊(sealing wax)。lākhārasa,【阳】色淀(一大类有机顔料中的任何一种)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】紫胶，封闭腊。 ~rasa, 【阳】色淀（一大类有机颜料中的任何一种）。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lāla: {'def': '(p)pana (nt.) & °ā (f.)=lālappa, together with lāla(p)‹-› pitatta (nt.) in exegesis of parideva at Nd² 416; Vbh.100, 138; VbhA.104; DA.I,121. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lal, see laḷati] talking without sense, silly, foolish J.VI,360, 417 (ḷ). Cp. alālā. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lālaka: {'def': '[lala+ka] a wag, silly person, fool J.I,205; IV,210. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lālana: {'def': '【中】调戏，哄骗。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】调戏，哄骗。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lālapati: {'def': '(lap+a), 不停地讲话，涕泣。【过】lālapi。【过分】lālapita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Lālappati [Intens. of lapati] to talk much, to talk silly, to lament, wail Sn.580; Pv IV.5² (=vilapati PvA.260); J.III,217; Miln.148, 275; Mhvs 32, 68. ‹-› pp. lālappita. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(lap + a), 不停地讲话，哀悼。【过】 lālapi。【过分】 pita。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lālappa: {'def': '(‹lap)﹐一再地喃喃自语。(punappunaṁ lapanaṁ)。lālappana，一再喃喃自语的行相。lālappitattaṁ，喃喃自语的性质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. lālappati] talking much, excited or empty talk, wailing Vbh.100, 138; Ps.I,38; Nett 29; VbhA.104 (=punappunaṁ lapanaṁ). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lālappita: {'def': '[pp. of lālappati] 1. talking much, wailing Miln.148 (paridevita-l.-mukha). -- 2. (nt.) much talk, excited talk, talking J.VI,498. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāleti: {'def': '(lal + e), 哄骗，镇压，使真实。【过】 lālesi。【过分】 lālita。【独】lāletvā。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(lal+e), 哄骗，镇压，使真实。【过】lālesi。【过分】lālita。【独】lāletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lālā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. laḷati] saliva J.I,61, 248; VI,357; Vism.259; DhA.I,307 (mukhato lālā galati). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāmajjaka: {'def': '(lāmañjaka) (nt.) [cp. Sk. lāmajjaka] the root of Andropogon muricatus Vv 43⁶ (v. l. °añc); VvA.186, (°añj°) 187. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāmaka: {'def': '(adj.) [seems to be a specific Pāli word. It is essentially a C. word & probably of dialectical origin. Has it anything to do with omaka?] insignificant, poor, inferior, bad, sinful. The usual syn. is pāpa. -- Vin.II,76; Vism.268 (=pāpaka); DhsA.45; KhA 243 (=khudda); PugA 229 (nīca lāmaka=oṇata); KhA 150 (°desanā, cp. ukkaṭṭha); DhA.II,77; IV,44 (°bhāva); VvA.116; PvA.15 (for pāpa); 103 (=pāpaka), 125 (°purisa=kāpurisa); Sdhp.28, 253, 426, 526 (opp. ukkaṭṭha). -- f. lāmikā J.I,285; II,346 (for itarā); DhA.II,61 (pāpikā l. diṭṭhi). -- Cp. Dhs. trsl.² § 1025. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】劣的，低的，有罪的。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】劣的，低的，有罪的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lāpa: {'def': '1(‹lap)﹐【阳】交谈(talk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [also fr. lap, lit. “talker,” cp. similar semantics of E. quail›Ger. quaken, quicken; E. quack. The P. form rests on pop. etym., as in Sk. we find corresponding name as lāba] a sort of quail, Perdix chinensis S.V,146=J.II,59. As lāpaka-sakuṇa also at J.II,59. -- Another name for quail is vaṭṭaka. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2(‹lap﹐lit.talker),【阳】一种鹌鹑(quail；或类似laṭukika)，鹌鹑(ㄢㄔㄨㄣˊ)，形似小鸡，重量150公克左右，短小圆胖，不善飞翔，以小虫、种籽、嫩叶为食，平均寿命3~7年。J.168.说鹌鹑为菩萨(释迦牟尼的本生)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. lap] talk: see cpds. abhi°, pa°, sal°. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】一种鹌鹑。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lāpana: {'def': '(‹lāpeti, caus.of lap)【中】喃喃自语(muttering)，谈话(utterance, speech)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lāpeti, Caus. of lap] muttering, utterance, speech It.98; A.I,165 (lapita°). Perhaps also to be read at Th.2, 73. -- Cp. upa°. (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāpeti: {'def': '﹐lapati (lap说+a), 谈话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see lapati & cp. upalāpeti. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāpin: {'def': '(--°) (adj.) [fr. lap] talking (silly) S.III,143 (bāla°). (Page 582)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāpu: {'def': 'lābu,【阴】葫芦(gourd，任何一种蔓生攀援植物，如黄瓜，西瓜或南瓜，果实结在硬皮里)，苦瓢。lāpukaṭāha﹐lābukaṭāha,【阳】葫芦(葫芦瓠把这种果实掏空晒乾以后的外壳，经常用作喝水的容器)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [short for alāpu or âlābu, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 39⁶] a kind of cucumber J.I,336, 341. See also lābuka.

--latā the cucumber creeper or plant Miln.374. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'lābu, 【阴】葫芦（任何一种蔓生攀援植物，如黄瓜，西瓜或南瓜，果实结在硬皮里）。 ~kaṭāha, 【阳】葫芦（葫芦瓠把这种果实掏空晾干以后的外壳，经常用作喝水的容器）。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lāsa: {'def': '[of las] sporting, dancing: see abhi°, vi°. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】lāsana,【中】跳舞，运动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 Lāsana, 【中】跳舞，运动。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lāseti: {'def': 'see lasati. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāsikā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. las] a dancer, Miln.331. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāvaka: {'def': '[fr. lāvati] a cutter, reaper Miln.33 (yava°); Mhvs 10, 31; SnA 148 (v. l. BB. for lavaka). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāvati: {'def': '& Lāveti [the latter the usual form, as Caus. of lunāti. lāvati is the simple Pāli formation fr. lū. Another Caus. II. is lavāpati (q. v.). See also lāyati] to cut, to mow PvA.40 (lāvitvā), Mhvs 10, 30 (lāvayati). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāyaka: {'def': '(-°) [fr. lāyati] cutter, reaper A.III,365=S.III,155 (read babbaja°). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】收割者，割草的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】收割者，割草的人。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lāyana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lāyati] cutting J.V,45 (tiṇa-lāyana asi, sickle); DhA.III,285 (v. l. for dāyana). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāyati: {'def': '(la+ya), 收获，割草。【过】lāyi。【过分】lāyita。【独】lāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(la + ya), 收获，割草。【过】 lāyi。【过分】 lāyita。【独】 lāyitvā。(p271)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Lāyita: {'def': '[pp. of lāyati, lāyeti] cut, reaped J.III,130 (tiṇaṁ na lāyita-pubbaṁ); Vism.419 (°ṭṭhāna place where one has reaped). (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāḷana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. lal] swaying, dalliance, sport DA.I,197; Sdhp.387; as lāḷanā at ThA.243. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lāḷeti: {'def': 'see laḷati. (Page 583)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Līlā: {'def': '【阴】优雅，吉祥物。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(līḷā) (f.) [cp. Epic Sk. līlā or *līḍā] play, sport, dalliance; probably for līḷhā at J.V,5 & 157, both times comb^d with vilāsa.

--aravinda a lotus serviceable for sport VvA.43 (līḷ°). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】优雅，吉祥物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Līna: {'def': '[pp. of līyati] clinging, sticking; slow, sluggish; shy, reserved, dull, A.I,3; Vism.125. Definitions at Vbh.352, 373; Dhs.1156, 1236; S.V,277, 279 (ati°). Often comb^d with uddhata as “sluggish or shy” and “unbalanced,” e. g. at S.V,112; Vism.136; VbhA.310. alīna active, open, sincere Sn.68 (°citta), 717 (id.); J.I,22 (v. 148; °viriya sīha). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(līyati‘收缩’的【过分】), 已收缩，已害羞，已保留。līnatā,【阴】līnatta,【中】偷懒，退缩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(līyati 的【过分】), 已收缩，已害羞，已保留。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~tta, 【中】偷懒，羞怯。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Līnatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. līna] sluggishness, shyness; only in phrase cetaso līnattaṁ immobility of mind S.V,64, 103; A.I,3=IV.32; V,145 sq.; Nett 86, 108; VbhA.272 (=cittassa līn’ākāra). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Līnatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. formation fr. līna instead of līy°]= līyanā Vism.469. alīnatā open-mindedness, sincerity J.I,366; SnA 122. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Līyana: {'def': '【中】收缩(台语：勼勼kiu kiu)，缩水，凋萎，萎缩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. līyati] sticking to, adhering, resting Sdhp.190 (°ṭṭhāna resting-place). (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】收缩，缩水，凋萎。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Līyanā: {'def': '(f.)=līyana; cleaving to, sluggishness, shyness Dhs.1156. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Līyati: {'def': '[lī, Vedic līyati; *lei to stick to or cleave: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. lino, which he separates in meaning fr. *lei to smear, polish] to stick. The Dhtp evidently favours the separation when interpreting lī by “silesana-dravīkaraṇa,” i. e. to make slip or run (Dhtp 441; Dhtm 681)] 1. to stick, adhere, cling to: see cpds. all°, o°, ni°, paṭisal°. -- 2. to melt, slip: see cpd. pavi° (to dissolve). -- pp. līna. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(li + ya), 收缩，使畏缩，执着。【过】 līyi。【过分】 līna, 【现分】līyamāna。【独】 līyitvā。(p272)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(li+ya), 收缩，使畏缩，执著。【过】līyi。【过分】līna,【现分】līyamāna。【独】līyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Līyitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. formation after similar synonymical chains, like bhāvitatta]=līyanā Dhs.1156. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Līḷhā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. of līḷha, Sk. līḍha, pp. of lih, lit. being polished, cp. ullīḍha polished] grace, ease, charm, adroitness; always used with ref. to the Buddha (Buddhalīḷhā), e. g. J.I,155; DhA.I,33; III,79. So in phrase Buddhalīḷhāya dhammaṁ deseti “to expound the doctrine with the Buddha’s mastery” J.I,152, 155; III,289; VvA.217 (spelling wrongly līḷāya). Of the B’s gait: J.I,93, 149; DhA.II,41. The combⁿ with vilāsa, as mentioned by Childers, applies to līlā (q. v.), which may stand for līḷhā at the passages mentioned, although not used of the Buddha. (Page 584)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lūka: {'def': '[apocope form of ulūka, arisen through wrong syllable-division] owl J.VI,497 (=ulūka C.). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lūkha: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic rūkṣa; Prk. lūha & lukkha; BSk. lūha, e. g. Divy 13 (praheṇaka), 81 (°cīvara), 425, 427] 1. rough, coarse, unpleasant; poor, bad (usually appl^d to dress or food); mediocre, meȧgre, wretched. Opp. paṇīta (e. g. Vin.I,212; S.II,153; A.IV,10; J.I,228; VvA.64). -- S.IV,337 sq.; A.IV,232 sq.; Vin.I,55; Th.1, 923; J.I,228 (cittasmiṁ paṇīte . . . dānaṁ lūkhaṁ na hoti); Nd² 342 (p. 182, in exegesis of nikkuha, where practices of ascetics are referred to as “lūkhaṁ cīvaraṁ dhāreti, l. piṇḍapātaṁ bhuñjati, l. senāsanaṁ paṭisevati” etc.); VvA.298, 335 sq.; PvA.180. -- 2. (of men) low, wretched, rough, miserable, offensive Vin.I,199; III,110 (kisa l. dubbaṇṇa); S.I,175 (=jiṇṇa C, see K.S. 320; trslⁿ “looking worn”); M.I,77=J.I,390. --lūkhapuggala a miserable, offensive character (opp. siniddhapuggala) Vism.132; VbhA.282.

--ājīvin leading a hard or rough life D.I,161; III,44, 47; S.II,200; A.V,190. --cīvara (adj.) wearing a shabby robe, badly clad Vin.III,263; Miln.342 (cp. cīvara lūkha bad condition of clothes A.II,71=Pug.53; lūkhacīvara-dhara A.I,25). --ppamāṇa (& °ika) taking unpleasantness or misery as one’s standard A.II,71= Pug.53 (cp. PugA 229); DhA.III,114; SnA 242; cp. rūpa-ppamāṇa. --ppasanna believing in shabbiness or mediocrity, having (bodily) wretchedness as one’s faith Vin.II,197; A.II,71=Pug.53. --pāpuraṇa miserably clad S.I,175; DhA.IV,8, 9. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】粗糙的，粗鄙的，悲惨的。 ~cīvara, 【形】穿粗糙的袈裟的。~tā, 【阴】粗糙。 ~ppasanna, 【形】对卑鄙的人的奉献。 ~ājīvī, 【无】过着悲惨的生活。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】粗糙的，粗鄙的，悲惨的。lūkhacīvara,【形】穿粗糙的袈裟的。lūkhatā,【阴】粗糙。lūkhappasanna,【形】对卑鄙的人的奉献。lūkhājīvī,【无】过著悲惨的生活。lūkho lūkhapāvuraṇo, 穿粗鄙的宽大外衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Lūkhasa: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. lūkha] rough, harsh; miserable, selfmortifying Sn.244 (=nīrasa atta-kilamath’ânuyutta SnA 287). (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lūkhatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. lūkha] unpleasantness, wretchedness, poorness, misery PugA 229. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lūna: {'def': '[pp. of lunāti] cut, mowed, reaped Th.2, 107 (°kesī); J.II,365; Dāvs.I,32. Cp. vi°. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lūtā: {'def': '(f.) [*Sk. lūtā] spider Abhp 621. (Page 585)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Lūṇa: {'def': 'lūna (lunāti 的【过分】), 已收获，已割草。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'lūna (lunāti 的【过分】), 已收获，已割草。(p273)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

M: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十五个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 m。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第二十五个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 m。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ma: {'def': '(-kāra) the letter or sound m J.III,273 (sandhi-vasena vutta put in for the sake of euphony); V,375 (ma-kāro sandhikaro); KhA 155, 224; SnA 181, 383, 404. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mabiccha: {'def': '【形】贪婪的。 ~tā, 【阴】贪欲。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Macca: {'def': '(orig. grd. of marati, mr corresponding to Sk. martya. A diaeretic form exists in P. mātiya),【阳】男人(man, a mortal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】男人。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [orig. grd. of marati, mṛ corresponding to Sk. martya. A diaeretic form exists in P. mātiya (q. v.)] mortal; (m.) man, a mortal S.I,55; Sn.249, 577, 580, 766; J.III,154; IV,248; V,393; Dh.53, 141, 182; Vv 63¹²; Kvu 351. -- See also refs. under jāta. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maccha: {'def': 'm. [Sk. Matsya] マッチャ, 婆蹉 [十六大国の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】鱼。 ~ṇḍa, 【中】鱼蛋。 ~ṇḍī, 【阴】外表似鱼蛋的糖（鱼珠糖）。 ~maŋsa, 【中】鱼和肉。 ~bandha, 【阳】渔夫。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic matsya] fish A.III,301; Sn.605, 777, 936; J.I,210, 211; V,266 (in simile); VI,113 (phandanti macchā, on dry land); Pug.55; Sdhp.610. --maccha is given at Nd² 91 as syn. of ambucārin. --pūti° rotten fish M.III,168; & in simile at It.68=J.IV,435=VI,236 =KhA 127. Cp. J.P.T.S. 1906, 201. bahu° rich in fish J.III,430. loṇa° salt fish Vism.28. rohita° the species Cyprinus rohita J.II,433; III,333; DhA.II,132. On maccha in simile see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121. Of names of fishes several are given in the Jātaka tales; viz.Ānanda (as the king of the fishes or a Leviathan) J.I,207; II,352; V,462; Timanda & Timirapiṅgala J.V,462; Mitacintin J.I,427; Bahucintin J.I,427.

--maṁsa the flesh of fishes Sn.249. --bandha one who sets net to catch fish, a fisherman A.III,301; Vism.379. --bhatta food for fishes, devoured by fishes J.V,75. --vālaka a garment made in a particular fashion (forbidden to bhikkhus) Vin.II,137. --sakalika “a bit of fish” (fish-bone?) in description of constitution of the finger nails at Vism.250=KhA 43=VbhA.233. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic matsya),【阳】鱼(fish)。macchaṇḍa,【中】鱼蛋。macchaṇḍī,【阴】外表似鱼蛋的糖(鱼珠糖)。macchamaṁsa,【中】鱼和肉。macchabandha,【阳】渔夫。phandanti macchā, 在乾地上(on dry land)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Macchara: {'def': 'macchariya,【形】【中】悭，小气，吝啬(niggard)(不布施、少布施、布施少都可能是悭的表现)。吝啬：台语：竭kiat8，硞khok，冻霜tang3 sng，寒酸han5 suan。「悭」属於瞋，「悭」「贪」不能同时存在，「悭贪」为经论中普遍的误译，「悭贪」早在后汉(A.D.25~220)，就出现在诸译家的译经中，如︰安世高(?-170 A.D.)、安玄(汉灵之末(188A.D.)游贾洛阳)、支娄迦谶(147-185 A.D)等。四阿含经的翻译也沿用此名词。maccharī,【阳】守财奴。台语：竭仔哥kiat8a2 ko，硞仔头khok a2 thau5，吝啬鬼ni2 sinn3 kui2。“Macchariyaṁ paṭicca ārakkho ti”iti, 由於悭悋而有守护」。cf. luddha, 【阳】吝啬鬼(miser)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic matsara & matsarin enjoyable; later period also “envious,” cp. maccharin] niggardly, envious, selfish Pgdp II.49. --maccharaṁ (nt.) avarice, envy A.IV,285; Sn.811, 862, 954 (vīta-macchara, adj.). (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'macchariya, 【中】贪婪，吝啬，小气。 ~charī,【阳】守财奴。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maccharin: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic matsarin, fr. mat+sṛ, i. e. “reflecting to me”] selfish, envious, greedy (cp. Dhs.trsl.² p. 320); A.II,82; III,139, 258, 265; D.III,45, 246; Dh.263; Sn.136, 663; Nd¹ 36; J.I,345; V,391; Vv 52²⁶; Pug.20; DhsA.394; DhA.II,89; Sdhp.89, 97. -- a° unselfish D.III,47; A.IV,2; Sn.852, 860; It.102. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic matsarin, fr. mat+sr, i. e. “reflecting to me”) ,【形】悭，吝啬(niggard)。maccharinī,【阴】。amaccharin, 不吝啬(niggard)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Macchariya: {'def': '& Macchera (nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. mātsarya] avarice, stinginess, selfishness, envy; one of the principal evil passions & the main cause of rebirth in the Petaloka. -- 1. macchariya: A.I,95, 299; III,272; Dh.III,44 (issā°), 289; Sn.863 (°yutta), 928; Pug.19, 23; Vbh.357, 389, 391. -- Five sorts of selfishness are mentioned: āvāsa°, kula°, lābha°, vaṇṇa°, dhamma° D.III,234; Nd¹ 118, 227; A.IV,456; Dhs.1122 (cp. Dhs.tsrl.² p. 276); Vism.683; DhsA.373, 374. Selfishness is one of the evil conditions which have to be renounced as habits of mind by force of intelligence A.V,40, 209; Miln.289; PvA.87, 124. -- 2. macchera A.I,105 (°mala), 281; Dh.242; It.18; Nd¹ 260; Sdhp.313, 510. At A.II,58 and elsewhere the state called vigata-mala-macchera “with the stain of avarice vanished,” is freq. mentioned as a feature of the blameless life and a preparation for Arahantship. -- Note. The (etym.) explⁿ of macchariya at VbhA.513 is rather interesting: “idaṁ acchariyaṁ mayhaṁ eva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṁ hotū ti pavattattā macchariyan ti vuccati” (from the Purāṇas? ). (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maccharāyanā: {'def': '(f.) & Maccharāyitatta (nt.) the condition of selfishness, both expressions in defⁿ of macchariya at Dhs.1122; Pug.19, 23; DhsA.375. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maccharāyati: {'def': '(macchariya 的【派】), 自私，贪婪，小气。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Demon. fr. macchariya] to be selfish, greedy or envious J.VI,334; DhA.II,45, 89. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(macchariya 的【派】), 小气。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Macchera: {'def': '参考 Macchariya。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】悭，吝啬。参考Macchariya。A.5.34./III,40.︰Tasmā hi dānāni dadanti paṇḍitā, Vineyya maccheramalaṁ sukhesino.(是故诸智者，布施诸礼物，引离悭垢且求乐。) 。S.1.32./I,18.︰“Tasmā vineyya maccheraṁ, dajjā dānaṁ malābhibhū; Puññāni paralokasmiṁ, patiṭṭhā honti pāṇinan”ti.(是故引离悭，布施胜垢秽；诸功德在后世，有息者立足处。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'see macchariya. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Macchika: {'def': '[fr. maccha] a fish-catcher, fisherman A.III,301; J.V,270; VI,111; Miln.331. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Macchī: {'def': '【阴】雌鱼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [of maccha] a female fish J.II,178. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】雌鱼。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maccu: {'def': '[in form=Vedic mṛtyu, fr. mṛ; in meaning differentiated, the Ved.--Sk. meaning “death” only] the God of Death, the Buddhist Māra, or sometimes equivalent to Yama S.I,156; Sn.357 (Gen. maccuno), 581 (Instr. maccunā), 587; Th.1, 411; Dh.21, 47, 128, 135, 150, 287; VbhA.100; SnA 397; DhA.III,49; Sdhp.295, 304.

--tara one who crosses or overcomes death Sn.1119 (=maraṇaṁ tareyya Nd² 486). --dheyya the realm of Māra, the sphere of Death S.I,4; adj. belonging to death or subject to death (=Māradheyya, maraṇadheyya Nd² 487^b). -- Sn.358, 1104 (with explⁿ “m. vuccanti kilesā ca khandhā ca abhisaṅkhārā ca” Nd² 487^a), 1146 (°pāra-maccudheyyassa pāraṁ vuccati amataṁ nibbānaṁ Nd² 487); Th.2, 10 (=maccu ettha dhīyati ThA.13); Dh.86; DhA.II,161. --parāyaṇa surmounting death Sn.578; pareta id. Sn.579. --pāsa the sling or snare of Māra Sn.166; J.V,367. --bhaya the fear of death Mhvs 32, 68. --maraṇa dying in death M.I,49 (cp. C. on p. 532: maccu-maraṇan ti maccu-saṅkhātaṁ maraṇaṁ tena samuccheda-maraṇ’ādīni nisedheti. -- See also def. of maraṇa s.v.). --mukha the mouth of death Sn.776; Nd¹ 48. --rājā the king of death Sn.332, 1118 (=Maro pi Maccurājā maraṇaṁ pi Nd² 488); Dh.46, 170; KhA 83. --vasa the power of death 3 I.52: Sn.587, 1100 (where maccu is expl^d by maraṇa & Māra). --hāyin leaving death behind, victorious over death It.46=Sn.755; Th.1, 129. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】死亡，魔王。 ~tara, 【形】克服死亡者。 ~dheyya, 【中】死亡的领域。 ~parāyaṇa, ~pareta, 【形】超越死亡的。 ~pāsa, 【阳】死亡的陷阱。 ~mukha, 【中】魔王的嘴。 ~rāja, 【阳】死王（魔王）。 ~vasa,【阳】死亡的力量。 ~hāyī, 【形】战胜死亡的。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=Vedic mrtyu, fr. mr; in meaning differentiated, the Ved.--Sk. meaning “death” only),【阳】死亡，魔王(the God of Death, the Buddhist Māra, or sometimes equivalent to Yama) (Gen. maccuno), (Instr. maccunā)。maccutara,【形】克服死亡者。maccudheyya,【中】死亡的领域。maccuparāyaṇa, maccupareta,【形】超越死亡的。maccupāsa,【阳】死亡的陷阱。maccumukha,【中】魔王的嘴。maccurāja,【阳】死王(魔王)。maccuvasa,【阳】死亡的力量。maccuhāyin,【形】战胜死亡的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mada: {'def': '【阳】自豪，陶醉，醉，自负，性爱的过度。madanīya,【形】使陶醉的，使执著的。jātimada出生自豪, gottamada种姓自豪﹐ārogyamada健康自豪﹐yobbanamada年轻自豪﹐jīvita-mada长寿自豪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic mada, mad (see majjati), Idg. *mad, as in Av. mata intoxication, drink, mad, to get intoxicated orig. meaning “drip, be full of liquid or fat”; cp. Gr. madάw dissolve, mastόs breast (mazόs›Amazone), Lat. madeo to be wet, Ohg. mast fattening, Sk. meda grease, fat, Gr. mέzea; mestόs full; Goth. mats eatables, Ags. mōs, Ohg. muos=gemüse, etc. Perhaps connected with *med in Lat. medeor to heal. For further relations see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. madeo. -- The Dhtp (412) & Dhtm (642) explain mad by “ummāde” Dhtm 210 also by “muda, mada=santose”] 1. intoxication, sensual excess, in formula davāya madāya maṇḍanāya (for purposes of sport, excess, personal charm etc.) M.I,355=A.II,40= Nd¹ 496=Nd² 540=Pug.21=Dhs.1346, 1348. The commentator’s expl^ns bearing directly or indirectly on this passage distinguish several kinds of mada, viz. māna-mada & purisa-mada (at DhsA.403; Vism.293), or muṭṭhika-mall’ādayo viya madatthaṁ bala-mada-nimittaṁ porisa-mada-nimittañ cā ti vuttaṁ (at Vism.31). Sn.218 (mada-pamāda on which passage SnA 273 comments on mada with jāti-mad’ādi-bhedā madā). -- 2. (as mental state or habit) pride, conceit Miln.289 (māna, m., pamāda); Vbh.345 (where 27 such states are given, beginning with jāti°, gotta°, ārogya°, yobbana°, jīvita-mada), 350 (where mada is paraphrased by majjanā majjitattaṁ māno . . . uṇṇati . . . dhajo sampaggāho ketukamyatā cittassa: same formula, as concluding exegesis of māna at Nd² 505 & Dhs.1116); sometimes more def. characterised with phrase mada-matta elated with the pride or intoxication of . . . (-°). e. g. A.I,147 (yobbana°, ārogya°, jīvita°); PvA.86 (māna°), 280 (bhoga°). -- The traditional exegesis distinguishes only 3 mada’s, viz. ārogya- mada the pride of health, yobbana° of youth, jīvita° of life: D.III,220; A.I,146.

--nimmadana “disintoxication from intoxication,” freedom from pride or conceit A.II,34; Bu I.81; Vism.293. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】自豪，陶醉，自负，性爱的过度。 ~nīya, 【形】使陶醉的，使执着的。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Madana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mad] lit. making drunk, intoxication Nd² 540 C. (in formula davāya madāya madanāya, instead of maṇḍanāya: see under mada 1); in cpd. °yuta intoxicated, a name for the Yakkhas J.I,204. ‹-› Cp. nimmadana. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】爱神。【中】陶醉。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】爱神。【中】1.陶醉。2.磨陀罗果，醉果(大如槟榔，不圆不长)(世尊头如磨陀罗果, T15.276.3)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Madanīya: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [orig. grd. of madati] 1. intoxicating D.II,185 (sadda vaggu rajanīya kāmanīya m.). -- 2. intoxication VvA.73. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Madati: {'def': '﹐自负(proud of)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Madda: {'def': '1. [fr. mṛd, Sk. marda] crushing etc.; kneading, paste, in piṭṭha paste of flower Vin.II,151; J.III,226 (piṭṭhi°). -- 2. [dialectical, cp. Sk. madra] N. of a country & its inhabitants, in °raṭṭha SnA 68 sq.; °rājakula KhA 73.

--viṇā a sort of girdle Vin.II,136. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maddana: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. mardana, fr. mṛd] 1. crushing, grinding, destroying J.IV,26; Miln.21 (adj.,+mathana); Sdhp.449; Dhtp 156. -- 2. threshing Miln.360. -- See also nimmaddana, pamaddana, parimaddana. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】压(轧)碎，踩踏，打谷。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】压（轧）碎，踩踏，打谷。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maddarī: {'def': '(f.) [?] a species of bird, in cpd. ambaka° A.I,188. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maddati: {'def': '(madd压破+a), 压破，践踏，征服，【过】maddi。【过分】maddita。【现分】maddanta。【独】madditvā, maddiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic mṛd to crush: see etym. under mattikā] 1. to tread on, trample on (Acc.), crush J.III,245, 372 (ppr. maddamāna); DhA.II,66. -- 2. to defeat, destroy Sn.770 (=abhibhavati Nd¹ 12); Nd² 85 (madditvā=abhibhuyya); SnA 450; Mhvs 1, 41. -- fig. to crush a heresy: vādaṁ m. Mhvs 36, 41. -- 3. to neglect (an advice), spurn J.III,211 (ovādaṁ). -- 4. to mix up, knead, jumble together DhA.II,155. -- 5. to thresh J.I,215. -- 6. to break down, upset J.I,500 (vatiṁ, a fence). -- 7. to draw together (a net) J.I,208. -- Caus. I. maddeti to cause to be trampled on Mhvs 29. 4 (aor. maddayi). -- Caus. II. maddāpeti to cause to be threshed Vin.II,180. -- pp. maddita. See also pari°. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(madd + a), 压破，践踏，征服，【过】 maddi。【过分】 ~dita。【现分】 ~danta。【独】 ~ditvā, maddiya。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maddava: {'def': '(adj. nt.) [fr. mṛdu, cp. Epic Sk. mārdava] 1. mild, gentle, soft, suave Dhs.1340; Vbh.359; Miln.229 (cittaṁ mudukaṁ m. siniddhaṁ), 313 (mudu°), 361 (among the 30 best virtues, with siniddha & mudu). ‹-› 2. (fr. madda) as Np. name of a king, reigning in Sāgala, the capital of Madda. -- 3. withered Dh.377 (=milāta DhA.IV,112). -- nt. maddavaṁ mildness, softness, gentleness Sn.250 (ajjava+), 292 (id.); J.III,274 (as one of the 10 rāja-dhammā); V,347 (=mettacittaṁ); DhsA.151. See also sūkara°. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】柔和，温和，软的事物。【形】温和的，文雅的，软的。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】柔和，温和，软的事物。【形】温和的，文雅的，软的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maddavatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. maddava] gentleness, softness, suavity Dhs.44, 1340; DhsA.151. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maddhita: {'def': '[of mṛdh] see pari°. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maddin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mṛd, cp. Sk. mardin=mardana] crushing, destroying Sdhp.218. Cp. pamaddin. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maddita: {'def': '(maddati 的【过分】), 已压破，已征服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of maddeti, see maddati] 1. kneaded, mixed, in su° Vism.124. -- 2. crushed, defeated, in su° Miln.284. -- Cp. pa°, pari°. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(maddati 的【过分】), 已压破，已征服。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maddālaka: {'def': '[etym.?] a kind of bird J.VI,538. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Madhu: {'def': '[cp. Vedic madhu, Gr. mέqu wine, Lith. medùs honey, midùs wine, Ohg. metu=Ger. met wine. Most likely to root *med to be full of juice: see under madati] honey J.I,157 sq.; IV,117; Dh.69 (madhū vā read as madhuvā); Mhvs 5, 53; DhsA.330; DhA.II,197 (alla° fresh honey). -- pl. madhūni Mhvs 5, 31. -- The Abhp (533) also gives “wine from the blossom of Bassia latifolia” as meaning. -- On madhu in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 121.

--atthika (madh°) at J.III,493 is with v. l. to be read madhu-tthika (q. v. below). The proposal of Kern’s (Toev. s. v.) to read madh’aṭṭhika “with sweet kernels” cannot be accepted. The C. expl^ns rightly by “madhura-phalesu pakkhitta-madhu viya, madhura-phalo hutvā.” --atthika (madhu°) desirous of honey, seeking honey J.IV,205; Mhvs 5, 50. --āpaṇa (madhv°) honey shop Mhvs 5, 52. --āsava (madhv°) honey extract, wine from the flower of Bassia latifolia VvA.73 (as one of the 5 kinds of intoxicating liquors). --kara “honey-maker,” bee J.IV,265; Vism.136 (in simile); DhA.I,374. --gaṇḍa honey-comb Mhvs 22, 42; 34, 52. --tthika [madhu+thika, which latter stands for thīya, fr. styā to congeal, drip; see thika, thīna, thīya and theva] dripping with honey, full of honey J.III,493 (so read for madh-atthika); VI,529 (=madhuṁ paggharanto C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. unnecessarily reads as °atthika which he takes=°aṭṭhika. --da giving honey, liberal Mhvs 5, 60 (Asoka). --paṭala honey-comb J.I,262; DhA.I,59; III,323. --piṇḍikā a ball of honey (to eat), honey-food, a meal with honey Vin.I,4; M.I,114. --pīta having drunk honey, drunk with honey S.I,212. --(b)bata “courting honey,” a bee Dāvs III,65. --bindu a drop of honey Vism.531; VbhA.146 (°giddha, in comparison). --makkhitā smeared with honey J.I,158. --madhuka dripping with honey, full of honey J.VI,529. --mehika referring to a particular disease madhumeha (“honey-urine,” diabetes?) Vin.IV,8. --laṭṭhikā liquorice (no ref.?); cp. Laṭṭhi-madhukavana J.I,68. --lāja sweet corn J.IV,214, 281. --vāṇija honey seller Mhvs 5, 49. --ssava flowing with honey Pv.II,9¹¹. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】(蜂)蜜，以宽叶紫荆木花制造的酒。madhukā,【阳】宽叶紫荆木(东印度群岛紫荆属乔木 (Madhuca latifolia)，花多蜜，供食用和制作可致醉的饮料)。madhukara,【阳】蜜蜂。madhugaṇḍa, madhupaṭala,【阳】蜂巢。madhu-gandhika, 摩头揵提华，蜜香花。madhupa,【阳】蜜蜂，蜂蜜的吸管。madhupiṇḍikā,【阴】混合蜂蜜的面团。madhubbata,【阳】蜜蜂。madhumakkhita,【形】涂以蜂蜜的。madhumeha,【阳】糖尿病。madhulaṭṭhikā,【阴】甘草，甘草根，由甘草根熬成的精。madhulāja,【阳】混合蜂蜜的油炸玉黍蜀。madhulīha,【阳】蜜蜂。madhussava,【形】有蜂蜜的滴下物。madhūkapuppha,蜜花汁(the flower of Bassia latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】（蜂）蜜，以宽叶紫荆木花制造的酒。 ~kā, 【阳】宽叶紫荆木（东印度群岛紫荆属乔木 (Madhuca latifolia)，花多蜜，供食用和制作可致醉的饮料）。 ~kara, 【阳】蜜蜂。 ~gaṇḍa, ~paṭala, 【阳】蜂巢。 ~pa,【阳】蜜蜂，蜂蜜的吸管。 ~piṇḍikā, 【阴】混合蜂蜜的面团。 ~bbata,【阳】蜜蜂。 ~makkhita, 【形】涂以蜂蜜的。 ~meha, 【阳】糖尿病。~laṭṭhikā, 【阴】甘草，甘草根，由甘草根熬成的精。 ~lāja, 【阳】混合蜂蜜的油炸玉黍蜀。 ~līha, 【阳】蜜蜂。 ~ssava, 【形】有蜂蜜的滴下物。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Madhuka: {'def': '【阴】甘草（甘草属植物 (Glycyrrhiza) 的几种其他植物的任何一种）。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [fr. madhu] connected with honey. 1. (n.) the tree Bassia latifolia (lit. honey tree) Vin.I,246; J.V,324, 405; VI,529; Miln.165. -- 2. the fruit of that tree J.IV,434. -- 3. (adj.) (-°) full of honey J.VI,529 (madhu° containing honey). -- 4. connected with an intoxicating drink, given to the drink of (-°) J.IV,117 (surā-meraya°).

--aṭṭhika the kernel (of the fruit) of Bassia latifolia Vism.353=KhA 43 (which latter reads madhukaphal’aṭṭhi; in the description of the finger nails). --puppha the flower of Bassia latifolia from which honey is extracted for liquor Vin.I,246 (°rasa liquorice juice); J.I,430. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Madhukā: {'def': '【阴】甘草(Liquorice；Glycyrrhiza)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. madhuka] honey drink, sweet drink, liquor Mhvs 5, 52. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Madhura: {'def': '【形】甜的。【中】甜蜜事物。 ~tta, 【中】 ~tā, 【阴】甜蜜，可爱。 ~ssara, 【形】有悦耳的声音的。【阳】悦耳的声音。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. madhu] 1. sweet Sn.50; J.III,493; V,324; Pv.II,67; PvA.119, 147. -- 2. of intoxicating sweetness, liquor-like, intoxicating J.IV,117. -- 3. (nt.) sweetness, sweet drink Dh.363; J.I,271 (catu° the 4 sweet drinks, used as cure after poison); Dhs.629; DhsA.320. -- 4. (nt.) flattery, praise SnA 287 (opp. avaṇṇa).

--rasa sweet (i. e. honey-) juice, sweet liquor DhA.II,50; PvA.119. --ssara sweet-sounding VvA.57; PvA.151; Mhvs 5, 32. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】甜的。【中】甜蜜事物。madhuratta,【中】madhuratā,【阴】甜蜜，可爱。madhurassara,【形】有悦耳的声音的。【阳】悦耳的声音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Madhuraka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. madhura, cp. similarly madhuka› madhu] full of sweet drink, intoxicated, in phrase madhuraka-jātokāyo viya “like an intoxicated body,” i. e. without control, weak. The usual translation has been “become languid or weak” (“erschlafft” Ger.). Franke, Dīgha Übs. 202 (where more literature) translates: “Ich fūhlte mich schwach, wie ein zartes Pflänzchen, “ hardly justifiable. -- D.II,99; M.I,334; S.III,106, A.III,69. The description refers to a state of swooning, like one in a condition of losing consciousness through intoxication. Rh. D. (Dial. II.107) translates “my body became weak as a creeper,” hardly correct.

taken as noun also by Winternitz (Rel. gesch. Lesebuch 301): “wohl eine zarte Pflanze mit schwachen Stengel.” F. L. Woodward follows me in discarding trslⁿ “creeper” and assuming one like “intoxicated” (so also UdA, 246): see his note on S.III,106 trslⁿ (K.S.III,90). (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Madhuratta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. madhura] sweetness Mhvs 2, 13. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Madhurattha-vilāsinī: {'def': 'f. 仏種姓経註 [BvA.].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Madhuratā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. madhura] sweetness J.I,68. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Madhvāsava: {'def': '【阳】以宽叶紫荆木花制造的酒。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】以宽叶紫荆木(Bassia)花制造的酒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Madira: {'def': '【阴】谷类制成的酒。(p249)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】谷类制成的酒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Madirā: {'def': '(f.) [of adj. Vedic madira intoxicating] intoxicating drink, spirit J.V,425; DhsA.48. (Page 518)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maga: {'def': '【阳】四脚动物。 ~sira, 觜宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[another form of miga=Sk. mṛga, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. 12⁴] 1. animal for hunting, deer, antelope M.I,173 (in simile); S.I,199 (id.); A.I,70; II,23; Th.1, 958, 989; Sn.275, 763, 880; J.V,267. -- 2. a stupid person J.VI,206, 371. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(another form of miga=Sk. mrga),【阳】1.猎狩的动物(animal for hunting, deer, antelope)。2.愚蠢的人(a stupid person J.VI.206, 371.)。magasira, 觜宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Magadha: {'def': '【阳】摩揭陀国(包括现在的比哈尔省 (Bihar) 和奥里萨邦 (Orissa))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（古国名）马嘎塔，（古音译：）摩揭陀，摩羯陀，默竭陀', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'm. [〃] 摩掲陀 [十六大国の一, 首都は. Rājagaha] -bhāsā マガダ語. Magadhāna nirutti マガダ人の語法.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】摩揭陀国（包括现在的比哈尔省 (Bihar) 和奥里萨邦 (Orissa)）。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Magga: {'def': '道 (参考ariyamagga)', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}; {'def': '【阳】路径，道路，方法。 ~kilanta,【形】因步行而疲倦的。 ~kusala,【形】识途者。 ~kkhāyī, 【形】指对路者。 ~ṅga, 【中】（八正）道支（即：正见、正思维、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定）。 ~ñāṇa,【中】道智。 ~ññū, ~vidū, 【形】识道者。 ~ṭṭha, 【形】在道上者，证道者。 ~dūsī, 【阳】拦路强盗。 ~desaka, 【形】指路者。 ~patipanna,【形】旅行者，上道者。 ~bhāvanā, 【阴】修道。 ~mūḷha, 【形】迷路者。 ~sacca, 【中】道谛（四圣谛之一）。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. mārga, fr. mṛg to track, trace] 1. a road (usually high road), way, foot-path Vism.708 (maggaṁ agata-pubba-purisa, simile of); VbhA.256 (tiyojana°, simile of a man travelling); DhA.I,229. -- addhāna° high road Vin.IV,62; M.III,158; see under addhāna; antāra-magge on the road Miln.16; ujuka° a straight way S.I,33; DhA.I,18; ummagga (a) a conduit; (b) a devious way: see ummagga, to which add refs. J.V,260; Th.2, 94; kummagga a wrong path: see kum°, to which add S.IV,195; Th.1, 1174. passāva° & vacca° defecation & urination Vin.III,127; visama° a bad road S.I,48. -- 2. the road of moral & good living, the path of righteousness, with ref. to the moral standard (cp. the 10 commandments) & the way to salvation. The exegetic (edifying) etym. of magga in this meaning is “nibbān’atthikehi maggīyati (traced by those who are looking for N.), nibbānaṁ vā maggeti, kilese vā mārento gacchatī ti maggo” (VbhA.114). ‹-› Usually designated (a) the “ariya aṭṭhaṅgika magga” or the “Noble Eightfold Path” (see aṭṭhaṅgika). It is mentioned at many places, & forms the corner-stone of the Buddha’s teaching as to the means of escaping “dukkha” or the ills of life. It consists of 8 constituents, viz. sammā-diṭṭhi, sammā-saṅkappa, °vācā, °kammanta, °ājīva, °vāyāma, °sati, °samādhi, or right views, right aspirations, right speech, right conduct, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, right rapture. The 7 first constituents are at D.II,216 & M.III,71 enum^d as requisites for sammā-samādhi. The name of this table of ethical injunctions is given as “maggam uttamaṁ” at Sn.1130, i. e. the Highest Path. See for ref. e. g. Vin.III,93; IV,26; D.II,353; III,102, 128, 284, 286; It.18; Nd¹ 292; Nd² 485; Vbh.104 sq. 235 sq., VbhA.114 sq. (its constituents in detail), 121, 216; Vism.509 sq. (where the 8 constituents are discussed). -- (b) as ariya magga: M.III,72; Pug.17; DA.I,176 sq., 225 sq., 233; VbhA.373 sq.; ThA.205. ‹-› (c) as pañcaṅgika or the Path of 5 constituents (the above first 2 and last 3): Dhs.89; Vbh.110 sq., 237 sq. -- (d) other expressions of same import: dhamma° Miln.21; magga alone; S.I,191 (Bhagavā maggassa uppādetā etc.)=M.III,9=S.III,66; Sn.429, 441, 724 sq., 1130; Dh.57, 273 sq., It.106; VbhA.53, 73. As the first condition & initial stage to the attainment of Arahantship (Nibbāna) it is often found in sequence of either magga-phala-nirodha (e. g. Vism.217, cp. Nd² under dukkha II. p. 168), or magga, phala, nibbāna (e. g. Tikp. 155 sq., 158; VbhA.43, 316, 488). -- magga as entrance to Arahantship is the final stage in the recognition (ñāṇa, pariññā, paññā) of the truth of the causal chain, which realises the origin of “ill,” the possibility of its removal & the “way” to the removal. These stages are described as dukkhe ñāṇaṁ, samudaye ñāṇaṁ nirodhe ñāṇaṁ and magge ñāṇaṁ at D.III,227, Ps.I,118. At the latter passage the foll. chapter (I.49) gives dukkha-nirodha gāminī paṭipadā as identical with magga. -- Note. On the term see Cpd. 41 sq., 66 sq., 175, 186; Dhs.trsl.² 58, 299 sq., 362 sq.; Expos. 216, 354ⁿ. On passages with aṭṭhaṅgika magga & others where magga is used in similes see Mrs. Rh. D. in J.P.T.S. 1907, pp. 119, 120. -- 3. Stage of righteousness, with ref. to the var. conditions of Arahantship divided into 4 stages, viz. sotāpatti-magga, sakadāgāmi°, anāgāmi°, arahatta°, or the stage of entering the stream (of salvation), that of returning once, that of the never-returner, that of Arahantship. -- At DhA.I,110 magga-phala “the fruit of the Path” (i. e. the attainment of the foundation or first step of Arahantship) is identical with sotāpattiphala on p. 113 (a) in general: arahatta° S.I,78; A.III,391; DA.I,224. -- (b) in particular as the 4 paths: Nd² 612 A; Vbh.322 sq., 328, 335; Vism.453, 672‹-› 678; DhA.IV,30; VbhA.301. -- 4. In the Tikapaṭṭhāna (under magga-paccaya-niddesa p. 52) 12 constituents of magga are enum^d; viz. paññā, vitakka, sammāvācā, s-kammanta, s-ājīva, viriya, sati, samādhi, micchā-diṭṭhi, micchā-vācā, m-kammanta, m-ājīva.

--aṅgāni the constituents of the Ariyan Path VbhA.120. --âmagga which is the (right) road and which is not M.I,147; Vism.ch. xx (°ssa kovida)=Sn.627; S.III,108 (id.); DhA.IV,169 (id.); A.V,47 (°ssa ñāṇadassana); Dh.403. --udaka water found on the road Vism.338 (simile). --kilanta wearied by the road J.I,129. --kusala one who is clever as regards the road, one who knows the road well S.III,108; Nd¹ 171; VbhA.332 (in simile); KhA 70, 126. --kovida=°kusala Nd¹ 446. --kkhāyin (should be °akkhāyin) one who tells the (right) way M.III,5; Nd¹ 33. --jina Conqueror of the paths Sn.84 sq. --jīvin who lives in the right path Sn.88. --jjhāyin reflecting over the Path Sn.85. --ñāṇa knowledge of the Path VbhA.416. --ññū knows the Path Nd¹ 446. --ṭṭhāna one who stands in the Path, attains the P. see Cpd. 23, 50. --ttaya the triad of the paths (i. e. the first 3 of the 4 Paths as given above under 3) DhA.IV,109. --dūsin highway robber Sn.84. --desaka one who points out the way, a guide Sn.84; J.IV,257; as °desika at DhA.II,246. --desin=°desaka Sn.87. --dhamma the rule of the Path, i. e. righteous living Sn.763. --dhīra wise as regards the Path Nd¹ 45. --paṭipanna-1. one on the road, i. e. wandering, tramping DhA.I,233. -- 2. one who has entered the Path Pv IV.3⁴⁹. --parissaya danger of the road VvA.200. --bhāvanā cultivation of the Path (i. e. righteousness) Nd¹ 323. --mūḷha one who has lost the way VvA.332. --vaṇṇa praise of the Path DhA.I,115. --vidū one who knows the Path Nd¹ 446. --sacca the truth concerning the Path VbhA.114, 124. --sira N. of a month DA.I,241. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '道', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '(梵 Mārga, fr. mrg to track, trace),【阳】路径，道路，方法。maggakilanta,【形】因步行而疲倦的。maggakusala,【形】识途者。maggakkhāyī,【形】指对路者。maggaṅga,【中】(八正)道支(即：正见、正思维、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定)。maggāṇa,【中】道智。maggañū, maggavidū,【形】识道者。maggaṭṭha,【形】在道上者，证道者。maggadūsī,【阳】拦路强盗。maggadesaka,【形】指路者。maggapatipanna,【形】旅行者，上道者。maggabhāvanā,【阴】修道。maggamūḷha,【形】迷路者。maggasacca,【中】道谛(四圣谛之一)。Mv.I,40.︰“…atthikehi upaññātaṁ maggan”ti.( ‘道’乃寻求者所发现。) DA.22./III,745.︰Maggoti kenaṭṭhena maggo? Nibbānagamanaṭṭhena nibbānatthikehi magganīyaṭṭhena ca.(道︰以何义称为‘道’？以趣向涅盘之义，以寻找涅盘，以被寻求之义。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maggana: {'def': '【中】magganā,【阴】搜寻，探寻。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 Magganā, 【阴】搜寻，探寻。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) & magganā (f.) [fr. magg] tracking, search for, covetousness Vism.29 (syn. for nijigiṁsanatā & gaveṭṭhi); Dhtp 298 (& gavesana). (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maggati: {'def': 'Mageti (mag+a), 寻求，追踪，探寻。【过】maggi。【过分】maggita。【独】maggitvā。Caus.II. maggāpeti PvA.112.。Pass. maggīyati VbhA.114。Pass. magganīya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mag + a), 寻求，追踪，探寻。【过】 ~maggi。【过分】 ~gita。【独】~gitvā。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& (spurious) mageti [denom. fr. magga, cp. Sk. margayati. The Dhtp. gives both mag & magg in meaning “anvesana,” i. e. tracking, following up; see Dhtp Nos. 21, 540, 541] to track, hunt for, trace out, follow, seek M.I,334 (ppr. magayamana); S II 270 (pp. maggayamāna); Th.2, 384 (cp. ThA.255=pattheti); J.V,102 (where T. reads maggheyya, which is expl^d by C. as vijjheyya to pierce, hurt, & which is doubtful in meaning, although Kern, Toev. s. v. defends it. The v. l. reads magg°. Same on p. 265 where one ought to read phasseyya in C. instead of passeyya. The form pp. magga (?) on p. 102 must belong to the same root); DhsA.162 (=gavesati). -- Caus. II. maggāpeti PvA.112. -- Pass. maggīyati VbhA.114. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maggañāṇa: {'def': '道智。随著道心而生起的智慧，它能见到涅盘。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Maggeti: {'def': '(mag+e), 寻求，追踪，探寻。参考 Maggati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mag + e), 参考 Maggati。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Magghati: {'def': 'see maggeti. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maggika: {'def': '【阳】旅客。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. magga] wayfarer, tramp DhA.I,233. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】旅客。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maggita: {'def': '(maggati 的【过分】)。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(maggati 的【过分】)已寻求。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maghavant: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. maghavā, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. Maia] N. of Indra, or another angel (devaputta) S.I,221 (Voc. maghavā; so read for mathavā), 229; Dh.30. Cp. māgha. (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. [〃] 摩伽婆(= Indra帝釈).', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Maghavantu: {'def': '【阳】帝释的一个浑名(Name of Indra, or another angel (devaputta) S.I,221 (Voc. maghavā; so read for mathavā), 229; Dh.30. Cp. māgha.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】释帝的一个浑名。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maghā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. *Sk. maghā] N. of a nakkhatta, in cpd. °deva SnA 352 (cp. M.II,74, n. 6, where spelling Makkādeva; we also find Makhadeva at Śatapatha-brāhmaṇa XIV. I. 1). (Page 513)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】星宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. *Sk. maghā),【阴】星宿(二十七星宿之一。Name of a nakkhatta, in cpd. maghādeva SnA 352 (cp. M.II,74, n. 6, where spelling Makkādeva; we also find Makhadeva at Watapatha-brāhmaṇa XIV. I. 1).)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maha: {'def': '【阳】宗教性的节日。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. & nt.) [fr. mah, see mahati & cp. Vedic nt. mahas] 1. worthiness, venerableness Miln.357. -- 2. a (religious) festival (in honour of a Saint, as an act of worship) Mhvs 33, 26 (vihārassa mahamhi, Loc.); VvA.170 (thūpe ca mahe kate), 200 (id.). mahā° a great festival Mhvs 5, 94. bodhi° festival of the Bo tree J.IV,229. vihāra° festival held on the building of a monastery J.I,94; VvA.188. hatthi° a festival called the elephant f. J.IV,95. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】宗教性的节日。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahabbala: {'def': '【形】有大力量的，有强烈的力量的。【中】大力量，大军队。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有大力量的，有强烈的力量的。【中】大力量，大军队。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahabbhaya: {'def': '【中】大恐惧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】大恐惧。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahaddhana: {'def': '【形】有大财富的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有大财富的。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahaggata: {'def': '【形】变大的，高的。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】变大的，高的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahaggha: {'def': '【形】非常昂贵的。 ~tā, 【阴】高价。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】非常昂贵的。mahagghatā,【阴】高价。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahagghasa: {'def': '【形】多吃的，暴食的。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】多吃的，暴食的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahallaka: {'def': '【形】老的，古旧的。【阳】老人。mahallakatara,【形】比较老的，更老的。mahallikā,【阴】老女人。mahallakitthiyo, f.pl.Nom.诸老女人。SA.1.54.︰puttā vatthūti mahallakakāle paṭijagganaṭṭhena puttā patiṭṭhā.(子乃人宅地︰老年阶段依靠儿子立足。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj. n.) [a distorted mah-ariyaka› ayyaka› allaka; cp. ayyaka] old, venerable, of great age; an old man D.I,90 (opp. taruṇa), 94, 114, 247; Sn.313, 603; Nd² 261 (vuḍḍha m. andhagata etc.) J.IV,482 (opp. dahara young); Vv 46¹ (=mahanto VvA.199); DhA.I,7, 278; II,4, 55, 91; SnA 313. Compar. mahallakatara DhA.II,18. -- f. mahallikā an old woman Miln.16; Mhvs 21, 27; VvA.105; PvA.149 (=addhagata). -- [The BSk. form is mahalla, e. g. Divy 329, 520.] (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】旧的，古旧的。【阳】老人。 ~tara, 【形】比较老的，更老的。 ~llikā, 【阴】老女人。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahannava: {'def': '【阳】大海洋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】大海洋。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahant: {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic mahant, which by Grassmann is taken as ppr. to mah, but in all probability the n is an original suffix. -- cp. Av. mazant, Sk. compar. mahīyān; Gr. mέgas (compar. mei/zwn), Lat. magnus, Goth. mikils=Ohg. mihhil=E. much] great, extensive, big; important, venerable. -- Nom. mahā Sn.1008; Mhvs 22, 27. Shortened to maha in cpd. pitāmaha (following a- decl.) (paternal) grandfather PvA.41; & mātāmaha (maternal) grandfather (q. v.). -- Instr. mahatā Sn.1027. -- pl. Nom. mahantā Sn.578 (opp. daharā). -- Loc. mahati Miln.254. -- f. mahī -- 1. one of the 5 great rivers (Np.). -- 2. the earth. See separately. -- nt. mahantaṁ used as adv., meaning “very much, greatly” J.V,170; DhA.IV,232. Also in cpd. mahantabhāva greatness, loftiness, sublimity DhsA.44. -- Compar. mahantatara DhA.II,63, and with dimin. suffix °ka J.III,237. -- The regular paraphrase of mahā in the Niddesa is “agga, seṭṭha, visiṭṭha, pāmokkha, uttama, pavara,” see Nd² 502.

Note on mahā & cpds. -- A. In certain cpds. the combⁿ with mahā (mah°) has become so established & customary (often through politeness in using mahā° for the simple term), that the cpd. is felt as an inseparable unity and a sort of “antique” word, in which the 2^nd part either does not occur any more by itself or only very rarely, as mah’aṇṇava, which is more freq. than aṇṇava; mah’âbhisakka, where abhisakka does not occur by itself; cp. mahânubhāva, mahiddhika mahaggha; or is obscured in its derivation through constant use with mahā, like mahesī [mah+esī, or īsī], mahesakkha [mah+esakkha]; mahallaka [mah+*ariyaka]; mahāmatta. Cp. E. great-coat, Gr. a)rx° in a)rx-iatrόs=Ger. arzt. Only a limited selection of cpd.-words is given, consisting of more frequent or idiomatic terms. Practically any word may be enlarged & emphasized in meaning by prefixing mahā. Sometimes a mahā° lends to special events a standard (historical) significance, so changing the common word into a noun proper, e. g. Mah-âbhinikkhammana, Mahāpavāraṇa. -- B. Mahā occurs in cpds. in (a) an elided form mah before a & i; (b) shortened to maha° before g, d, p, b with doubling of these consonants; (c) in the regular form mahā°: usually before consonants, sometimes before vowels. This form is contracted with foll. i to e and foll. u to o. In the foll. list of cpds. we have arranged the material according to these bases.

mah°: --aggha very costly, precious Pug.34; Mhvs 27, 35; PvA.77, 87; Sdhp.18. --agghatā costliness, great value Pug.34, Sdhp.26. --aṇṇava the (great) ocean Mhvs 19, 17. --atthiya (for °atthika) of great importance or use, very useful, profitable J.III,368. --andhakāra deep darkness Vism.417. --assāsin fully refreshed, very comfortable S.I,81.

maha°: --ggata “become great,” enlarged, extensive, fig. lofty, very great M.I,263; II,122; A.II,63, 184; III,18; VvA.155; J.V,113; Dhs.1020 (trslⁿ: “having a wider scope”) Vbh.16, 24, 62, 74, 126, 270, 326; Tikp. 45; Vism.410, 430 sq. (°ārammaṇa); VbhA.154 (id.), 159 (°citta); DhsA.44. See on term Cpd. 4, 12, 55, 101⁴; [cp. BSk. mahadgata Divy 227]. --gghasa eating much, greedy, gluttonous A.IV,92; P III,1¹¹ (=bahubhojana PvA.175); Miln.288; Dh.325 (cp. DhA.IV,16). --ddhana having great riches (often comb^d with mahābhoga) Dh.123; J.IV,15, 22. --pphala much fruit; adj. bearing much fruit, rich in result A.IV,60, 237 sq.; Sn.191, 486; Dh.312, 356 sq. --bbala (a) a strong force, a great army Mhvs 10, 68 (v. l., T. has mahā-bala); (b) of great strength, mighty, powerful J.III,114; Mhvs 23, 92; 25, 9. --bbhaya great fear, terror S.I,37; Sn.753, 1032, 1092, ep. Nd² 501.

mahå°: --anas kitchen Mhvs 5, 27 (spurious stanza). --anasa kitchen J.II,361; III,314; V,368; VI,349; DhA.III,309; ThA.5. --anila a gale Mhvs 3, 42. --ānisaṁsa deserving great praise (see s. v.), [cp. BSk. mahānuśaṁsa MVastu III,221]. --ānubhāva majesty, adj. wonderful, splendid J.I,194; J.VI,331; Pv III,3¹; PvA.117, 136, 145, 272. --aparādhika very guilty J.I,114. --abhinikkhamaṇa the great renunciation DhA.I,85. --abhisakka [abhi+śak] very powerful Th.1, 1111. --amacca chief minister Mhvs 19, 12. --araha costly Mhvs 3, 21; 5, 75; 27, 39; PvA.77, 141, 160.

mahā°: --alasa great sloth DhA.III,410. --avīci the great Purgatory Avīci, freq. --isi in poetry for mahesi at J.V,321. --upaṭṭhāna great state room (of a king) SnA 84. --upāsikā a great female follower (of the Buddha) VvA.5. --karuṇā great compassion DhA.I,106, 367. --kāya a great body Miln.16. --gaṇa a great crowd or community DhA.I,154. --gaṇḍa a large tumour VbhA.104. --gedha great greed Sn.819; Nd¹ 151. --cāga great liberality, adj. munificent Mhvs 27, 47. As °paricāga at SnA 295 (=mahādāna). --jana a great crowd, collectively for “the people,” a multitude PvA.6, 19, 78; Mhvs 3, 13. --taṇha (adj.) very thirsty J.II,441. --tala “great surface,” the large flat roof on the top of a palace (=upari-pāsāda-tala) J.VI,40. --dāna (see under dāna) the great gift (to the bhikkhus) a special great offering of food & presents given by laymen to the Buddha & his followers as a meritorious deed, usually lasting for a week or more Mhvs 27, 46; PvA.111, 112. --dhana (having) great wealth PvA.3, 78. --naraka (a) great Hell, see naraka. --nāga a great elephant Dh.312; DhA.IV,4. --nāma N. of a plant Vin.I,185; II,267. --niddā deep sleep PvA.47. --nibbāna the great N. DhA.IV,110. --niraya (a) great hell SnA 309, 480; PvA.52. See Niraya & cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie 199, 200. --nīla sapphire VvA.111. --pañña very wise D.III,158; A.III,244; Dh.352; DhA.IV,71. --patha high road D.I,102; Sn.139; Dh.58; Vism.235; DhA.I,445. --paduma a great lotus J.V,39; also a vast number & hence a name of a purgatory, cp. Divy 67; Kirfel, Kosmographie 205. --pitā grandfather PvA.107. --purisa a great man, a hero, a man born to greatness, a man destined by fate to be a Ruler or a Saviour of the World. A being thus favoured by fate possesses (32) marks (lakkhaṇāni) by which people recognise his vocation or prophesy his greatness. A detailed list of these 32 marks (which probably date back to mythological origin & were originally attributed to Devas) is found at D.II,17, 19, passim. -- D.III,287; Sn.1040 sq.; Dh.352; Miln.10; SnA 184, 187 sq., 223, 258, 357, 384 sq.; °lakkhaṇāni: D.I,88, 105, 116; Sn.549, 1000 sq.; Vism.234; VvA.315; DhA.II,41. --bhūta usually in pl. °bhūta(ni) (cattāro & cattā) the 4 great elements (see bhūta), being paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo, D.I,76; Nd¹ 266; Vbh.13, 70 sq.; Vism.366 sq.; Tikp 39, 56 sq., 74 sq., 248 sq.; VbhA.42, 169, 253. -- See Cpd. 154, 268 sq., & cp. dhātu 1. --bhoga great wealth, adj. wealthy PvA.3, 78. --maccha a great fish, seamonster J.I,483. --mati very wise, clever Mhvs 14, 22; 19, 84 (f. °ī); 33, 100 (pl. °ī). --matta [cp. Sk. mahāmātra] a king’s chief minister, alias Prime Minister, “who was the highest Officer-of-State and real Head of the Executive” (Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India, 1916). His position is of such importance, that he even ranges as a rājā or king: Vin.III,47 (rājā . . . akkhadassā mahāmattā ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṁ anusāsanti ete rājāno nāma). -- Note. An Acc. sg. mahā-mattānaṁ we find at A.I,154 (formed after the prec. rājānaṁ). -- Vin.I,74 (where two ranks are given: senā-nāyakā m.-mattā the m. of defence, and vohārikā m.-m. those of law); D.I,7; III,88; III,64 (here with Ep. khattiya); A.I,154, 252, 279; III,128; Vin.IV,224; Vism.121; VbhA.312 (in simile of two m.), 340; PvA.169. Cp. Fick. Sociale Gliederung 92, 99, 101. --muni great seer Sn.31. --megha a big cloud, thunder cloud M.II,117; Sn.30; Vism.417. --yañña the great sacrifice D.I,138 sq., 141 (cp. A.II,207≈). --yasa great fame Vv 21⁶; Mhys 5, 22. --raṅga [cp. Sk. m.-rajana], safflower, used for dyeing Vin.I,185 (sandals); II 267 (cloaks). --rājā great king, king, very freq.: see rājā. --rukkha a great tree Vism.413 (literally); Miln.254 (id.), otherwise the plant euphorbia tortilis (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 129). --lātā (-pasādhana) a lady’s parure called “great creeper” DhA.I,392; VvA.165 (-pilandhana); same SnA 520. --vātapāna main window DhA.IV,203. --vīṇā a great lute Vism.354; VbhA.58. --vīra (great) hero Sn.543, 562. --satta “the great being” or a Bodhisatta VvA.137 (v. l. SS. bodhisatta). [Cp. BSk. mahāsattva, e. g. Jtm 32]. --samudda the sea, the occean Mhvs 19, 18; Vism.403; SnA 30, 371; PvA.47. --sara a great lake; usually as satta-mahāsarā the 7 great lakes of the Himavant (see sara), enum^d e. g. at Vism.416. --sāra (of) great sap, i. e. great wealth, adj. very rich J.I,463 (°kula, perhaps to be read mahāsāla-kula). --sāla (adj.) having great halls, Ep. of rich people (especially brāhmaṇas) D.I,136, 235; III,16, 20; J.II,272 (°kula); IV,237 (id.), 325 (id.); V,227 (id.); Pug.56; VbhA.519; DhA.III,193. --sāvaka [cp. BSk. mahāśrāvaka Divy 489] a great disciple Vism.98 (asīti °ā); DhA.II,93. --senagutta title of a high official (Chancellor of the Exchequer?) J.V,115; VI,2. --hatthi a large elephant M.I,184 (°pada elephant’s foot, as the largest of all animal feet), referred to as simile (°opama) at Vism.243, 347, 348.

mahi° [mah’i°]: --iccha full of desire, lustful, greedy A.IV,229; Th.1, 898; It.91; J.I,8; II,441. --icchatā arrogance, ostentatiousness A.IV,280; VbhA.472. --iddhika [mahā+iddhi+ka] of great power, always comb^d with mah-ânubhāva to denote great influence, high position & majesty Vin.I,31; II,193; III,101; D.I,78, 180 (devatā), 213; S.I,145 sq.; II,155, 274 sq., 284 sq.; IV,323; V,265, 271 sq., 288 sq.; A.V,129; J.VI,483 (said of the Ocean); PvA.6, 136, 145. --inda (ghosa) lit. the roar of the Great Indra, Indra here to be taken in his function as sky (rain) god, thus: the thunder of the rain-god Th.1, 1108. [Cp. BSk. māhendra in °bhavana “the abode of the Great Indra,” and vaṛṣa “the rain of the Gr. I.” (here as rain-god), both at AvŚ I.210]. --issāsa [Sk. maheṣvāsa] great in the art of the bow, a great archer S.I,185; DhA.I,358.

mahe° [mahā+i]: --esakkha [mahā+īsa+khyaṁ; fr. īś] possessing great power or authority A.II,204; III,244; Nd² 503²; Vism.419; Sdhp.511. The BSk. form is maheṣākhya evidently differing in its etymology. The P. etym. rests on the same grounds as esitatta in mahesi DhA.IV,232. --esi [mahā+isi; Sk. maharṣi] a great Sage A.II,26; Sn.208, 481, 646, 915, 1057, 1061; Th.1, 1132; 2, 149; Dh.422 (expl^d at DhA.IV,232 as “mahantaṁ sīla-kkhandh’ādīnaṁ esitattā m.” cp. the similar explⁿ at Nd² 503); Nd¹ 343; Vism.505; VbhA.110; PvA.1. --esiyā=mahesī J.VI,483. --esī [in P. to be taken as mah+iś, as f. to īsa, but in Sk. (Vedic) as f. of mahiṣa, buffalo] chief queen, king’s first wife, king’s consort; also the wife of a great personage J.II,410; V,45; VI,425; Pug.56; Mhvs 2, 22 (pl. mahesiyo); VvA.184 (sixteen). Usually as agga-mahesī, e. g. J.I,262; III,187, 393; V,88. --esitta state of chief consort, queenship J.V,443; Pv.II,13¹⁰; ThA.37; VvA.102. --eseyya=°esitta J.V,91.

--maho [mahā+u, or+o]: --ogha the great flood (see ogha) Sn.4, 945; Dh.47, 287; DhA.III,433. --odadhi the (great) ocean, the sea Sn.720, 1134; Miln.224; Mhvs 18, 8. --odara big belly J.VI,358 (addressing a king’s minister). --odika full of water, having much water; deep, full (of a river) Sn.319; J.II,159; Miln.346. --oraga [m+uraga] a great snake J.V,165. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mahanta: {'def': '【形】很棒的，大的，广大的。 (mahantī, mahatī 【阴】), ~tara, 【形】比较棒的，更大的，更广大的。 ~tā, 【阴】 ~bhāva, 【阳】大。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】很棒的，大的，广大的。(mahantī, mahatī 【阴】，Mahatī parisā大众(大的群体)), mahantatara,【形】比较棒的，更大的，更广大的。mahantatā,【阴】mahantabhāva,【阳】大。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahantatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. mahant°] greatness DhA.II,62. At M.III,24 the spelling is mahattatā (tt misread for nt?), at M.I,184 however mahantatta (nt.). (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mahanīya: {'def': '【形】品格高尚的人。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of mahati] praiseworthy VvA.97. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】品格高尚的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahapphala: {'def': '【形】有大果报的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有大果报的。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahati: {'def': '(mah礼拜+a), 尊敬，崇敬。【过】mahi。【过分】mahita。【独】mahitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[mah; expl^d by Dhtp 331 as “pūjāyaṁ”] to honour, revere Vv 47¹¹ (pot. med. 1 pl. mahemase, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 129; expl^d as “mahāmase pūjāmase” at VvA.203). Caus. mahāyati in same sense: ger. mahāyitvāna (poetical) J.IV,236. -- Pass. mahīyati Vv 62¹ (=pūjīyati VvA.258); 64²² (ppr. mahīyamāna= pūjiyamāna VvA.282). pp. mahita. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mah + a), 尊敬，崇敬。【过】 mahi。【过分】 mahita。【独】mahitvā。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mahat° cp. Sk. mahattva] greatness J.V,331 (=seṭṭhatta C.); Vism.132, 232 sq.; VbhA.278 (Satthu°, jāti°, sabrahmacārī°); DA.I,35; VvA.191. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】大。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】大。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahaṇṇava: {'def': '【阳】大海洋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】大海洋。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahesakkha: {'def': '【形】有影响的，有大力量的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有影响的，有大力量的。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahesi: {'def': '(mahā+isi),【阳】大仙(大修行者﹐in poetry for mahesi)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(mahā + isi), 【阳】大仙（大修行者）。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahesī: {'def': '【阴】皇后。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】皇后。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahi-: {'def': '=mahā-. -iccha多欲者, 大欲者. -icchatā 大欲, 多欲. -itthī 老女, 年増女. -iddhi 大神カ. -iddhika 大神変の. -iddhikatā 大神力. -inda 雷電, 大因陀羅. -issara 大自在天. -issāsa [Sk. maheṣvāsa] 大弓術者.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahiccha: {'def': '(mahā大+iccha渴望),【形】贪婪的。mahicchatā,【阴】贪欲(【反】appicchatā知足)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahiddhika: {'def': '【形】大神通力。D.16./II,72.︰“Ahaṁ hime Vajjī evaṁmahiddhike evaṁmahānubhāve ucchecchāmi(or ucchejjāmi, or ucchijjāmi) Vajjī, vināsessāmi Vajjī, anayabyasanaṁ āpādessāmi Vajjī”ti(那些跋耆人虽有如是大神力、大威力，我欲伐之，我欲根绝跋耆人，我欲令跋耆人灭亡，我欲令跋耆人破灭。」)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】大神通力。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahikā: {'def': '【阴】霜。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】霜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. *Sk. mahikā] fog, frost, cold (=himaṁ DhsA.317) Vin.II,295=Miln.273; Sn.669; Miln.299; VvA.134 (fog). -- As mahiyā at A.II,53. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mahilā: {'def': '(f.) [*Sk. mahilā] woman, female Vin.II,281 (°titthe at the women’s bathing place); J.I,188; Dpvs IX.4; ThA.271. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】女人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】女人。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahinda: {'def': '【阳】摩哂陀(人名)，大因陀(神的领袖，大神王)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（比库名）马兴德，（古音译：）摩哂陀，摩醯陀', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阳】摩哼陀（人名），大因陀（神的领袖，大神王）。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=Mahāmahinda m. 摩哂陀 [阿育王の子, 出家してセイ口ンに仏教を伝える].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahisa: {'def': '【阳】水牛。mahisamaṇḍala,【中】摩醯沙慢陀罗国(国名，今印度的迈索尔市 (Mysore))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Mahīsa, Mahiṁsa [cp. Vedic mahiṣa, an enlarged form of mahā; the P. etym. evidently to be connected with mahā+īś, because of mahīsa›mahiṁsa] a buffalo. --mahisa: D.I,6 (°yuddha b.-fight), 9; J.III,26 (vana° wild b.); Mhvs 25, 36 (T. māhisaṁ). --mahīsa J.VI,110. --mahiṁsa Vism.191, & in Np. mahiṁsaka-maṇḍala the Andhra country J.I,356, cp. Mahiṁsaka-raṭṭha VbhA.4; as Mahisa-maṇḍala at Mhvs 12, 29. -- Note. The P. pop. etym. is propounded by Bdhgh as “mahiyaṁ setī ti mahiso” (he lies on the ground, that is why he is a buffalo) DhsA.62. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】水牛。 ~maṇḍala, 【中】摩醯沙慢陀罗国（国名，现在印度的迈索尔市 (Mysore)）。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahissara: {'def': '【阳】大君主，自在神 (Issara)。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】大君主，自在神 (Issara)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahita: {'def': '(mahati 的【过分】)。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(mahati 的【过分】) 尊敬，崇敬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of mahati or mahīyati] honoured, revered M.II,110; Miln.278; Sdhp.276. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mahiṃsāsaka: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Mahīśāsaka] 化地部, 弥沙塞部.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahodadhi: {'def': '【阳】大海。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】大海。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mahodara: {'def': '【形】有大肚子的。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有大肚子的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahogha: {'def': '【阳】大洪水。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】大洪水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahoraga: {'def': '【阳】龙王。(p253)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵巴同),【阳】摩睺罗伽、莫呼勒伽、摩休洛、摩伏勒。意译作大蟒神、大蟒蛇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahā: {'def': '(复合词中 mahanta 改成 mahā, 尾元音 ā 时常被弄短)。 ~upāsaka,【阳】大优婆塞（佛陀的大信徒）。 ~upāsikā【, 阴】大优婆夷（大女信徒）。 ~karuṇā,【阴】大悲。 ~kāya, 【形】有肥胖的身体，有大身体的。 ~gaṇa, 【阳】大团体。 ~gaṇī, 【阳】有许多追随者。 ~jana, 【阳】公众。 ~taṇha, 【形】大贪（非常贪婪的）。 ~tala, 【中】在宫殿的顶端上的大平坦的屋顶。 ~dhana,【中】大财富。 ~naraka, ~niraya, 【阳】大地狱。 ~nasa, 【中】厨房。~nubbāva, 【形】大权威的。 ~pañña, 【形】大智慧的（非常明智的）。~patha, 【阳】大道路。 ~pitu, 【阳】伯父。 ~purisa, 【阳】大人。 ~bhūta,【中】四大元素（地、水、火、风）。 ~bhoga, 【形】有大财富的。 ~mati,【阳】大智慧者。 ~matta, ~macca, 【阳】大臣，首席部长。 ~muni, 【阳】大牟尼。 ~megha, 【阳】大雨。 ~yañña, ~yāga, 【阳】大牺牲。 ~yasa,【形】大名望。 ~raha,【形】最宝贵的。 ~rāja,【阳】大王。 ~latāpasādhana,【中】（佩带在淑女身上的全套首饰被称为）大蔓草。 ~satta, 【阳】大众生，大有情。 ~samudda,【阳】大海。 ~sara, 【中】大湖。 ~sāra, ~sāla,【形】有大财富的。 ~sāvaka, 【阳】大弟子。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(复合词中 mahanta 改成 mahā, 尾母音 ā 时常被弄短)。mahupāsaka,【阳】大优婆塞(佛陀的大信徒)。mahupāsikā,【阴】大优婆夷(大女信徒)。mahākaruṇā,【阴】大悲。mahākāya,【形】有肥胖的身体，有大身体的。mahāgaṇa,【阳】大团体。mahāgaṇī,【阳】有许多追随者。mahāggata(mahaggataṁ cittaṁ), 【阳】广大心(大至心=色、无色界心)。mahājana,【阳】公衆。mahātaṇha,【形】大贪(非常贪婪的)。mahātala,【中】在宫殿的顶端上的大平坦的屋顶。mahādhana,【中】大财富。mahānaraka, mahāniraya,【阳】大地狱。mahānasa,【中】厨房。mahānubbāva,【形】大权威的。mahāpañña,【形】大智慧的(非常明智的)。mahāpatha,【阳】大道路。mahātāpana﹐大燃烧地狱，八大地狱之一。mahāpitu,【阳】伯父。mahāpurisa,【阳】大人。mahābhūta,【中】四大元素(地、水、火、风)。mahābhoga,【形】有大财富的。mahāmati,【阳】大智慧者。mahāmatta, mahāmacca,【阳】大臣，宰相，首席部长(唐朝宰相一般有数人担任，多时曾达十余人，其中有一位是首席宰相)。mahāmuni,【阳】大牟尼。mahāmegha,【阳】大雨。mahāyañña, mahāyāga,【阳】大牺牲。mahāyasa,【形】大名望。mahāraha,【形】最宝贵的。mahārāja,【阳】大王(印度还有称为︰devaputra天子、ajātiraja不世出之王)。mahāroruva﹐大号叫地狱，八大地狱之一。mahālatāpasādhana,【中】(佩带在淑女身上的全套首饰被称为)「大蔓草」。mahāsatta,【阳】大衆生，大有情。mahāsamudda,【阳】大海。mahāsara,【中】大湖。mahāsāra, mahāsāla,【形】有大财富的。mahāsāvaka,【阳】大弟子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahā-Kaccāna: {'def': 'MahāKaccāyana m. [BSk. Mahākātyāyana] 大迦旃延, 摩訶迦旃延 [仏弟子中, 論議第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahā-aṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. 大義疏 [セイロン語による三蔵註釈書].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahā-bhūta: {'def': "the 4 'primary elements', is another name for the 4 elements (dhātu) underlying all corporeality; s. dhātu.", 'xr': '《Buddhist Dictionary》 by NYANATILOKA MAHATHERA'}

Mahābrahmā: {'def': 'm. [〃] 大梵天.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahākaccāyana: {'def': '（比库名）马哈咖吒亚那，（古音译：）摩诃迦旃延', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Mahākappina: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Mahākalpina] 大劫賓那, 摩訶劫賓那 [仏弟子中, 教誠比丘第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库名）马哈咖比那，（古音译：）摩诃劫宾那', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Mahākassapa: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Mahākāśyapa] 摩訶迦葉, 大迦葉 [仏弟子中, 頭陀第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库名）马哈咖沙巴，（古音译：）摩诃迦叶', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Mahākoṭṭhita: {'def': '（比库名）马哈果提答，（古音译：）摩诃俱絺罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'Mahākoṭṭhika m. [BSk. Mahākauṣṭhila] 大倶絺羅, 摩訶倶絺羅 [仏弟子中, 無碍解第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāmoggallāna: {'def': 'm. [BSk. Mahāmaudgalyāyana] 大目犍連, 摩訶目犍連 [仏弟子中, 神通第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '（比库名）马哈摩嘎喇那，（古音译：）摩诃目犍连', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Mahāmāyā: {'def': 'f. [〃] 摩訶摩耶, 大清浄妙, 摩耶夫人 [釈迦仏の生母].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahānāma: {'def': '（国王名）马哈那马，（古音译：）摩诃男，摩诃那摩', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Mahāpajāpatī Gotamī: {'def': 'f. 摩訶波闍波提瞿曇弥, 大愛道 [仏の養母, おば, 最初の尼僧].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāpanthaka: {'def': 'm. [〃] 摩訶槃特, 大路 [仏弟子中, 慧解第一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāpaṭṭhānappakaraṇa-aṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. 大発趣論註 [Paṭṭh A.].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāroruva: {'def': '大号叫地狱。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'm. [BSk. Mahāraurava] 大叫喚 [八大地獄の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāsammata: {'def': 'm. [〃] 摩訶三摩多, 大選出 [人類最初の王].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāthera: {'def': '大长老', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Mahāvagga: {'def': 'm. [律] 大品 [律蔵犍度部].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāvaṃsa: {'def': 'm. 大史, 大王統史.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāvibhaṅga: {'def': 'm. 大分別 [律蔵経分別の一, 比丘戒の解説].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāvihāra: {'def': 'm. 大寺, 大精舎 [セイロンのアヌラーダプラにある精舎] . -vāsin 大寺住者.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāvīci: {'def': '=Avīci. 大阿鼻, 大無間 [八大地獄の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Mahāyāna: {'def': '大乘。梵语Mahāyāna[ 虽然南传上座部佛教普遍用Mahāyāna （大乘，摩诃衍）来尊称北传佛教，但是，“大乘”（Mahāyāna）一词在整套巴利三藏及其义注、复注都不曾出现过，它属于梵语的专有名词。]。mahā意为大，含有伟大、高贵等义；yāna为车乘，运载之义。谓能将无量众生从生死此岸运载至觉悟彼岸，故名“大乘”。
大乘佛教为佛陀入灭五百多年（公元前1世纪）之后在印度兴起的一种佛教形式，主张修行菩萨道，普度众生，并以成就佛果为最终目标。大乘佛教崇拜许多的诸佛、菩萨、诸天等，受持传诵大乘经典，并把以前的佛教传统和当时与之并行的部派佛教贬称为“小乘”。佛灭一千多年（公元7世纪）以后，大乘佛教融合婆罗门教-印度教的鬼神崇拜、咒术信仰等因素，形成“密乘佛教”或“金刚乘”。
当大乘佛教流传到中国汉地之后，与中华文化相结合而形成了“汉传佛教”，之后又传到韩国、日本、越南等地。
密乘佛教后来流传到西藏，吸收了当地的苯教信仰而形成“藏传佛教”，之后又传到蒙古、尼泊尔、不丹等地。
汉传佛教与藏传佛教因为是从印度往北传播而形成，故合称为“北传佛教”。他们与南传上座部佛教并称为当今世界的三大语系佛教。', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '﹐【中】大乘(佛教)，大乘是佛陀灭度后四五百年间才崛起的新教派，对原始佛教的教义有心的诠释及看法，有时会完全颠覆旧说，创立新思想。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mahī: {'def': '(f.) [f. of mah, base of mahant, Vedic mahī] the earth (lit. Great One) Mhvs 5, 266; Sdhp.424, 472; Loc. mahiyā Miln.128; mahiyaṁ DhsA.62. -- Note. As mahī is only found in very late P. literature, it must have been re-introduced from Sk. sources, and is note a direct correspondent of Vedic mahī.

--tala the ground (of the earth) Mhvs 5, 54. --dhara mountain Miln.343; Mhvs 14, 3; 28, 22 (v. l. mahin°). --pa king (of the earth) Mhvs 14, 22. --pati king Mhvs 5, 48; 33, 32. --pāla king Mhvs 4, 38; 5, 265. --ruha tree (“growing out of the earth”) Mhvs 14, 18, 18, 19. (Page 527)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】地（摩希，即：大者），摩醯河（河名）。 ~tala, 【中】地面。~dhara, 【阳】山。 ~pati, ~pāla, 【阳】国王。 ~ruha, 【阳】树。(p252)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】地(摩希，即：大者)，摩醯河(河名)。mahītala,【中】地面。mahīdhara,【阳】山。mahīpati, mahīpāla,【阳】国王。mahīruha,【阳】树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Majja: {'def': '【中】酒。majjana,【中】沉醉状态，疏忽。majjapa,【形】酒鬼(喝酒者)。majjapāna,【中】喝酒，酒。majjapāyī, 参考 majjapa。majjavikkayī,【阳】酒商。DA.31./I,944.：Taṁ sabbampi madakaraṇavasena majjaṁ. (烈酒：所有酿造的醉品。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】酒。 ~na, 【中】沈醉状态，疏忽。 ~pa, 【形】酒鬼（喝酒者）。 ~pāna, 【中】喝酒，酒。 ~pāyī, 参考 majjapa。 ~vikkayī, 【阳】酒商。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mad, cp. Vedic mada & madya] 1. intoxicant, intoxicating drink, wine, spirits Vin.I,205; D.III,62, 63; Sn.398 (+pāna=majjapāna); VvA.73 (=surā ca merayañ ca); Sdhp.267. -- 2. drinking place J.IV,223 (=pān’āgāra).

--pa one who drinks strong drink, a drunkard A.IV,261; Sn.400; Pv IV.1⁷⁶ (a°); ThA.38. --pāna drinking of intoxicating liquors Vv 15⁸; VvA.73; Sdhp.87. --pāyaka=majjapa J.II,192 (a°). --pāyin=°pāyaka Sdhp.88. --vikkaya sale of spirits J.IV,115. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjanā: {'def': '【阴】磨光，擦拭，抚摩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】磨光，擦拭，抚摩。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Majjati: {'def': '3(mad(梵mad / mand)沉浸+ya, Sk. mādyati), 醉，沉浸(to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or elated; pot. majje=majjeyya SnA 364；majje= pamajje SnA 482)。【过】majji。【过分】1.matta。2.maṭṭha, majjita。【现分】majjanta。【独】majjitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(marj(梵mrj)擦), 擦亮，擦，清理(to wipe, polish, clean；Dhtp 71 gives root majj with meaning “saṁsuddhiyaṁ”)。pp. majjita & maṭṭha.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [majj to immerse, submerge, cp. Lat. mergo] is represented in Pali by mujjati, as found esp. in cpds. ummujjati & nimujjati. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mad + ya), 醉。 (maj + a), 擦亮，擦，清理。【过】 majji。【过分】1. matta。 2. maṭṭha, majjita。【现分】 majjanta。【独】 majjitvā。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '³ [mad, Sk. mādyati; Vedic madati; see mada for etym.] to be intoxicated; to be exultant, to be immensely enjoyed or elated S.I,73, 203; A.IV,294; Sn.366 (Pot. majje=majjeyya SnA 364), 676 (id., T. reads na ca majje, SnA 482 reads na pamajje); J.II,97; III,87 (majjeyya). aor. majji in cpd. pamajji Mhvs 17, 15. -- pp. matta. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(majj(梵majj)浸入，淹没，to immerse, submerge), 浸入，淹没(=mujjati, as found esp. in cpds. ummujjati & nimujjati)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [mṛj to clean, polish; connected with either Lat. mergo (cp. Gr. a)mέrgw) or Lat. mulgeo to wipe, stroke, milk (cp. Gr. a)mέlgw, Mir. mlich=milk etc.) -- Dhtp 71 gives root majj with meaning “saṁsuddhiyaṁ”] to wipe, polish, clean VvA.165. Cp. sam°. -- pp. majjita & maṭṭha. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjha: {'def': '【阳】中央，腰部。【形】中央的。majjhaṭṭha, majjhatta,【形】中立者，无私的，中性的。majjhaṇha,【阳】正午。majjhattatā,【阴】公平，平静。majjhadesa,【阳】(佛教)中国。majjhantika, majjhantikasamaya,【阳】正午。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic madhya, cp. Lat. medius, Gr. mέssos, Goth. midjis=Ohg. mitti, E. middle] middle, viz. 1. of space: of moderate height D.I,243 (contrasted with ucca & nīca). -- 2. of time: of middle age Sn.216 (contrasted with dahara young & thera old). -- 3. often used adv. in Loc. majjhe in the middle; i. e. (a) as prep. in between, among (-° or with Gen.) Pv.I,11¹, 11⁴; J.I,207 (sakuṇānaṁ); DhA.I,182 (vasana-gāmassa); PvA.11 (parisā°). majjhe chetvā cutting in half J.V,387. -- (b) in special dogmatic sense “in the present state of existence,” contrasted with past & future existences (the latter comb^d as “ubho antā” at Sn.1040). The explⁿ of majjhe in this sense is at Nd¹ 434: “majjhaṁ vuccati paccuppannā rūpā” etc. (similarly at Nd² 490). -- Sn.949 (in sequence pubbe majjhe pacchā), 1099 (id.); Dh.348 (pure majjhe pacchato; i. e. paccuppannesu khandhesu DhA.IV,63). -- 4. (nt.) majjhaṁ the middle DhA.I,184 (tassa uramajjhaṁ ghaṁsentī). (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】中央，腰部。【形】中央的。 ~ṭṭha, ~tta, 【形】中立者，无私的，中性的。 ~ṇha, 【阳】正午。 ~ttatā, 【阴】公平，平静。 ~desa,【阳】中央国家。 ~ntika, ~ntikasamaya, 【阳】正午。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Majjhaka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. majjha] lying or being in the midst of . . ., in pācīna-yava° (dakkhiṇa°, pacchima°, uttara°) nigama, a market-place lying in the midst of the eastern corn-fields (the southern etc.): designation of 4 nigamas situated near Mithilā J.VI,330. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjhanta: {'def': 'Majjhantika m. [BSk. Madhyantika] 未田地, 未田底迦 [アソーカ王時代に西北インドのカシュミーラ, ガンダーラ地方に仏教を伝えた比丘].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Majjhantika: {'def': '[majjha+anta+ika] midday, noon; used either absolutely Vin.IV,273; S.IV,240; J.V,213 (yāva upakaṭṭha -- majjhantikā); V,291 (read majjhantik’âtikamm’āgami); Vism.236; Miln.3; or as apposition with kāla & samaya S.I,7 (kāla); Pv IV.3² (id.); Nd² 97⁷ (samaya); DA.I,251 (id.). (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjhatta: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [for majjha-ṭṭha, which we find in Prk. as majjhattha: Pischel, Prk. Gr. § 214; majjha+ sthā] 1. (adj.) “standing in the middle,” umpire, neutral, impartial, indifferent J.I,300; II,359 (parama°, +upekkhā-pārāmī); VI,8; Miln.403; Vism.230; Mhvs 21, 14. -- 2. indifference, balance of mind, equanimity; almost synonymous with upekkhā: Vism.134, 296; VbhA.283 (°payogatā); DhA.II,214 (°upekkhā); PvA.38 (so read for majjhattha). See also following. ‹-› Note. A similar term is found in BSk. as mṛdu-madhyā kṣānti “state of spiritual calm” Divy 271; see Yoga Sūtra II.34. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjhattatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. from prec.] impartiality, indifference, balance of mind Nd² 166 (in explⁿ of upekkhā, with syn. passaddhatā); Vbh.230; Vism.134; VbhA.285 (satta° & saṅkhāra°), 317 (def.); DhsA.133. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjhima: {'def': '【形】中部的，中间的，适中的，中央的。 ~desa, 【阳】中央国家包括恒河区域。 ~purisa, 【阳】中等高度的男人，〔文法〕第二人称。~yāma, 【阳】中夜时分（古印度一夜分为三个时分，即：前夜、中夜、后夜）。 ~vaya, 【阳】中年。(p248)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '中间的[PS:Majjhima Nikaya中部经; majjhima-paṭipadā 中道(paṭipadā 道;行道;道迹)(paṭipadā-ñāṇa-dassana-visuddhi 行道智见清净)]', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【形】中部的，中间的，适中的，中央的。majjhimadesa(梵madhyadewa janapada),【阳】(佛教)中国，包括恒河两岸，佛陀常常游化的区域(婆罗门讲的中国，指︰位於喜玛拉雅山(Himavat)和文底耶山(Vindhya)之间，维那舍那(Vinawana)以东和钵逻耶伽(Prayāga)以西的地区，约位於今之中央邦)；其他地方称为「边地」(pratyantajanapada弊生处)。majjhimapurisa,【阳】中等高度的男人，〔文法〕第二人称。majjhimayāma,【阳】中夜时分(古印度一夜分为三个时分，即：前夜、中夜、后夜)。majjhimavaya,【阳】中年。majjhimā paṭipadā, 中道。āvuso lobho ca pāpako doso ca pāpako, lobhassa ca pahānāya dosassa ca pahānāya atthi majjhimā paṭipadā cakkhukaraṇi ñānakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṁvattati(贤友！欲是恶，恚是恶，为舍弃欲，舍弃恚，故有中道，生眼生智，能导致安息(寂静)、证智、正觉、涅盘。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic madhyama, with sound change °ama›°ima after Geiger, P.Gr. 19¹, or after analogy with pacchima, with which often contrasted] 1. middle, medium, mediocre, secondary, moderate. -- Applied almost exclusively in contrast pairs with terms of more or less, in triplets like “small-medium-big,” or “first-middle-last” (cp. majjha 3b); viz. (a) of degree: hīna-m-paṇīta D.III,215 (tisso dhātuyo); Dhs.1205‹-› 1027 (dhammā); Vism.11 (sīlaṁ); h. m. ukkaṭṭha Vism.308; omaka m. ukkaṭṭha Vin.IV,243; khuddaka m. mahā Vism.100; lāmaka m. paṇīta (i. e. lokuttara) DhsA.45 (dhammā); paritta-m-uḷāra Sdhp.260. ‹-› (b) of time: paṭhame yāme majjhima° pacchima° J.I,75; id. with vaye PvA.5. -- 2. (nt.) majjhimaṁ the waist, in cpd. su-majjhimā (f.) a woman with beautiful waist ] V,4. (Page 515)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjhima-bhāṇaka: {'def': 'm. 中部誦者, 中部師.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Majjhima-nikāya: {'def': 'm. 中尼柯耶, 中部, 中阿含 [五部, 五尼柯耶の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Majjhimanikāya: {'def': '《中部》。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Majjhimaṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. 中部義疏 = Papañcasūdanī [MA].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Majjhāru: {'def': '[etym. doubtful] a certain kind of plant Vin.I,196 (v. l. majjāru); doubtful whether designation (like Sk. mārjāra) of Plumbago rosea. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjika: {'def': '[fr. majja] a dealer in strong drink. a tavernkeeper Miln.331. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjita: {'def': '[pp. of majjati²] cleaned, polished VvA.340 (suṭṭhu m. for sumaṭṭha Vv 84¹⁷). See also maṭṭha. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Majjāra: {'def': '【阳】猫。 ~jārī, 【阴】雌猫。(p247)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. mārjāra; dialectical] a cat Miln.23. -- f. majjārī (majjāri°) Vin.I,186 (°camma cat’s skin); DhA.I,48; Pgdp 49. (Page 514)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】猫。majjārī,【阴】雌猫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Makaci: {'def': '[etym.?] a kind of cloth, material, fibre DhA.III,68 (vākakhaṇḍa).

--pilotikā rough cloth (used for straining) J.II,96; DhA.II,155. Cp. makkhi-vāla. --vāka m. bark Vism.249 (+akkavāka); VbhA.232. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】印度虎尾蓝（亚洲的一种弓弦麻 (Sansevieria roxburghiana) 由于它的柔软而绢丝状的纤维而在印度广泛栽培）。 ~vāka, 【中】印度虎尾蓝的纤维。 ~vattha, 【中】帆布。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】印度虎尾蓝(亚洲的一种弓弦麻 (Sansevieria roxburghiana) 由於它的柔软而绢丝状的纤维而在印度广泛栽培)。makacivāka,【中】印度虎尾蓝的纤维。makacivattha,【中】帆布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Makara: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. makara] a mythical fish or sea monster, Leviathan (cp. Zimmer, Altind. Leben 97) J.II,442; III,188; Miln.131, 377; ThA.204. -- f. makarinī Miln.67.

--dantaka the tooth of a sword fish, used as a pin Vin.II,113, cp. p. 315. -- as a design in painting or carving Vin.II,117. 121, 152; IV,47. In these latter passages it occurs comb^d with latākamma & pañcapaṭṭhika (q. v.). The meaning is not quite clear. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】海怪，旗鱼。 ~dantaka, 【中】旗鱼的牙齿形状的设计。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】海怪，旗鱼。makaradantaka,【中】旗鱼的牙齿形状的设计。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Makaranda: {'def': '【阳】花蜜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Class. Sk. makaranda] the nectar of a flower J.VI,530. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】花蜜。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Makasa: {'def': '[fr. Vedic maśaka viâ *masaka›makasa: see Geiger, P.Gr. § 47²] mosquito Vin.II,119; S.I,52 (a° free from m.); A.II,117; Sn.20; J.I,246; Sdhp.50. See also cpd. ḍaṁsa°.

--kuṭikā mosquito net or curtain Vin.II,119, 130. --vījanī mosquito fan Vin.II,130. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蚊子，蠓仔(台语)。蚊科（学名Culicidae）是昆虫纲双翅目之下的一个科。该科生物通常被称为蚊或蚊子，是一种具有刺吸式口器的纤小飞虫。通常雌性以血液作为食物，而雄性则吸食植物的汁液。savāraṇa,【中】蚊帐，语：蠓罩。防蚊，可在皮肤抹麻油。中药防蚊，茵陈蒿35克、艾草35克，加2000cc.水煮沸抹身。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】蚊子。 ~vāraṇa, 【中】蚊帐。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Makkaṭa: {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. markaṭa] 1. a monkey J.I,385; II,267; DhA.II,22; VbhA.408 (°niddā, a m.’s sleep, said to be quickly changing); KhA 73 (in simile); SnA 522 (cp. Sn.791). Names of monkeys famous in Jātaka tales: Sālaka J.II,268; Kālabāhu J.III,98 sq.; on the monkey as a figure in similes see J.P.T.S. 1907, 119, to which add VbhA.228 & 259 (tālavana°), cp. Vism.245. -- 2. a spider: see °sutta.

--chāpaka the young of a monkey M.I,385; J.I,218. --sutta spider’s thread J.V,47; Vism.136 (in simile); DhA.I,304. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】猴子。 ~taka, 【阳】蜘蛛。 ~sutta, 【中】蜘蛛的丝。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】猴子。makkaṭataka,【阳】蜘蛛。makkaṭasutta,【中】蜘蛛的丝。makkaṭālepa﹐【阳】猴子的黏黐(补捉猴子用)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Makkaṭaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. markaṭaka; der. fr. markaṭa=makkaṭa] a spider (see on similes J.P.T.S. 1907, 119) Dh.347 (cp. DhA.IV,58); J.II,147 (=uṇṇanābhi); IV,484 (aptly called Uṇṇanābhi); V,47, 469; Miln.364, 407 (pantha° road spider, at both passages). --°sutta spider’s thread Vism.285. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Makkaṭiya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. makkhaṭa+ya] monkey grimace J.II,448 (mukha°). The same as mukha-makkaṭika at J.II,70. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Makkaṭī: {'def': '【阴】母猴子。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】母猴子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [of makkaṭa] a female monkey Vin.III,33, 34; J.I,385; DhA.I,119. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Makkha: {'def': '¹ [fr. mṛkṣ, lit. smearing over. Cp. BSk. mṛakṣa Śikṣ 198. 8, in cpd. māna-mada-mṛakṣa-paridāha etc.] hypocrisy; usually comb^d with paḷāsa (see also palāsa) M.I,15; A.I,95, 100, 299; IV,148, 456; V,39, 156, 209, 310, 361; It.3; Sn.56, 437, 631, 1132 (cp. Nd² 484= makkhāyanā makkhāyitattaṁ niṭṭhuriya-kammaṁ, i. e. hardness, mercilessness); Dh.150, 407; J.V,141; Vbh.357, 380, 389; Pug.18, 22; Miln.289, 380; DhA.III,118; VI,181.

--vinaya restraining fr. hypocrisy S.II,282; A.V,165 sq. (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² [probably=makkha¹, but BSk. differentiates with mrakṣya Divy 622, trsl. Index “ill-feeling”? Böhtlingk-Roth have: mrakṣya “wohlgefühl”] anger, rage Vin.I,25. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹makkh涂；梵mraksa‹mrks；cp. BSk. mraksa),【阳】1.伪善(hypocrisy)，恶的覆藏。「覆藏」即属於「悭」(macchariya)心所，《清净道论》(Vism.107)说：「对於瞋行者则有忿、恨、覆(makkho)、恼、嫉、悭等法」。2.忿(《普端严》(Sp.Mv.V,972.;CS:p.253) ：「忿怒即是忿」Makkhanti kodhaṁ.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】贬值他人。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Makkhali-Gosāla: {'def': 'm. [cf. BSk. Maskarin Gosśālī-putra] 末迦利瞿舍羅 [六師外道の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Makkhaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mṛkṣ, cp. *Sk. mrakṣaṇa] smearing, oil J.III,120; Miln.11 (tela°); Dhtp 538. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】涂，涂油。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】涂，涂油。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Makkheti: {'def': '[Caus. of mṛkṣ; Dhtp 538: makkhaṇa] to smear, paste, soil, anoint J.III,225, 314; Pug.36; Miln.268; Vism.344; DhA.II,65. -- Pass makkhīyati Miln.74. ‹-› Caus. II. makkhāpeti to cause to be anointed J.I,486; DhA.I,400. -- pp. makkhita. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(makkh涂+e), 涂上，涂抹，擦掉。【过】makkhesi。【过分】makkhita。【独】makkhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(makkh + e), 涂上，涂抹，擦掉。【过】~esi。【过分】 ~khita。【独】 ~khetvā。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Makkhi-vāla: {'def': '[cp. makaci-pilotikā] a cloth of hair for straining J.II,97. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Makkhikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic makṣika & makṣikā] a fly M.III,148; Nd¹ 484; J.II,275 (nīla°); III,263 (pingala° gadfly), 402; SnA 33 (pingala°), 572 (id.); DhA.IV,58; Sdhp.396, 529. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】苍蝇。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】苍蝇。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Makkhin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. makkha] concealing, hypocritical; harsh, merciless; often comb^d with palāsin (e. g. at Vin.II,89; J.III,259) D.III,45, 246. a° (+apalāsin) D.III,47; A.III,111; Sn.116; Pug.22. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Makkhita: {'def': '(makkheti 的【过分】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(makkheti 的【过分】)。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of makkheti] smeared with (-°), soiled; anointed M.I,364 (lohita°); J.I,158 (madhu°); III,226 (piṭṭhi-maddena); V,71 (ruhira°); VI,391. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Makkhāyanā: {'def': '(f.) & Makkhāyitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. makkha] the fact of concealment, hypocrisy: in exegesis of makkha at Nd² 484; Pug.18, 22. (Page 512)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Makkhī: {'def': '【阳】贬值他人者。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】伪善，恶的覆藏者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Makula: {'def': '【中】芽，蓓蕾，球块。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. makula] 1. a bud (Hardy in Index to VvA.gives “Mimusops elengi” after BR) Th.2, 260; Vv 45²⁶; J.I,273; II,33; IV,333; V,207 (makuḷa), 416; Vism.230 (ḷ); 256 (paduma°); VvA.177 (kaṇavīra°), 194 (makuḷa), 197 (id.); VbhA.228, 239 (where Vism.256 has makulita, & KhA 53 mukulita). -- 2. a knob J.I,31; II,90; Vism.253 (kandala°). -- 3. v. l. at Nd² 485 B for pakulla (=pakuṭa). (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】芽，蓓蕾，球块。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Makuṭa: {'def': '【阳、中】冠，王冠，宝冠。(p246)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. BSk. makuṭa Divy 411] a crest Abhp 283 (kirīṭa+, i. e. adornment). (Page 511)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】冠，王冠，宝冠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mala: {'def': '【中】杂质，污染，锈，污垢，（家畜的）粪。 ~tara, 【形】更肮脏的，比较不纯的。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic mala, see etym. under malina. The Dhtm (395) only knows of one root mal or mall in meaning “dhāraṇa” supporting, thus thinking of māḷaka] anything impure, stain (lit. & fig.), dirt. In the Canon mostly fig. of impurities. On mala in similes see J.P.T.S., 1907, 122. -- S.I,38 (itthi malaṁ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); A.I,105 (issā°); Sn.378, 469, 962, 1132 (=rāgo malaṁ etc. Nd² 500); Nd¹ 15, 478 sq.; Dh.239 sq.; Vbh.368 (tīṇi malāni), 389 (nava purisa-malāni); Pv.II,3³⁴ (macchera°); PvA.45 (id.), 80 (id.), 17 (citta°); Sdhp.220. -- Compar. malatara a greater stain A.IV,195=Dh.243. -- See also māla.

--âbhibhū overcoming one’s sordidness S.I,18; J.IV,64. --majjana “dirt wiper,” a barber Vin.IV,308 (kasāvaṭa m. nihīnajacca); J.III,452; IV,365. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】杂质，污染，锈，污垢，(家畜的)粪。malatara,【形】更肮脏的，比较不纯的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Malina: {'def': 'malinaka, 【形】肮脏的，沾染的，不纯的。【中】杂质。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'malinaka,【形】肮脏的，沾染的，不纯的。【中】杂质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mal, *mel to make dirty, to which belongs mala. -- Cp. Lat. mulleus reddish, purple; Gr. mέlas black, molu/nw to stain, mέltos reddish; Lith. mulvas yellowish, mélynas blue; Ohg. māl stain] dirty, stained, impure, usually lit. -- J.I,467; Miln.324; DhA.I,233; VvA.156; PvA.226; VbhA.498. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Malinaka: {'def': '(adj.) [malina+ka] dirty; with ref. to loha, a kind of copper, in the group of copper belonging to Pisāca VbhA.63. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Malla: {'def': '[cp. Sk. malla, perhaps a local term, cp. Cānura] a wrestler Vin.II,105 (°muṭṭhika) J.IV,81 (two, named Cānura and Muṭṭhika “fister”); Vism.31 (muṭṭhika+, i. e. boxing & wrestling as amusements: see mada 1). Perhaps as “porter” Bdhgh on CV V,29. 5 (see Vin.II,319). At Miln.191 the mallā are mentioned as a group or company; their designation might here refer to the Mallas, a tribe, as other tribes are given at the same passage (e. g. Atoṇā, Pisācā). Cp. Bhallaka.

--gaṇa troop of professional wrestlers Miln.331. --muṭṭhika boxer Vin.II,105. --yuddha wrestling contest Miln.232; DhA.II,154; DA.I,85. --yuddhaka a professional wrestler J.IV,81. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】摔交选手，末罗 (Malla) 氏族的男人。mallayuddha,【中】摔交竞赛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（古国名）马喇，（古音译：）末罗，摩罗', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': 'm. [〃] 末羅, 力士 [十六大国の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阳】摔交选手，末罗 (Malla) 氏族的男人。~yuddha, 【中】摔交竞赛。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mallaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. mallaka & mallika] 1. a bowl, a vessel (?) used in bathing Vin.II,106 (mallakena nahāyati; or is it a kind of scrubber? Bdhgh’s explⁿ of this passage (CV v. I.4) on p. 315 is not quite clear; mallakaṁ nāma makara-dantike chinditvā mūllakamūla-saṇṭhānena kata-mallakaṁ vuccati; akata° danta achinditvā kataṁ). It may bear some ref. to malla on p. 105 (see malla) & to mallika-makula (see below mallikā). -- 2. a cup, drinking vessel A.I,250 (udaka°). -- 3. a bowl J.III,21 (kaṁsa°=taṭṭaka). -- 4. in kheḷa° a spittoon Vin.I,48; II,175. -- Note. W. Printz in “Bhāsa’s Prākrit.” p. 45, compares Śaurasenī maḷḷaa, Hindī maḷḷ(a) “cup,” maliyā “a small vessel (of wood or cocoanut-shell) for holding the oil used in unction,” mālā “cocoanut-shell,” and adds: probably a Dravidian word. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】容器(即：杯、钵、碗、痰盂等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】容器（即：杯、钵、碗、痰盂等）。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mallikā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. mallikā, Halāyudha 2, 51; Daṇḍin 2, 214] Arabian jasmine Dh.54 (tagara°); J.I,62; III,291; V,420; Miln.333, 338; DhsA.14; KhA 44. mallika-makula opening bud of the jasmine Visni 251=VbhA.234 (°saṇṭhāna, in descr, of shape of the 4 canine teeth). -- See also mālikā. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '（居士名）玛莉咖，（古音译：）末利，摩利迦', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阴】茉莉（印度的一种藤本 (Jasminum sambac)，栽培，利用它的丰富、芳香的白色花）。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】茉莉(Arabian jasmine，芳香的白色花)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Malya: {'def': '(nt.) [for *mālya, fr. māla] flower, garland of flowers Vv 1¹ (-dhara); 2¹; J.V,188 (puppha°), 420. ‹-› The reading at Pv III,3³ (pahūta°, adj. having many rows of flowers) is mālya. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mama: {'def': 'Gen. Dat. of pers. pron. ahaṁ (q. v.) used quasi independently (as substitute for our “self-”) in phrase mama-y-idaṁ Sn.806 thought of “this is mine,” cp. S.I,14, i. e. egoism, belief in a real personal entity, expl^d at Nd¹ 124 by maññanā conceit, illusion. Also in var. phrases with kṛ in form mamaṁ°, viz. mamaṅkāra etc. -- As adj. “self-like, selfish” only neg. amama unselfish Sn.220 (=mamatta-virahita SnA 276); Pv IV.1³⁴ (=mamaṅkāra-virahita PvA.230); J.IV,372; VI,259. See also amama, cp. māmaka. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mamatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mama] selfishness, self-love, egoism; conceit, pride in (--°), attachment to (--°). Sn.806, 871, 951; Th.1, 717; Nd¹ 49 (two: taṇhā & diṭṭhi°); Nd² 499 (id. but as masc.); SnA 276; DhsA.199; PvA.19. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mamaṅkāra: {'def': '(mamaṁ (=mama)+kāra, 梵mama-kāra磨磨迦罗),【阳】mamatta,【中】mamāyanā,【阴】自私的执著(selfish attachment, self-interest, selfishness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[mamaṁ (=mama)+kāra, cp. ahaṁ+kāra] selfish attachment, self-interest, selfishness PvA.230. In canonic books only in combⁿ with ahaṅkāra & mān’ânusaya (belief in an ego and bias of conceit), e. g. at M.III,18, 32; S.III,80, 103, 136, 169; IV,41, 197, 202; A.I,132 sq.; III,444. See also mamiṅkāra. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 Mamatta, 【中】 Mamāyanā, 【阴】自私的执着。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mamaṅkāraṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mamaṁ+kṛ] treating with tenderness, solicitude, fondness J.V,331. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mamiṅkaroti: {'def': '[mama(ṁ)+kṛ “to make one’s own”] to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster J.V,330. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mamiṅkāra: {'def': '[for maman°, cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 19] self-love, self-interest, egoism M.I,486; III,32 (at both places also ahiṅkāra for ahaṅkāra). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mamma: {'def': 'mammaṭṭhāna(Vedic marman, fr. mrd),【中】身体的要点，神经中心(soft spot of the body, a vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart)。mammaghaṭṭana, 打击要点(hitting a vital spot (of speech, i. e. backbiting. cp. piṭṭhi-maṁsika))。mammacchedaka,【形】伤至要点，非常粗糙的，非常致命的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'mammaṭṭhāna, 【中】身体的要点，神经中心。 ~cchedaka, 【形】伤至要点，非常粗糙的，非常致命的。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic marman, fr. mṛd] soft spot of the body, a vital spot (in the Vedas chiefly between the ribs near the heart), joint. A popular etym. and explⁿ of the word is given at Expos. 132ⁿ³ (on DhsA.100). -- J.II,228; III,209; DhsA.396.

--ghaṭṭana hitting a vital spot (of speech, i. e. backbiting. Cp. piṭṭhi-maṁsika) DhA.IV,182. --chedaka breaking the joints (or ribs), violent (fig. of hard speech) DhA.I,75; DhsA.100. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mammana: {'def': '【形】有口吃的人。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有口吃的人(stammering, stuttering)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [onomat. cp. babbhara. With Sk. marmara rustling to Lat. fremo to roar=Gr. brέmw to thud, brontή thunder, Ger. brummen. Cp. also Sk. murmura=P. mummura & muramurā, Lat. murmur] stammering, stuttering Vin.II,90 (one of the properties of bad or faulty speech, comb^d with dubbaca & eḷagalavāca). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mamāyanā: {'def': '(f.)=mamatta (selfishness) J.VI,259 (°taṇhārahita in explⁿ of amama). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mamāyati: {'def': '(mama 的【派】, cp. Sk. mamāyate), 被执著，珍爱。【过】mamāyi。【过分】mamāyita。【现分】mamāyanta。【独】mamāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. mama, cp. Sk. mamāyate in same meaning (not with Böhtlingk & Roth: envy) at MBh XII.8051 and Aṣṭas Prajñā Pāramitā 254] to be attached to, to be fond of, to cherish, tend, foster, love M.I,260; S.III,190; Th.1, 1150; Sn.922 (mamāyetha); Nd¹ 125 (Bhagavantaṁ); J.IV,359 (=piyāyati C.); Miln.73; VbhA.107 (mamāyatī ti mātā: in pop. etym. of mātā); DhA.I,11; SnA 534; Mhvs 20, 4. -- pp. mamāyita. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mama 的【派】), 被执着，珍爱。【过】 mamāyi。【过分】 ~yita。【现分】 ~yanta。【独】 mamāyitvā。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mamāyita: {'def': '[pp. of mamāyati] cherished, beloved; as n. nt. attachment, fondness of, pride. -- (adj. or pp.) S.II,94 (etaṁ ajjhositaṁ, m., parāmaṭṭhaṁ); Sn.119; DhA.I,11. -- (nt.:) Sn.466, 777, 805, 950=Dh.367 (expl^d as: yassa “ahan” ti vā “maman” ti vā gāho n’atthi DhA.IV,100); Sn.1056 (cp. Nd² 499). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mana: {'def': '【阳、中】心，意识。 (在【合】中的词形 mano)。 ~kkāra, manasikāra,【阳】构思能力，考虑。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(manas),【阳】【中】心，意识。单.主.mano﹑manaṁ；复.主manā﹑manāni；单.呼.mano﹑manaṁ﹑mana；复.呼manā﹑manāni；单.宾.mano﹑manaṁ；复.宾.manasā﹑manāni；单.具.manasā﹑manena；复.具.manebhi﹑manehi；单.离.manasā﹑manā﹑manamhā﹑manasmā；复.离.manebhi﹑manehi；单.具.﹑离.manasā﹑manena；复.具.﹑离.manebhi﹑manehi；单.与.﹑属.manassa﹑manaso；复.与.﹑属.manānaṁ；单.处manasi﹑mane﹑manamhi﹑manasmiṁ；复.处.manesu。manasa,【形】心的(der. mānasa, mānasa- & manassa, manassa-)。《法集论》：在此时什么是意处？凡是在此时的1心、2意、3有意(意图)、4心脏、5净意、7意处、8意根、9识、10识蕴、11、相属於的意识界，在此时是意处。(Dhs.#65.：Katamaṁ tasmiṁ samaye manāyatanaṁ hoti? Yaṁ tasmiṁ samaye 1cittaṁ 2mano 3mānasaṁ 4hadayaṁ 5paṇḍaraṁ 6mano 7manāyatanaṁ 8manindriyaṁ 9viññāṇaṁ 10viññāṇakkhandho 11tajjāmanoviññāṇadhātu--idaṁ tasmiṁ samaye manāyatanaṁ hoti.)有分作为「意根」(manindriya)作用；「意根」有时作「有分意界」(bhavaṅga manodhātu)。 kāyena vācāya manasā, 以身语意。nibbānamanaso, 倾向涅盘的心(of Sn.942 at SnA 567 by nibbāna-ninna-citto. )。yathā-manena, 诚恳(“from his heart,” i. e. sincerely, voluntarily DhA.I,42)。manaṁ uppādeti, (to make up one’s mind, to resolve DhA.II,140 (cp. citt’uppāda); manaṁ karoti: (a) to fix one’s mind upon, to give thought to, find pleasure or to delight in (Loc.) J.IV.223 (rūpe na manaṁ kare=itthi-rūpe nimittaṁ na gaṇheyyāsi C. Cp. the similar & usual manasi-karoti in same sense); VI.45 (Pass. gīte karute mano); (b) to make up one’s mind DhA.II,87; manaṁ gaṁhāti to “take the mind,” take the fancy, to please, to win approval J.IV.132; DhA.II,48. -- III. manamana: dhamm-uddhacca-viggahitamana A.II,157 (read manamano for manamanā); saṁkiliṭṭha-manā narā Th.2, 344; attamana pleased; gedhitamana greedy Pv.II.82; dummana depressed in mind, sad or sick at heart D.II,148; S.I,103; Vin.I,21; A.II,59, 61, 198; Th.2, 484; J.I.189; opp. sumana elated, joyful Pv.II.948 (=somanassajāta PvA.132); pītimana glad or joyful of heart Sn.766 (expld by tuṭṭha-mano, haṭṭha-mano, attamano etc. at Nd1 3; by santuṭṭha-citto at SnA 512). -- IV. manasi-karoti (etc.) to fix the mind intently, to bear in mind, take to heart, ponder, think upon, consider, recognise. -- 1. (v.) pres. 1st pl. manakaroma Vin.I,103; imper. 2nd sg. manakarohi, often in formula “suṇāhi sādhukaṁ m.-k.” “harken and pay attention” D.I,124, 157, 249; cp. M. I.7; A.I,227; pl. 2nd manakarotha A.I,171; D.I,214 (+vitakketha); Pot. manakareyyātha D.I,90 (taṁ atthaṁ sādhukaṁ k.); ppr. manakaronto DhsA 207; ger. manakatvā A.II,116 (aṭṭhikatvā+. . . ohitasoto suṇāti); Pv III.25 (amana=anāvajjetvā PvA.181); VvA.87, 92; PvA.62; grd. manakātabba Vism 244, 278; DhsA 205; aor. manas-ākāsi M.II,61; 2nd pl. (Prohib.) (mā) manasākattha D.I,214; A.I,171. Pass. manasi-karīyati Vism 284. -- 2. (n.) manasikāra attention, pondering, fixed thought (cp. Cpd. 12, 28, 40, 282) D.III,104, 108 sq., 112, 227 (yoniso), 273 (ayoniso); M.I,296; S.II,3 (cetanā phasso m.); IV.297 (sabba-nimittānaṁ a° inattention to all\xa0\xa0manaṅgaṇa (man°) sphere of ideation (Dhs. trsl. § 58) D.III,243, 280 and passim. manāvajjana representative cognition: Cpd. 59. manindriya (man°) mind-faculty, category of mind, faculty of ideation (cp. Dhs. trs. § 17; Cpd. pp. 183, 184) D.I,70 (with other senses cakkh-undriyaṁ etc.) III.226, and passim. manakamma work of the mind, mental action, associated with kāyakamma (bodily action) and vacī° (vocal action) A.I,32, 104; Pug.41; Dhs.981 (where omitted in text). manajava [cp. Vedic manojava] swift as thought Vv 6329; PvA.216 (assājāniya). manadaṇḍa “mind-punishment” (?) corresponding to kāya° & vacī-daṇḍa, M.I,372 sq. (Neumann, trsls “Streich in Gedanken”). manaduccarita sin of the mind or thoughts Dh.233; Nd1 386; Pug.60. manadosa blemish of mind A.I,112. manadvāra door of the mind, threshold of consciousness VbhA.41; DhsA 425, cp. Dhs. trsl. 3 (2p. 2); Cpd. 10. manadhātu element of apprehension, the ideational faculty (cp. Dhs. trsl. 129, 2p. 119, 120; and p. 2lxxxv sq.) Dhs.457 sq.; Vbh.14, 71, 87 sq., 144, 302; Vism 488; VbhA.80, 81, 239 (physiological foundation), 405; DhsA 263, 425; KhA 53. manapadosa anger in mind, ill-will D.III,72; M.I,377; Sn.702; J.IV.29; Dhs.1060 (cp. DhsA 367: manaṁ padussayamāno uppajjatī ti, i. e. to set one’s heart at anger). manapadosika (adj.) debauched in mind (by envy & ill-will), N. of a class of gods D.I,20; VbhA.498, 519. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 193 & Kern (Toev. I.163), slightly different: from looking at each other too long. manapasāda tranquillity of the mind, devotional feeling (towards the Buddha) DhA.I,28. manapubbaṅgama directed by mind, dominated by thought (see pubba2) Dh.1, 2; cp. DhA.I,21, 35. manabhāvanīya of right mind-culture, self-composed S.III,1; M.III,261; Vv 3413 (cp. VvA.152: mana-vaḍḍhanaka); Miln.129. Kern, Toev. I.163 trsls “to be kept in mind with honour.” manamattaka, in phrase mana-mattakena (adv.) “by mere mind,” consisting of mind only, i. e. memorial, as a matter of mind J.IV.228. manamaya made of mind, consisting of mind, i. e. formed by the magic power of the mind, magically formed, expld at Vism 405 as “adhiṭṭhāna-manena nimmitattā m.”; at DA.I,120 as “jhāna-manena nibbatta”; at DhA.I,23 as “manato nipphanna”; at VvA.10 as “bāhirena paccayena vinā manasā va nibbatta.” -- Dh.1, 2; J.VI.265 (manomayaṁ sindhavaṁ abhiruyha); Sdhp.259; as quality of iddhi: Vism 379, 406. -- Sometimes a body of this matter can be created by great holiness or knowledge; human beings or gods may be endowed with this power D.I,17 (+pītibhakkha, of the ābhassaras), 34 (attā dibbo rūpī m. sabbaṅga-paccaṅgī etc.), 77 (id.), 186 (id.); Vin.II,185 (Koliya-putto kālaṁ kato aññataraṁ mano-mayaṁ kāyaṁ upapanno); M.I,410 (devā rūpino m.); S.IV,71; A.I,24; III.122, 192; IV.235; V.60. manaratha desired object (lit. what pleases the mind), wish Vism 506 (°vighāta+icchā-vighāta); manaṁ pūreti to fulfil one’s wish Mhvs 8, 27 (puṇṇa-sabbamanoratha). Manoratha-pūraṇī (f.) “the wish fulfiller” is the name of the Commentary on the Aṅguttara Nikāya. manarama pleasing to the mind, lovely, delightful Sn.50, 337, 1013; Dh.58; Pv.II.958 (phoṭṭhabba), Mhvs 18, 48; VvA.340. manaviññāṇa representative cognition, rationality Vism 489; VbhA.150 (22 fold); DhsA 304, cp. Dhs. trsl. 170 (2p. 157); --dhātu (element of) representative intellection, mind cognition, the 6th of the viññāṇadhātus or series of cognitional elements corresponding to and based on the 12 simple dhātus, which are the external & internal sense-relations (=āyatanāni) Dhs.58; Vbh.14, 71, 87, 89, 144, 176 and passim. See also above II. 3 and discussions at Dhs. trsl. 132 (2p. 122) & introd. p. 53 sq.; Cpd. 1232, 184. manaviññeyya to be comprehended by the mind (cp. Dialogues II.281n) D.II,281; M.III,55, 57; J.IV.195. manavitakka a thought (of mind) S.I,207=Sn.270 (mano is in C. on this passage expld as “kusala-citta” SnA 303). manasañcetan’āhāra “nutriment of representative cogitation” (Dhs. trsl. 31) S.II,11, 13, 99; Dhs.72; Vism 341. manasatta “with mind attached,” N. of certain gods, among whom are reborn those who died with minds absorbed in some attachment M.I,376. manasamācāra conduct, observance, habit of thought or mind (associated with kāya° & vacī°) M.II,114; III.45, 49. manasilā (cp. Sk. manah-wila) red arsenic, often used as a powder for dying and other purposes; the red colour is frequently found in later (Cy.) literature, e. g. J.V.416 (+haritāla yellow ointment); Vism 485; DhA.IV,113 (id. as cuṇṇa); ThA.70 (Ap. V.20); Mhvs 29, 12; SnA 59 (°piṇḍa in simile); DhA.II,43 (°rasa); VvA.288 (°cuṇṇa-piñjara-vaṇṇa, of ripe mango fruit); PvA.274 (°vaṇṇāni ambaphalāni); --tala a flat rock, platform (=silātala) SnA 93, 104; as the platform on which the seat of the Buddha is placed & whence he sends forth the lion’s roar: J.II.219; VI.399; VvA.217; as a district of the Himavant: J.VI.432; SnA 358. manahara charming, captivating, beautiful Mhvs 18, 49; N. of a special gem (the wishing gem?) Miln.118, 354.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manakkāra: {'def': 'manasikāra,【阳】考虑、作意、固定思想(attention, pondering, fixed thought)。《广释》（CS:p.106）：「作，用心作，即‘作意’，它采集心的所缘。」（Karaṇaṁ kāro, manasmiṁ kāro manasikāro, so cetaso ārammaṇe samannāhāralakkhaṇo.）', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manana: {'def': '【中】思考。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】思考。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Manasa: {'def': '(adj.) [the --° form of mano, an enlarged form, for which usually either °mana or °mānasa] having a mind, with such & such a mind Sn.942 (nibbāna° “a nibbāna mind,” one who is intent upon N., cp. explⁿ at SnA 567); Pv.I,6⁶ (paduṭṭha-manasā f., maybe °mānasā; but PvA.34 expl^ns “paduṭṭha-cittā paduṭṭhena vā manasā). See also adhimanasa under adhimana. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manasikaroti: {'def': '(manasi + kar + o), 紧记，考虑。【过】 ~kari。【过分】 ~kata。【现分】 ~ronta。【独】 ~katvā。 ~karitvā。【潜】 ~kātabba。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(manasi+kar行+o), 紧记，考虑。【过】manasikari。【过分】manasikata。【现分】manasironta。【独】manasikatvā。manasikaritvā。【义】manasikātabba。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manassa: {'def': '(nt.) [*manasyaṁ, abstr. der. fr. mana(s)] of a mind, only in cpds. do° & so° (q. v.). (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manasānupekkhita: {'def': '诸意熟虑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manatā: {'def': '【阴】 (在【合】中) 心理。 Attamanatā = 欢喜的心理。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. mano] mentality DhsA.143 (in explⁿ of attamanatā). (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】(在【合】中) 心理。attamanatā (atta+mana+tā)=心的可意性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manaŋ: {'def': '【无】几乎，某物。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Manaṁ: {'def': '【无】几乎，某物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adv.) [cp. Class. Sk. manāk, “a little (of something)” prob. derived from Vedic manā f. a. gold weight =Gr. mna_] “by a certain weight,” i. e. a little, somewhat, almost, well-nigh, nearly. Comb^d with vata in exclamation: M.II,123 (m. v. bho anassāma); DhA.III,147 (m. v. therī nāsitā). Often in phrase man’amhi (with pp.). “I nearly was so & so,” e. g. Vin.I,109 (vuḷho); J.I,405 (upakūḷito); III,435 (matā), 531 (mārāpito). Cp. BSk. manāsmi khāditā MVastu II.450. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manda: {'def': '【形】1.慢的，迟钝的，懒惰的，愚蠢的。2.柔和的(mandakkhin, mandalocana, having lovely (soft) eyes关爱的眼神)。【中】稍微。mandatā,【阴】mandatta,【中】减少的状态，缓慢，愚蠢。mandaṁ, mandamandaṁ,【副】慢慢地，渐渐地。mandapaññā, 钝慧(者)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】慢的，迟钝的，懒惰的，愚蠢的，稍微屈从的。【中】稍微。~tā, 【阴】 ~tta, 【中】减少的状态，缓慢，愚蠢。 ~daŋ, mandamandaŋ,【副】慢慢地，渐渐地。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. late-Vedic & Epic manda] 1. slow, lazy, indolent; mostly with ref. to the intellectual faculties, therefore: dull, stupid, slow of grasp, ignorant, foolish M.I,520 (+momuha); Sn.666, 820 (=momūha Nd¹ 153), 1051 (=mohā avidvā etc. Nd² 498); Dh.325 (=amanasikārā manda-pañña DhA.IV,17); J.IV,221; Pug.65, 69; KhA 53, 54. -- 2. slow, yielding little result, unprofitable (of udaka, water, with respect to fish; and gocara, feeding on fishes) J.I,221. -- 3. [in this meaning probably=Vedic mandra “pleasant, pleasing,” although Halāyudha gives mandākṣa as “bashful”] soft, tender (with ref. to eyes), lovely, in cpds. °akkhin having lovely (soft) eyes J.III,190; and °locana id. Th.2, 375 (kinnari-manda°=manda-puthu-vilocana ThA.253); Pv.I,11⁵ (miga-manda°=migī viya mand’akkhī PvA.57); Vv 64¹¹ (miga-m°=miga-cchāpikānaṁ viya mudu siniddha-diṭṭhi-nipāta). -- 4. In cpd. picu (or puci°) manda the Nimb tree, it means “tree” (?) see picu-manda & puci-manda. -- 5. In composition with bhū it assumes the form mandī°, e. g. mandībhūta slowed down, enfeebled, diminished J.I,228; VbhA.157.

--valāhakā a class of fairies or demi-gods D.II,259 (“fragile spirits of the clouds” trsl.). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mandaka: {'def': '[?] according to Kern, Toev. s. v.=*mandra (of sound: deep, bass)+ka; a sort of drum J.VI,580. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mandatta: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. manda] stupidity M.I,520; Pug.69. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mandatā: {'def': '(f.)=mandatta Sdhp.19. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mandira: {'def': '(cp. late Sk. mandira),【中】大厦，宫殿(a house, edifice, palace)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. late Sk. mandira] a house, edifice, palace Sn.996, 1012; J.V,480; VI,269, 270; Dāvs II.67 (dhātu° shrine). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】大厦，宫殿。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mandiya: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. māndya] 1. laziness, slackness S.I,110. -- 2. dullness of mind, stupidity J.III,38 (=manda-bhāva). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】愚蠢，懈怠。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. māndya),【中】，1.懈怠(laziness, slackness S.I,110.)。2.愚蠢(dullness of mind, stupidity J.III.38 (=manda-bhāva).)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mandākinī: {'def': 'f. 曼陀吉尼 [雪山の七大湖の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '【阴】曼陀吉尼(喜玛拉雅七大湖之一和一条河的名字)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) N. of one of the seven great lakes in the Himavant, enum^d at A.IV,101; J.V,415; Vism.416; SnA 407; DA.I,164. (Halāyudha 3, 51 gives m. as a name for the Gaṅges.) (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】曼陀吉尼（一个大湖和一条河的名字）。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mandālaka: {'def': '[etym.?] a water-plant (kind of lotus) J.IV,539; VI,47, 279, 564. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mandāmukhi: {'def': '(f.) [dialectical? reading a little doubtful] a coal-pan, a vessel for holding embers for the sake of heating Vin.I,32 (=aggi-bhājana C.); VvA.147 (mandamukhī, stands for aṅgara-kapalla p. 142 in explⁿ of hattha-patāpaka Vv 33³²). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mandāmukhī: {'def': '【阴】煤斗。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】煤斗(coal-pan)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mandāra: {'def': '【阳】曼陀罗山（山名）。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】曼陀罗山(山名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mandārava: {'def': '(cp. Sk. mandāra),【阳】曼陀罗花、文陀罗华、圆华、适意花(the coral tree, Erythrina fulgens. 天界五种树之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. mandāra] the coral tree, Erythrina fulgens (considered also as one of the 5 celestial trees). The blossoms mentioned D.II,137 fall from the next world. -- D.II,137; Vv 22² (cp. VvA.111); J.I,13, 39; Miln.13, 18 (dibbāni m.-pupphāni abhippavassiṁsu). (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mandī°: {'def': 'see manda⁵. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manesikā: {'def': '【阴】读心术。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [mano+esikā²] “mind-searching,” i. e. guessing the thoughts of others, mind-reading; a practice forbidden to bhikkhus D.I,7 (=m. nāma manasā cintita-jānana-kīḷā DA.I,86); Vin.II,10. (Page 520)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】读心术(thought-reading)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mano: {'def': '(mana 的【合】的词形) manokamma,【中】意业。manojava,【形】如心意一般地迅速。manoduccarita,【中】恶意。manodvāra,【中】意门。manodhātu,【阴】(十八界的)意界。manopadosa,【阳】恶意。manopasāda,【阳】信仰的心意。manopubbaṅgama,【形】心意所领导的。manomaya,【形】心造的((AA.1.14.)：manomayanti manena nibbattitaṁ.(心意所生：已於心产生。))。manoratha,【阳】心愿。manorama,【形】令人愉快的。manoviññāṇa,【中】意识。manoviññeyya,【形】由心意去了解的。manovitakka,【阳】心思。manohara,【形】迷人的。manomayaṁ kāyaṁ﹐意生天。“kaṁ pana tvaṁ, Udāyi, manomayaṁ kāyaṁ paccesī”ti? “Ye te, bhante, devā arūpino saññāmayā”ti.(世尊向乌陀夷说：)「乌陀夷！你以为意生天是什么？」(乌陀夷答：)「大德！他们是想所成就之无色诸天。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Mana(s) (nt.) [Vedic manaḥ, see etym. under maññati] I. Declension. Like all other nouns of old s-stems mano has partly retained the s forms (cp. cetah›ceto) & partly follows the a-declension. The form mano is found throughout in cpds. as mano°, the other mana at the end of cpds. as °mana. From stem manas an adj. manasa is formed and the der. mānasa & manassa (-°). -- Nom. mano freq.; & manaṁ Dh.96, Acc. mano Sn.270, 388; SnA 11, and freq.; also manaṁ Sn.659=A.II,3; V,171=Nett 132; Sn.678; Cp I.8⁵; Vism.466; Gen. Dat. manaso Sn.470, 967; Dh.390 (manaso piya); Pv.II,1¹¹ (manaso piya=manasā piya PvA.71); Instr. manasā Sn.330, 365, 834 (m. cintayanto), 1030; M.III,179; Dh.1; Pv.II,9⁷ (m. pi cetaye); also manena DhA.I,42; DhsA.72; Abl. manato S.IV,65; DhA.I,23; Vism.466; Loc. manasmiṁ S.IV,65; manamhi Vism.466; also mane DhA.I,23, & manasi (see this in compⁿ manasi karoti, below). -- II. Meaning: mind, thought D.III,96, 102, 206, 226, 244, 269, 281; S.I,16, 172; II,94; M.III,55; A.III,443; V,171; Sn.77, 424, 829, 873; Dh.116, 300; Sdhp.369. -- 1. Mano represents the intellectual functioning of consciousness, while viñnāṇa represents the field of sense and sense-reaction (“perception”), and citta the subjective aspect of consciousness (cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhist Psychology p. 19) -- The rendering with “mind” covers most of the connotation; sometimes it may be translated “thought.” As “mind” it embodies the rational faculty of man, which, as the subjective side in our relation to the objective world, may be regarded as a special sense, acting on the world, a sense adapted to the rationality (reasonableness, dhamma) of the phenomena, as our eye is adapted to the visibility of the latter. Thus it ranges as the 6^th sense in the classification of the senses and their respective spheres (the āyatanāni or relations of subject and object, the ajjhattikāni & the bāhirāni: see āyatana 3). These are: (1) cakkhu (eye) which deals with the sight of form (rūpa); (2) sota (ear) dealing with the hearing of sound (sadda); (3) ghāna (nose) with the smelling of smells (gandha); (4) jivhā (tongue), with the tasting of tastes (rasa); (5) kāya (touch), with the touching of tangible objects (phoṭṭhabba); (6) mano, with the sensing (viññāya) of rational objects or cognisables (dhamma). Thus it is the sensus communis (Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. 140, 163) which recognises the world as a “mundus sensibilis” (dhamma). Both sides are an inseparable unity: the mind fits the world as the eye fits the light, or in other words: mano is the counterpart of dhammā, the subjective dh. Dhamma in this sense is the rationality or lawfulness of the Universe (see dhamma B. 1), Cosmic Order, Natural Law. It may even be taken quite generally as the “empirical. world” (as Geiger, e. g. interprets it in his Pali Dhamma p. 80--82, pointing out the substitution of vatthu for dhamma at Kvu 126 sq. i. e. the material world), as the world of “things,” of phenomena in general without specification as regards sound, sight, smell, etc. -- Dhamma as counterpart of mano is rather an abstract (pluralistic) representation of the world, i. e. the phenomena as such with a certain inherent rationality; manas is the receiver of these phenomena in their abstract meaning, it is the abstract sense, so to speak. Of course, to explain manas and its function one has to resort to terms of materiality, and thus it happens that the term vijānāti, used of manas, is also used of the 5^th sense, that of touch (to which mano is closely related, cp. our E. expressions of touch as denoting rational, abstract processes: warm & cold used figuratively; to grasp anything; terror-stricken; deeply moved feeling›Lat. palpare to palpitate, etc.). We might say of the mind “sensing,” that manas “senses” (as a refined sense of touch) the “sensibility” (dhamma) of the objects, or as Cpd. 183 expresses it “cognizable objects.” See also kāya II.; and phassa. -- 2. In Buddhist Psychological Logic the concept mano is often more definitely circumscribed by the addition of the terms (man-)āyatana, (man-)indriya and (mano-)dhātu, which are practically all the same as mano (and its objective correspondent dhammā). Cp. also below No. 3. The additional terms try to give it the rank of a category of thought. On mano-dhātu and m-āyatana see also the discourse by S. Z. Aung. Cpd. 256--59, with Mrs. Rh. D.’s apt remarks on p. 259. -- The position of manas among the 6 āyatanas (or indriyas) is one of control over the other 5 (pure and simple senses). This is expressed e. g. at M.I,295 (commented on at DhsA.72) and S.V,217 (mano nesaṁ gocara-visayaṁ paccanubhoti: mano enjoys the function-spheres of the other senses; cp. Geiger, Dhamma 81; as in the Sāṅkhya: Garbe, Sāṅkhya Philosophie 252 sq.). Cp. Vin.I,36; “ettha ca te mano na ramittha rūpesu saddesu atho rasesu.” -- 3. As regards the relation of manas to citta, it may be stated, that citta is more substantial (as indicated by translation “heart”), more elemental as the seat of emotion, whereas manas is the finer element, a subtler feeling or thinking as such. See also citta² I., and on rel. to viññāṇa & citta see citta² IV. 2^b. In the more popular opinion and general phraseology however manas is almost synonymous with citta as opposed to body, cittaṁ iti pi mano iti pi S.II,94. So in the triad “thought (i. e. intention) speech and action” manas interchanges with citta: see kāya III, -- The formula runs kāyena vācāya manasā, e. g. M.III,178 (sucaritaṁ caritvā); Dh.391 (natthi dukkaṭaṁ), cp. Dh.96; santaṁ tassa manaṁ, santā vācā ca kamma ca. Besides with citta: kāyena vācāya uda cetasā S.I,93, 102; A.I,63. rakkhitena k. vācāya cittena S.II,231; IV,112. -- It is further comb^d with citta in the scholastic (popular) definition of manas, found in identical words at all Cy. passages: “mano” is “cittaṁ mano mānasaṁ hadayaṁ, paṇḍaraṁ, man-āyatanaṁ . . . mano-viññāna-dhātu” (mind sensibility). Thus e. g. at Nd¹ 3 (for mano), 176 (id.); Nd² 494 (which however leaves out cittaṁ in exegesis of Sn.1142, 1413, but has it in No. 495 in exegesis of Sn.1039); Dhs.6 (in defⁿ of citta), 17 (of man’indriyaṁ), 65 (of man-āyatanaṁ), 68 (of mano-viññṇa-dhātu). ‹-› The close relation between the two appears further from their combⁿ in the formula of the ādesanā-pāṭihāriyaṁ (wonder of manifestation, i. e. the discovery of other peoples’thoughts & intentions), viz. evam pi te mano ittham pi te mano iti pi te cittaṁ: “so & so is in your mind . . . so & so are your emotions”; D.I,213= III,103=A.I,170. -- At S.I,53 both are mutually influenced in their state of unsteadiness and fear: niccaṁ utrastaṁ idaṁ cittaṁ (heart), niccaṁ ubbiggaṁ idaṁ mano (mind). The same relation (citta as instrument or manifestation of mano) is evident from J.I,36, where the passage runs: sīho cittaṁ pasādesi. Satthā tassa manaṁ oloketva vyākāsi . . . At PvA.264 mano (of Pv IV.7¹) is expl^d by cittaṁ; pīti mano of Sn.766 (glad of heart) expl^d at SnA 512 by santuṭṭha-citto; nibbānamanaso of Sn.942 at SnA 567 by nibbāna-ninna-citto. In the phrase yathā-manena “from his heart,” i. e. sincerely, voluntarily DhA.I,42, mano clearly acts as citta. -- 4. Phrases: manaṁ uppādeti to make up one’s mind, to resolve DhA.II,140 (cp. citt’uppāda); manaṁ karoti: (a) to fix one’s mind upon, to give thought to, find pleasure or to delight in (Loc.) J.IV,223 (rūpe na manaṁ kare=itthi-rūpe nimittaṁ na gaṇheyyāsi C. Cp. the similar & usual manasi-karoti in same sense); VI,45 (Pass. gīte karute mano); (b) to make up one’s mind DhA.II,87; manaṁ gaṁhāti to “take the mind,” take the fancy, to please, to win approval J.IV,132; DhA.II,48. -- III, °mana: dhamm-uddhacca-viggahita° A.II,157 (read °mano for °manā); saṁkiliṭṭha-manā narā Th.2, 344; atta° pleased; gedhita° greedy Pv.II,8²; dum° depressed in mind, sad or sick at heart D.II,148; S.I,103; Vin.I,21; A.II,59, 61, 198; Th.2, 484; J.I,189; opp. sumana elated, joyful Pv.II,9⁴⁸ (=somanassajāta PvA.132); pīti° glad or joyful of heart Sn.766 (expl^d by tuṭṭha-mano, haṭṭha-mano, attamano etc. at Nd¹ 3; by santuṭṭha-citto at SnA 512). -- IV. manasi-karoti (etc.) to fix the mind intently, to bear in mind, take to heart, ponder, think upon, consider, recognise. -- 1. (v.) pres. 1^st pl. °karoma Vin.I,103; imper. 2^nd sg. °karohi, often in formula “suṇāhi sādhukaṁ m.-k.” “harken and pay attention” D.I,124, 157, 249; cp. M. I.7; A.I,227; pl. 2^nd °karotha A.I,171; D.I,214 (+vitakketha); Pot. °kareyyātha D.I,90 (taṁ atthaṁ sādhukaṁ k.); ppr. °karonto DhsA.207; ger. °katvā A.II,116 (aṭṭhikatvā+. . . ohitasoto suṇāti); Pv III,2⁵ (a°=anāvajjetvā PvA.181); VvA.87, 92; PvA.62; grd. °kātabba Vism.244, 278; DhsA.205; aor. manas-âkāsi M.II,61; 2^nd pl. (Prohib.) (mā) manasâkattha D.I,214; A.I,171. Pass. manasi-karīyati Vism.284. -- 2. (n.) manasikāra attention, pondering, fixed thought (cp. Cpd. 12, 28, 40, 282) D.III,104, 108 sq., 112, 227 (yoniso), 273 (ayoniso); M.I,296; S.II,3 (cetanā phasso m.); IV,297 (sabba-nimittānaṁ a° inattention to all outward signs of allurement); Nd¹ 501 (ayoniso); Vbh.320, 325, 373 (yoniso), 425; Vism.241 (paṭikūla°); VbhA.148 (ayoniso), 248 sq. (as regards the 32 ākāras), 251 (paṭikkūla°), 255 (n’âtisīghato etc.), 270 (ayoniso), 500; DhA.II,87 (paṭikkula°); DhsA.133. --sammā manasikāraṁ anvāya by careful pondering D.I,13, 18≈. As adj. (thoughtful) at ThA.273. -- The defⁿ of m. at Vism.466 runs as follows: “kiriyā-kāro, manamhi kāro m. purima-manato visadisaṁ manaṁ karotī ti pi m. Svāyaṁ: ārammaṇa-paṭipādako vīthi-paṭipādako javana-p.° ti ti-ppakāro.” -- Cpds.: --kusalatā proficiency in attention D.III,211; --kosalla id. VbhA.56 (in detail), 224, 226 sq.; Vism.241 (tenfold), 243 (id., viz. anupubbato, nâtisīghato, nâtisāṇikato etc.); PvA.63 (yoniso°); --vidhāna arrangement of attention VbhA.69, 71; --vidhi rule or form of attention Vism.278 (eightfold, viz. gaṇanā, anubandhanā, phusanā, ṭhapanā, sallakhaṇā, vivaṭṭanā, pārisuddhi, tesañ ca paṭipassanā ti). -- The composition form of manas is mano°, except before vowels, when man’takes its place (as man-āyatana VbhA.46 sq.).

--aṅgaṇa (man°) sphere of ideation (Dhs. trsl. § 58) D.III,243, 280 and passim. --āvajjana representative cognition: Cpd. 59. --indriya (man°) mind-faculty, category of mind, faculty of ideation (cp. Dhs. trs. § 17; Cpd. pp. 183, 184) D.I,70 (with other senses cakkh-undriyaṁ etc.) III,226, and passim. --kamma work of the mind, mental action, associated with kāyakamma (bodily action) and vacī° (vocal action) A.I,32, 104; Pug.41; Dhs.981 (where omitted in text). --java [cp. Vedic manojava] swift as thought Vv 63²⁹; PvA.216 (assājāniya). --daṇḍa “mind-punishment” (?) corresponding to kāya° & vacī-daṇḍa, M.I,372 sq. (Neumann, trsl^s “Streich in Gedanken”). --duccarita sin of the mind or thoughts Dh.233; Nd¹ 386; Pug.60. --dosa blemish of mind A.I,112. --dvāra door of the mind, threshold of consciousness VbhA.41; DhsA.425, cp. Dhs. trsl. 3 (²p. 2); Cpd. 10. --dhātu element of apprehension, the ideational faculty (cp. Dhs. trsl. 129, ²p. 119, 120; and p. ²lxxxv sq.) Dhs.457 sq.; Vbh.14, 71, 87 sq., 144, 302; Vism.488; VbhA.80, 81, 239 (physiological foundation), 405; DhsA.263, 425; KhA 53. --padosa anger in mind, ill-will D.III,72; M.I,377; Sn.702; J.IV,29; Dhs.1060 (cp. DhsA.367: manaṁ padussayamāno uppajjatī ti, i. e. to set one’s heart at anger). --padosika (adj.) debauched in mind (by envy & ill-will), N. of a class of gods D.I,20; VbhA.498, 519. Cp. Kirfel, Kosmographie, p. 193 & Kern (Toev. I.163), slightly different: from looking at each other too long. --pasāda tranquillity of the mind, devotional feeling (towards the Buddha) DhA.I,28. --pubbaṅgama directed by mind, dominated by thought (see pubba²) Dh.1, 2; cp. DhA.I,21, 35. --bhāvanīya of right mind-culture, self-composed S.III,1; M.III,261; Vv 34¹³ (cp. VvA.152: mana-vaḍḍhanaka); Miln.129. Kern, Toev. I.163 trsl^s “to be kept in mind with honour.” --mattaka, in phrase mana-mattakena (adv.) “by mere mind,” consisting of mind only, i. e. memorial, as a matter of mind J.IV,228. --maya made of mind, consisting of mind, i. e. formed by the magic power of the mind, magically formed, expl^d at Vism.405 as “adhiṭṭhāna-manena nimmitattā m.”; at DA.I,120 as “jhāna-manena nibbatta”; at DhA.I,23 as “manato nipphanna”; at VvA.10 as “bāhirena paccayena vinā manasā va nibbatta.” -- Dh.1, 2; J.VI,265 (manomayaṁ sindhavaṁ abhiruyha); Sdhp.259; as quality of iddhi: Vism.379, 406. -- Sometimes a body of this matter can be created by great holiness or knowledge; human beings or gods may be endowed with this power D.I,17 (+pītibhakkha, of the Ābhassaras), 34 (attā dibbo rūpī m. sabbaṅga-paccaṅgī etc.), 77 (id.), 186 (id.); Vin.II,185 (Koliya-putto kālaṁ kato aññataraṁ mano-mayaṁ kāyaṁ upapanno); M.I,410 (devā rūpino m.); S.IV,71; A.I,24; III,122, 192; IV,235; V,60. --ratha desired object (lit. what pleases the mind), wish Vism.506 (°vighāta+icchā-vighāta); °ṁ pūreti to fulfil one’s wish Mhvs 8, 27 (puṇṇa-sabbamanoratha). Manoratha-pūraṇī (f.) “the wish fulfiller” is the name of the Commentary on the Aṅguttara Nikāya. --rama pleasing to the mind, lovely, delightful Sn.50, 337, 1013; Dh.58; Pv.II,9⁵⁸ (phoṭṭhabba), Mhvs 18, 48; VvA.340. --viññāṇa representative cognition, rationality Vism.489; VbhA.150 (22 fold); DhsA.304, cp. Dhs. trsl. 170 (²p. 157); --dhātu (element of) representative intellection, mind cognition, the 6^th of the viññāṇadhātus or series of cognitional elements corresponding to and based on the 12 simple dhātus, which are the external & internal sense-relations (=āyatanāni) Dhs.58; Vbh.14, 71, 87, 89, 144, 176 and passim. See also above II. 3 and discussions at Dhs. trsl. 132 (²p. 122) & introd. p. 53 sq.; Cpd. 123², 184. --viññeyya to be comprehended by the mind (cp. Dialogues II.281ⁿ) D.II,281; M.III,55, 57; J.IV,195. --vitakka a thought (of mind) S.I,207=Sn.270 (mano is in C. on this passage expl^d as “kusala-citta” SnA 303). --sañcetan’āhāra “nutriment of representative cogitation” (Dhs. trsl. 31) S.II,11, 13, 99; Dhs.72; Vism.341. --satta “with mind attached,” N. of certain gods, among whom are reborn those who died with minds absorbed in some attachment M.I,376. --samācāra conduct, observance, habit of thought or mind (associated with kāya° & vacī°) M.II,114; III,45, 49. --silā (cp. Sk. manaḥ-śila) red arsenic, often used as a powder for dying and other purposes; the red colour is frequently found in later (Cy.) literature, e. g. J.V,416 (+haritāla yellow ointment); Vism.485; DhA.IV,113 (id. as cuṇṇa); ThA.70 (Ap. V,20); Mhvs 29, 12; SnA 59 (°piṇḍa in simile); DhA.II,43 (°rasa); VvA.288 (°cuṇṇa-piñjara-vaṇṇa, of ripe mango fruit); PvA.274 (°vaṇṇāni ambaphalāni); --tala a flat rock, platform (=silātala) SnA 93, 104; as the platform on which the seat of the Buddha is placed & whence he sends forth the lion’s roar: J.II,219; VI,399; VvA.217; as a district of the Himavant: J.VI,432; SnA 358. --hara charming, captivating, beautiful Mhvs 18, 49; N. of a special gem (the wishing gem?) Miln.118, 354. (Page 520)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mana 的【合】的词形) ~kamma, 【中】意业。 ~java, 【形】如心意一般地迅速。 ~duccarita, 【中】恶意。 ~dvāra, 【中】意门。 ~dhātu,【阴】（十八界的）意界。 ~padosa, 【阳】恶意。 ~pasāda, 【阳】信仰的心意。 ~pubbaṅgama, 【形】心意所领导的。 ~maya, 【形】心造的。 ~ratha, 【阳】心愿。 ~rama, 【形】令人愉快的。 ~viññāṇa, 【中】意识。 ~viññeyya, 【形】由心意去了解的。 ~vitakka, 【阳】心思。 ~hara,【形】迷人的。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Manobhāvanīya: {'def': '(mano意+bhāvanīya修习的)，意修习的。Bodhi译： worthy of esteem (值得尊敬的)。Manobhāvanīyānanti manavaḍḍhakānaṁ.Yesu hi diṭṭhesu kusalavasena cittaṁ vaḍḍhati, te sāriputtamoggallānādayo mahātherā manobhāvanīyā nāma.(意修习的：(善)意增长。在知见上，善心增长。称呼舍利弗、目犍连大上座为意修习的。)SA.22.1./II,250.(~AA.6.27.)：manobhāvanīyassāti ettha manaṁ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti manobhāvanīyo.(意修习：此处，修习意，增长意，称为‘意修习’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manodhātu: {'def': '﹐【阴】(十八界的)意界。《阿毘达摩义广释》(Vibhv.CS:p.121)Manoviññāṇadhātuyā viya visiṭṭhamananakiccāyogato mananamattā dhātūti manodhātu. 《法集论注》(DhsA.CS:p.305) ：455. Manodhātuniddese sabhāvasuññatanissattaṭṭhena manoyeva dhātu manodhātu.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manodvārāvajjanacitta: {'def': '﹐【中】意门转向心，能够生起於五门或意门心路过程(cittavīthi)。当它在五门心路过程里，随推度心之后生起，它称为「确定心」(votthapanacitta)；其作用是确定或鉴别五识之一刚识知的目标。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manomayā: {'def': '【阳.复.主】【形】心意所生。AA.1.14.：manomayanti manena nibbattitaṁ.(心意所生：已於心产生。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manorathapūraṇī: {'def': 'f. 増支部註. [AA.].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Manosilā: {'def': '【阴】雄黄，二硫化二砷。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】雄黄(red arsenic，二硫化二砷S2AS2，又称：石黄、鸡冠石、黄金石，是矿物中药)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manta: {'def': '[cp. Vedic mantra, fr. mantray] orig. a divine saying or decision, hence a secret plan [cp. def. of mant at Dhtp 578 by “gutta-bhāsane”], counsel; hence magic charm, spell. In particular a secret religious code or doctrine, esp. the Brahmanic texts or the Vedas, regarded as such (i. e. as the code of a sect) by the Buddhists. -- 1. with ref. to the Vedas usually in the pl. mantā (the Scriptures, Hymns, Incantations): D.I,96; M.II,166 (brahme mante adhiyitvā; mante vāceti); Sn.249 (=devā SnA 291), 302 (mante ganthetvā, criticised by Bdhgh as brahmanic (: heretic) work in contrast with the ancient Vedas as follows: “vede bhinditvā dhammayutte porāṇa-mante nāsetvā adhamma-yutte kūṭa-mante ganthetvā” SnA 320), 1000 (with ref. to the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa), 1018; Dh.241 (holy studies); J.II,100; III,28 (maybe to be classed under 2), 537. -- Sometimes in sg.: mantaṁ parivattenti brahma-cintitaṁ Pv.II,6¹³ (=veda PvA.97)=Vv 63¹⁶ (=veda VvA.265); -- n. pl. also mantāni, meaning “Vedas”: Miln.10. -- 2 (doubtful, perhaps as sub group to No. 3) holy scriptures in general, sacred text, secret doctrine S.I,57 (mantā dhīra “firm in doctrine” K.S. thus taking mantā as Instr.; it may better be taken as mantar); Sn.1042 (where Nd² 497 expl^s as paññā etc.); Mhvs 5, 109 (Buddha° the “mantra” of the B.), 147 (id.). -- 3. divine utterance, a word with supernatural power, a charm, spell, magic art, witchcraft Miln.11 (see about manta in the Jātakas: Fick, Sociale Gliederung 152, 153). At PvA.117 m. is combined with yoga and ascribed to the devas, while y. is referred to men. -- J.I,200 (+paritta); III,511 (°ṁ karoti to utter a charm, cast a spell); DhA.IV,227. There are several special charms mentioned at var. places of the Jātakas, e. g. one called Vedabbha, by means of which under a certain constellation one is able to produce a shower of gems from the air J.I,253 (nakkhatta-yoge laddhe taṁ mantaṁ parivattetvā ākāse ulloki, tato ākāsato satta-ratana-vassaṁ vassati). Others are: paṭhavī-jaya m. (by means of which one conquers the earth) J.II,243; sabba-rāva-jānana° (of knowing all sounds, of animals) III,415; nidhi-uddharana° (of finding secret treasures) III,116; catukaṇṇa° (four-cornered) VI,392, etc. -- 4. advice, counsel, plan, design Vin.IV,308 (°ṁ saṁharati to foil a plan); J.VI,438. -- 5. (adj.) (-°) parivattana° a charm that can be said, an effective charm J.I,200; bahu° knowing many charms, very tricky DhA.II,4; bhinna° one who has neglected an advice J.VI,437, 438.

--ajjhāyaka one who studies the Mantras or Holy Scriptures (of the Brahmins) J.I,167; DhA.III,361 (tinnaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū m.-a. brāhmaṇo). --ajjhena study of the Vedas SnA 314. --pada=manta 1. D.I,104 (=veda-saṅkhāta m. DA.I,273. --pāraga one who masters the Vedas; in buddh. sense: one who excels in wisdom Sn.997. manta in this sense is by the Cys. always expl^d by paññā, e. g., Nd² 497 (as mantā f.); DhA.IV,93 (id.), SnA 549 (mantāya pariggahetvā). --pāragū one who is accomplished in the Vedas Sn.251 (=vedapāragū SnA 293), 690 (=vedānaṁ pāragata SnA 488), 976. --bandhava one acquainted with the Mantras Sn.140 (=vedabandhū SnA 192); Nd¹ 11 (where Nd² 455 in same connection reads mitta° for manta°: see under bandhu). --bhāṇin reciter of the Holy Texts (or charms) Th.II,281; fig. a clever speaker Sn.850 (but Nd¹ 219 reads manta°; see mantar) Dh.363 (cp. DhA.IV,93; paññāya bhaṇana-sīla) Th.1, 2. --yuddka a weird fight, a bewitched battle Mhvs 25, 49 (“cunningly planned b.” trsl. Geiger; “diplomatic stratagem,” Turnour). (Page 522)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】吉祥物，符咒，诀语。 ~jjhāyaka, 【形】学习神圣咒语的人。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】吉祥物，符咒，诀语。mantajjhāyaka,【形】学习神圣咒语的人。Mantadharaṁ tiṇṇaṁ vedānaṁ pāragū sanighaṇḍuketubhānaṁ sākkharappabhedānaṁ itihāsapañcamānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo.(持真言，通达三吠陀又及语汇、仪轨、音韵律(或语源论)、第五史传，通文句，通文法。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mantana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】请教，讨论。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】mantanā,【阴】请教，讨论。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mantanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mantanā] plotting J.V,437. (Page 522)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mantanā: {'def': 'f. (& °ṇā) [fr. mant] counsel, consultation, deliberation, advice, command D.I,104; A.I,199; Vin.V,164; J.VI,437, 438; Miln.3 (ṇ); DA.I,273. (Page 522)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mantar: {'def': '[n. ag. of mant, cp. Sk. *mantṛ a thinker] a sage, seer, wise man, usually appositionally Nom. mantā “as a sage,” “like a thinker,” a form which looks like a fem. and is mostly expl^d as such by the Commentaries. Mantā has also erroneously been taken as Instr. of manta, or as a so-called ger. of manteti, in which latter two functions it has been expl^d at “jānitvā.” The form has evidently puzzled the old commentators, as early as the Niddesa; through the Abhp (153, 979) it has come down at mantā “wisdom” to Childers. Kern, Toev. s. v. hesitates and only comes half near the truth. The Index to Pj. marks the word with? ‹-› S.I,57 (+dhīra; trslⁿ “firm in doctrine”); Sn.159 (“in truth,” opp. to musā; SnA 204 expl^ns m.=paññā; tāya paricchinditvā bhāsati), 916 (mantā asmī ti, expl^d at SnA 562 by “mantāya”), 1040=1042 (=Nd² 497 mantā vuccati paññā etc.); Vv 63⁶ (expl^d as jānitvā paññāya paricchinditvā VvA.262). -- Besides this form we have a shortened manta (Nom.) at Sn.455 (akiñcano+), which is expl^d at SnA 402 as mantā jānitvā. It is to be noted that for manta-bhāṇin at Sn.850 the Nd¹ 219 reads mantā and expl^s customarily by “mantāya pariggahetvā vācaṁ bhāsati.” (Page 522)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manteti: {'def': '(mant + e), 商量，采取商议，讨论。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 ~tita。【现分】 ~tenta, mantayamāna, 【独】 ~tetvā。【不】 ~tetuŋ。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(mant+e), 1.商量，采取商议(2nd pl. imper. mantavho, as compared with mantayavho; Sn.p. 107 (=talk privately to); mantayitvāna ger.; imper. mantayatha; aor. mantayiṁsu)。2.考虑(grd. mantayitabba & inf. mantayituṁ)。3.劝告(=kathemi kittayāmi PvA.225)。【过】mantesi。【过分】mantita。【现分】mantenta, mantayamāna,【独】mantetvā。【不】mantetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic mantrayati; mant is given at Dhtp in meaning of gutta-bhāsana, i. e. “secret talk”] to pronounce in an important (because secret) manner (like a mantra), i. e. 1. to take counsel (with=Instr. or saddhiṁ) D.I,94, 104 (mantanaṁ manteyya to discuss) 122 (2^nd pl. imper. mantavho, as compared with mantayavho J.II,107 besides mantavho ibid. Cp. Geiger, P.Gr. § 126); II,87, 239; Vin.IV,308 (mantesuṁ aor.; perhaps “plotted”); Sn.p. 107 (=talk privately to); Sn.379; J.I,144; VI,525 (mantayitvāna ger.); DA.I,263 (imper. mantayatha); PvA.74 (aor. mantayiṁsu). -- 2. to consider, to think over, to be of opinion A.I,199 (Pot. mantaye); Miln.91 (grd. mantayitabba & inf. mantayituṁ). -- 3. to announce, advise; pronounce, advise Sn.126; Pv IV.1²⁰ (=kathemi kittayāmi PvA.225); SnA 169. -- pp. mantita. -- Cp. ā°. (Page 522)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mantha: {'def': '[fr. math] a churning stick, a sort of rice-cake (=satthu) Vin.I,4, [cp. Vedic mantha “Rührtrank”= homeric kukew/n “Gerstenmehl in Milch verrührt,” Zimmer, Altind. Leben 268]. (Page 523)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. math),【阳】搅乳棍，乾饼，炒过的玉黍蜀面粉(a churning stick, a sort of rice-cake (=satthu) Vin.I,4,)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】搅乳棍，炒过的玉黍蜀面粉。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Manthara: {'def': '【阳】龟。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】龟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mantin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. manta] 1. (adj.) giving or observing counsel S.I,236. -- 2. (n.) counsellor, minister J.VI,437 (paṇḍita m.). (Page 522)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mantita: {'def': '[pp. of manteti] 1. considered Th.1, 9; Miln.91. -- 2. advised, given as counsel J.VI,438; DA.I,273. (Page 522)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mantu: {'def': '【阳】想像的人。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】想像的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Mantī: {'def': '【阳】议员，部长。 ~tinī, 【阴】女议员。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】议员，部长。mantinī,【阴】女议员。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Manuja: {'def': '【阳】人类。manujādhipa, manujinda,【阳】人中之王，国王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】人类。 ~jādhipa, ~jinda, 【阳】人中之王，国王。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[manu+ja, i. e. sprung from Manu, cp. etym. of manussa s. v.] human being; man A.IV,159; Sn.458, 661, 1043 sq.; Dh.306, 334. Nd² 496 (expl^ns as “manussa” & “satta”).

--âdhipa lord of men Mhvs 19, 32. --inda king of men, great king Sn.553; J.VI,98. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manussa: {'def': '(fr. manus, cp. Vedic manusya),【阳】人类。manussatta,【中】人身(S.56.47./V,456.︰manussattaṁ)。manussabhāva,【阳】人类的状态。manussabhūta,【形】已成为人者。manussaloka,【阳】人类的世界。manussasaññā﹐人想(心中怀著关於人之念头)。Ye assu darathā gāmasaññaṁ paṭicca, te’dha na santi; ye assu darathā manussasaññaṁ paticca, te’dha na santi.(若由於村想而有任何忧患，现在无那些；若由人想而有任何忧患，现在无那些。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. manus, cp. Vedic manuṣya. Connected etym. with Goth. manna=man] a human being, man. The popular etym. connects m. with Manu(s), the ancestor of men, e. g. KhA 123: “Manuno apaccā ti manussā, porāṇā pana bhaṇanti “mana-ussannatāya manussa” ; te Jambudīpakā, Aparagoyānikā, Uttarakurukā, Pubbavidehakā ti catubbidhā.” Similarly with the other view of connecting it with “mind” VvA.18: “manassa ussannatāya manussā” etc. Cp. also VvA.23, where manussa-nerayika, °peta, °tiracchāna are distinguished. -- Sn.75, 307, 333 sq., 611 sq.; Dh.85, 188, 197 sq., 321; Nd¹ 97 (as gati), 340, 484 (°phassa of Sn.964); Vism.312; VbhA.455 (var. clans); DhA.I,364. --amanussa not human, a deva, a ghost, a spirit; in cpds. “haunted,” ilke °kantāra J.I,395, °ṭṭhāna Vv 84³ (cp. VvA.334 where expl^d); °sadda DhA.I,315. See also separately amanussa.

--attabhāva human existence PvA.71, 87, 122. --itthi a human woman PvA.48, 154. --inda lord of men S.I,69; Mhvs 19, 33. --khādaka man eater, cannibal (usually appl^d to Yakkhas) VbhA.451. --deva (a) “god of men,” i. e. king Pv.II,8¹¹; (b) men & gods (?) VvA.321 (Hardy, in note takes it as “gods of men,” i. e. brāhmaṇā). --dhamma condition of man, human state VvA.24. See also uttari-manussa dhamma. --bhūta as a human, in human form Pv.I,11²; II,1¹². --loka the world of men Sn.683. (Page 520)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】人类。 ~tta, 【中】人世间。 ~bhāva, 【阳】人类的状态。~bhūta, 【形】已成为人者。 ~loka, 【阳】人类的世界。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Manussatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr, manussa] human existence, state of men It.19; Vv 34¹⁶; SnA 48, 51; Sdhp.17 sq. (Page 520)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manussika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. manussa] see under a°. (Page 520)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manute: {'def': '[Med. form of maññati] to think, discern, understand DhsA.123. (Page 520)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manuñña: {'def': '(梵manojña) (=manorama),【形】令人愉快的，愉快的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Class. Sk. manojña] pleasing, delightful, beautiful Vv 84¹⁷ (=manorama VvA.340); J.I,207; II,331; Pv.II,12²; IV,12¹; Miln.175, 398; VvA.11, 36; PvA.251; adv. °ṁ pleasantly, delightfully J.IV,252. ‹-› Opp. a° unpleasant J.VI,207. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】令人愉快的，愉快的。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Manāpa: {'def': 'manāpika,【形】令人喜爱的，迷人的。manāpāmanāpaṁ paccanubhoti, 经验喜与不喜(之事)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'manāpika, 【形】令人喜爱的，迷人的。(p250)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. BSk. manāpa] pleasing, pleasant, charming Sn.22, 759; Dh.339 (°ssavana); VvA.71; PvA.3, 9. Often in combⁿ piya manāpa, e. g. D.II,19; III,167; J.II,155; IV,132. -- Opp. a°, e. g. Pug.32. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manāpika: {'def': '=manāpa, Vbh.380; Miln.362. (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Manāti: {'def': '[cp. Sk. mṛṇāti, mṛ²] to crush, destroy; only in Commentator’s fanciful etymological analysis of veramaṇī at DhsA.218 (veraṁ manāti (sic.) vināsetī ti v.) and KhA 24 (veraṁ maṇātī ti v., veraṁ pajahati vinodeti etc.). (Page 519)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Mara: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. mṛ] dying; only neg. amara not dying, immortal, in phrase ajarāmara free from decay & death Th.II,512; Pv.II,6¹¹. See also amara. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Marati: {'def': '[mṛ=Idg. *mer, Vedic mriyate & marate; cp. Av. miryeite, Sk. marta=Gr. brotόs mortal, man; māra death; Goth. maurpr=Ags. mort=Ger. mord; Lith. miQti to die; Lat. morior to die, mors death. The root is identical with that of mṛṇāti to crush: see maṇāti, and mṛdnāti (mardati) same: see mattikā. -- The Dhtp (No. 245) defines mṛ by “pāṇa-cāge,” i. e. giving up breathing] to die. -- pres. marati Mhvs v. spur. after 5, 27; 36, 83; Pot. mareyyaṁ J.VI,498; 2^nd mareyyāsi J.III,276. ppr. maramāna Mhvs 36, 76. -- aor. amarā J.III,389 (=mata C.; with gloss amari). --amari Mhvs 36, 96. -- Fut. marissati J.III,214. -- ppr. (=fut.) marissaṁ J.III,214 (for *mariṣyanta). -- Inf. marituṁ D.II,330 (amaritu-kāma not willing to die); Vism.297 (id.); VvA.207 (positive); and marituye Th.2, 426. ‹-› The form miyyati (mīyati) see separately. -- Caus I. māreti to kill, murder Mhvs 37, 27; PvA.4. Pass. māriyati PvA.5 (ppr. māriyamāna); Sdhp.139 (read mār° for marīy°). -- Caus. II. mārāpeti to cause to be killed J.III,178; Mhvs 37, 28. Cp. pamāreti. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(mar + a), 死。【过】 mari。【过分】 mata。【现分】 maranta,maramāna。【潜】 maritabba。【独】 maritvā。【不】 marituŋ。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(mar(梵mr)死+a), 死。【过】mari。【过分】mata。【现分】maranta, maramāna。【义】maritabba。【独】maritvā。【不】marituṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Maraṇa: {'def': '【中】死亡。 ~kāla, 【阳】死时。 ~cetanā, 【阴】意图杀。 ~dhamma,【形】死法。 ~anta, ~pariyosāna, 【形】死为尾端的，最后是死的。~bhaya, 【中】怕死。 ~mañcaka, 【阳】死床。 ~mukha, 【中】死魔的嘴。 ~sati, 【阴】念死（的禅修）。 ~samaya, 【阳】临终。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹mar(梵mr)),【中】死亡。maraṇakāla,【阳】死时(Vibhv.p.144︰Maraṇakāleti maraṇāsannakāle.死时︰临死之际)。maraṇacetanā,【阴】意图死亡(intention of death DhA.I,20.)。maraṇadhamma,【形】死法。maraṇanta, maraṇapariyosāna,【形】死为尾端的，最后是死的。maraṇabhaya,【中】怕死。maraṇamañcaka,【阳】死床。maraṇamukha,【中】死魔的嘴。maraṇsati,【阴】念死(禅修法)。maraṇasamaya,【阳】临终(the time of death)。maraṇānussati,【阴】死随念(禅修法mindfulness of death)。akālamaraṇa﹐非时死(横死，因断业而死)。khaṇikamaraṇa, 突然死(sudden death Vism.229)。maraṇanta, 死王作结束(having death as its end (of jīvita) Dh.148 (cp. DhA.II,366: maraṇa-saṅkhāto antako)。maraṇapariyosana, 死亡为终结(ending in death (of jīvita, life) DhA.III,111, 170)。maraṇapāra, 死的另一边( “the other side of death,” Np. at Nd1 154 (vv. ll. BB purāpuraṁ; SS parammukhaṁ). --maraṇabhaya, 死怖(the fear of death J.I,203; VI,398; Vbh.367. --maraṇabhojana, 死前最后一餐(food given before death, the last meal J.I,197; II,420. )。kāyassa bhedā param maraṇā﹐身坏命终。kāyassa bhedā ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṁ maraṇā﹐身体坏了、灭绝、消失，死后无有(身坏命终，更无所有)。mrtyu-rāja(梵), 【阳】死王(阎罗王)。kālamaraṇa﹐适时死(业尽(即福尽)；寿命尽；福与寿命俱尽而死)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. mṛ] death, as ending this (visible) existence, physical death, in a narrower meaning than kālakiriyā; dying, in cpds. death. -- The customary stock definition of maraṇa runs; yaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhā tamhā satta-nikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṁ, maccu maraṇaṁ kālakiriyā, khandhānaṁ bhedo, kaḷebarassa nikkhepo M.I,49; Nd¹ 123, 124 (adds “jīvit’indriyass’upacchedo”). Cp. similar def^ns of birth and old age under jāti and jarā. -- S.I,121; D.III,52, 111 sq., 135 sq., 146 sq., 235, 258 sq.; Sn.32, 318, 426 sq., 575 sq., 742, 806; Nd² 254 (=maccu); Pug.60; Vbh.99 sq.; VbhA.100 (defⁿ and exegesis in det., cp. Vism.502), 101 (var. kinds of, cp. Vism.229), 156 (lahuka), 157; DhA.III,434; PvA.5, 18, 54, 64, 76, 96; Sdhp.292, 293. --kāla° timely death (opp. akāla°); khaṇika° sudden death Vism.229.

--anta having death as its end (of jīvita) Dh.148 (cp. DhA.II,366: maraṇa-saṅkhāto antako). --ânussati mindfulness of death Vism.197, 230 sq. (under 8 aspects). --cetanā intention of death DhA.I,20. --dhamma subject to death PvA.41. --pariyosana ending in death (of jīvita, life) DhA.III,111, 170. --pāra “the other side of death,” Np. at Nd¹ 154 (vv. ll. BB purāpuraṁ; SS parammukhaṁ). --bhaya the fear of death J.I,203; VI,398; Vbh.367. --bhojana food given before death, the last meal J.I,197; II,420. --mañca death-bed Vism.47, 549; °ka J.IV,132. --mukha the mouth of d. PvA.97 (or should we read °dukkha?). --sati the thought (or mindfulness) of death, meditation on death SnA 54; DhA.III,171; PvA.61, 66. --samaya the time of death VbhA.157--159 (in var. conditions as regards paṭisandhi). (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Marica: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. scientific Sk. marica] black pepper Vin.I,201 (allowed as medicine to the bhikkhus); Miln.63.

--gaccha the M.-shrub J.V,12. --cuṇṇa powdered pepper, fine pepper J.I,455. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】胡椒粉，红辣椒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】胡椒粉，红辣椒。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Mariyādā: {'def': '【阴】边界，界限。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】边界，界限。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic maryādā; perhaps related to Lat. mare sea; s. Walde, Lat. Wtb. under mare] 1. boundary, limit, shore, embankment Vin.III,50; A.III,227 (brāhmaṇānaṁ); D.III,92=Vism.419; J.V,325; VI,536 (tīra°); Mhvs.34, 70; 36, 59 (vāpi°); Miln.416. -- 2. strictly defined relation, rule, control J.II,215; Vism.15. -- adj. keeping to the lines (or boundaries), observing strict rules A.III,227 (quoted SnA 318, 325). °bandha keeping in control Vin.I,287. -- Cp. vimariyādi. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Maru: {'def': '【阴】沙，荒沙地。【阳】神。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】沙，荒沙地。【阳】神。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² [Vedic marut, always in pl. marutaḥ, the gods of the thunder-storm] 1. pl. marū the genii, spirits of the air Sn.681, 688; Miln.278 (nāga-yakkha-nara-marū; perhaps in meaning 2); Mhvs 5, 27. -- 2. gods in general (°-) Mhvs 15, 211 (°gaṇā hosts of gods); 18, 68 (°narā gods and men). -- Cp. māruta & māluta. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Epic Sk. maru] a region destitute of water, a desert. Always comb^d with °kantāra: Nd¹ 155 (as Name); J.I,107; VbhA.6; VvA.332; PvA.99, 112. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Marumba: {'def': '[etym.?] a sort of (sweet-scented) earth or sand Vin.II,121, 142, 153 (at these passages used for besprinkling a damp living-cell); IV,33 (pāsāṇā, sakkharā, kaṭhalā, marumbā, vālikā); Mhvs 29, 8; Dpvs 19, 2; Miln.197 (pāsāṇa, sakkhara, khara, m.). (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】小圆石，小鹅卵石。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】小圆石，小鹅卵石。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Maruvā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. mūrvā, perhaps connected with Lat. malva] a species of hemp (Sanseveria roxburghiana) M.I,429. At J.II,115 we find reading marūdvā & marucavāka (C.), of uncertain meaning? (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Marīci: {'def': '【阴】光线，海市蜃楼(mirage)。marīcikā,【阴】海市蜃楼。marīcidhamma,【形】等於海市蜃楼(幻法)，无实质的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】光线，海市蜃楼。 ~kā, 【阴】海市蜃楼。 ~dhamma, 【形】等于海市蜃楼（幻法），无实质的。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic marīci; cp. Gr. marmaiρw to shimmer, glitter, maίra dog star, a)maruζsw sparkle; Lat. merus clear, pure; perhaps also mariyādā to be taken here] 1. a ray of light VvA.166. -- 2. a mirage J.VI,209; Vism.496; VbhA.34, 85; often comb^d with māyā (q. v.), e. g. Nd² 680 A^II; J.II,330.

--kammaṭṭhāna the “mirage” station of exercise DhA.III,165. --dhamma like a mirage, unsubstantial J.VI,206; Dh.46; DhA.I,337. (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Marīcikā: {'def': '(f.)=marīci 2; S.III,141; Vism.479 (in comp.); Dh.170 (=māyā DhA.III,166). (Page 524)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Masa: {'def': 'in line “āsadañ ca masañ jaṭaṁ” at J.VI,328 is to be comb^d with ca, and read as camasañ, i. e. a ladle for sacrificing (C.: aggi-dahanaṁ). (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Masati: {'def': '[mṛś] to touch: only in cpd. āmasati. The root is expl^d at Dhtp 305 as “āmasana.” Another root masu [mṛś?] is at Dhtm 444 given in meaning “macchera.” Does this refer to Sk. mṛṣā (=P. micchā)? Cp. māsati, māsana etc. (Page 525)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Masi: {'def': '【阳】烟灰，炭灰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】烟灰，炭灰。(p251)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】